KIA Forte 2017 Owners manual - DigitalOcean

7

Kia, THE COMPANYThank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-

cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you

with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the

time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes

at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can

be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a

result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-

ble to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

YDM USA FOREWORD.QXP 5/1/2016 12:36 PM Page 1

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia dealerknows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-tion.

Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models. Therefore, some of the equipmentdescribed in this manual, along with the various illustrations,may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2016 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.

All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated inwhole or in part without the written consent of Kia MOTORSAMERICA, Inc.

Printed in Korea

Foreword


ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents


Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6

1

YDM USA 1.QXP 5/1/2016 12:37 PM Page 1

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from yourvehicle. Your Owner’s Manual canassist you in many ways. We strong-ly recommend that you read theentire manual. In order to minimizethe chance of death or injury, youmust read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections in the manual.Illustrations complement the wordsin this manual to best explain how toenjoy your vehicle. By reading yourmanual, you will learn about fea-tures, important safety information,and driving tips under various roadconditions.

The general layout of the manual isprovided in the Table of Contents.Use the index when looking for aspecific area or subject; it has analphabetical listing of all located inthe back of this manual.Sections: This manual has eight sec-tions plus an index. Each sectionbegins with a brief list of contents soyou can tell at a glance if that sectionhas the information you want.

You will find various types of safetyinstructions in this manual. Theseinstructions were prepared toenhance your personal safety.Carefully read and follow ALL proce-dures and recommendations provid-ed in these instructions.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting orhelpful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situationin which harm, serious bodilyinjury or death could result if thewarning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situationin which damage to your vehiclecould result if the caution isignored.


1 3

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel having a pumpoctane number ((R+M)/2) of 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. (Do not use methanol blend-ed fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed toobtain maximum performance withUNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-mize exhaust emissions and sparkplug fouling.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat has been specified. (Consult anauthorized Kia dealer for details.)• Tighten the cap until it clicks one

time, otherwise the Check Enginelight will illuminate.

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alco-hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-taining methanol (also known aswood alcohol) are being marketedalong with or instead of leaded orunleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanolmay be used in your vehicle.Do not use gasohol containing morethan 15% ethanol, and do not usegasoline or gasohol containing anymethanol. Ethanol provides lessenergy than gasoline and it attractswater, and it is thus likely to reduceyour fuel efficiency and could loweryour MPG results.Methanol may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system,engine control system and emissioncontrol system.Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or drivability prob-lems may not be covered by themanufacturer’s warranty if they resultfrom the use of:1. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.3. Gasohol containing more than 15

percent ethanol

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

WARNING - Refueling• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off.Attempts to force more fuelinto the tank can cause fueloverflow onto you and theground causing a risk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel capis installed securely to pre-vent fuel spillage, especiallyin the event of an accident.


Introduction

41

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15percent gasoline, and is manufac-tured exclusively for use in FlexibleFuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”may result in poor engine perform-ance and damage to your vehicle'sengine and fuel system. Kia recom-mends that customers do not usefuel with an ethanol content exceed-ing 15 percent.

✽✽ NOTICEYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantydoes not cover damage to the fuel sys-tem or any performance problemscaused by the use of “E85” fuel.

✽✽ NOTICENever use any fuel containingmethanol. Discontinue use of anymethanol containing product whichmay inhibit proper drivability.

Other fuelsUsing fuels that contain Silicone (Si),MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene(Fe), and Other metalic additives,may cause vehicle and engine dam-age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,life cycle reduction, etc.Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL) may illuminate.

✽✽ NOTICEDamage to the fuel system or per-formance problem caused by the useof these fuels may not be covered byyour New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Gasoline containing MMTSome gasoline contains harmful man-ganese-based fuel additives Such asMMT(Me thy l cyc lopen tad ieny lManganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does notrecommend the use of gasoline con-taining MMT. This type of fuel canreduce vehicle performance and affectyour emission control system. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp on thecluster may come on.

Do not use methanolFuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your vehicle.This type of fuel can reduce vehicleperformance and damage componentsof the fuel system, engine control sys-tem and emission control system.


1 5

Introduction

Fuel AdditivesKia recommends that you use goodquality gasolines treated with deter-gent additives such as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline, which help pre-vent deposit formation in the engine.These gasolines will help the enginerun cleaner and enhance performanceof the Emission Control System. Formore information on TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline, please go to thewebsite (www.toptiergas.com)For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,and have problems starting or theengine does not run smoothly, addi-tives that you can buy separately maybe added to the gasoline.If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is notavailable, one bottle of additive shouldbe added to the fuel tank at every7,500miles or every engine oil changeis recommended. Additives are avail-able from your authorized Kia dealeralong with information on how to usethem. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countriesIf you are going to drive your vehiclein another country, be sure to:• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

No special break-in period is need-ed. By following a few simple precau-tions for the first 600 miles (1,000km) you may add to the perform-ance, economy and life of your vehi-cle.• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions perminute) between 2,000 rpm and4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed forlong periods of time, either fast orslow. Varying engine speed isneeded to properly break-in theengine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-gencies, to allow the brakes to seatproperly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-tion.

VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCESS


Introduction

61

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERSThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle'ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety sys-tems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:* How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;* Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/ fastened;

* How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the acceleratorand/or brake pedal; and,

* How fast the vehicle was travel-ing.

These data can help provide a bet-ter understanding of the circum-stances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded bythe EDR under normal driving con-ditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion) are recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2

YDM USA 2.QXP 2016-05-02 13:59 Page 1


22

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Hood...................................................4-35

2. Head lamp ................................4-91, 7-77

3. Fog lamp...................................4-94, 7-77

4. Wheel and tire.............................7-47, 8-5

5. Outside rearview mirror......................4-50

6. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-96, 7-41

7. Windows.............................................4-30

8. Front removable towing hook.............6-28

OYDM016005

■ Front view

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.


2 3


1. Door locks ..........................................4-17

2. Fuel filler lid........................................4-37

3. Rear combination lamp ......................7-81

4. High mounted stop lamp....................7-86

5. Trunk ................................4-21, 4-23, 4-27

6. Antenna............................................4-143

OYDM016006

■ Rear view




42

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle ................................4-17

2. Driver position memory system button ...3-8

3. Outside rearview mirror control ............4-51

4. Central door lock switch .......................4-18

5. Power window lock switch ....................4-33

6. Power window switch............................4-30

7. Hood release lever................................4-35

8. Instrument panel illuminationcontrol switch ........................................4-55

9. LKAS On/Off button..............................5-65

10. ESC off button ....................................5-37

11. Steering wheel warmer On/Off Button .................................................4-46

12. BSD On/Off button..............................5-73

13. Steering wheel....................................4-44

14. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ....................................................4-45

15. Trunk lid release lever.........................4-21

16. Fuel filler lid release lever...................4-37

17. Fuse box .............................................7-61

OYDM016001N❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.


2 5


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster................................4-54

2. Lighting control lever ...........................4-91

3. Audio remote control buttons ............4-144

4. Horn.....................................................4-45

5. Driver's front air bag............................3-46

6. Cruise control button ...........................5-56

7. Wiper and washer control lever...........4-96

8. Ignition switch orEngine start/stop button .................5-6, 5-8

9. Digital clock .......................................4-138

10. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2

11. Audio ....................................4-158, 4-206

12. Climate control system.........4-105, 4-115

13. Shift lever ........................5-14, 5-17, 5-23

14. Passenger's front air bag ..................3-46

15. Glove box ........................................4-130

16. Parking brake ....................................5-33

17. Cup holder.......................................4-133

18. LCD display control button ................4-56

OYD016002L




62

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OYDM076017/OYDM076078

■■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 MPI Engine

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 GDI Engine

1. Engine oil dipstick ..............................7-30

2. Engine oil filler cap.............................7-31

3. Engine coolant reservoir ....................7-32

4. Radiator cap.......................................7-33

5. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................7-35

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ......7-36

7. Air cleaner ..........................................7-37

8. Positive battery terminal.....................7-44

9. Negative battery terminal ...................7-44

10. Fuse box ..........................................7-61


2 7


OYDM076078

■■ Gasoline Gamma 1.6T-GDI Engine

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir ....................7-32

2. Engine oil filler cap.............................7-31

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................7-35

4. Air cleaner ..........................................7-37

5. Fuse box ............................................7-61

6. Negative battery terminal ...................7-44

7. Positive battery terminal.....................7-44

8. Engine oil dipstick ..............................7-30

9. Radiator cap.......................................7-33

10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-36



Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2• Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-8

• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . 3-34• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

• Occupant detection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

• Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation

and non-inflation conditions of the air bag). . . . . . 3-51

• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-

equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 3



23

Driver’s seat(1) Seat adjustment, forward /

backward(2) Seatback recliner(3) Seat adjustment, height

(for driver’s seat)(4) Lumbar support

(for driver’s seat)(5) Driver position memory system*(6) Headrest

Front passenger’s seat(7) Seat adjustment, forward /

backward(8) Seatback recliner(9) Headrest

Rear seat(10) Armrest(11) Headrest(12) Seatback folding lever

(trunk, for 4 Door)*(13) Seatback folding lever

(for 5 Door)

* : if equipped

SEAT

OYDM036001N

Manual seat

• 5 Door

• 4 Door

Power seat


3 3


WARNING - Uprightingseat

Do not press the release leveron a manual seatback withoutholding and controlling theseatback. The seatback willspring upright possibly impact-ing you or other passengers.

WARNING - Loose objectsDo not place anything in the dri-ver's foot well or under the frontseats. Loose objects in the dri-ver's foot area could interfere withthe operation of the foot pedals.

WARNING- Driver responsibility for

passengers

The driver must advise the pas-senger to keep the seatback inan upright position wheneverthe vehicle is in motion. If a seatis reclined during an accident,the restraint system's ability torestrain will be greatly reduced.

1KMN3661

WARNING - Seat cushionOccupants should never sit onaftermarket seat cushions or sit-ting cushions. The passenger'ships may slide under the lap por-tion of the seat belt during anaccident or a sudden stop.

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-ing. This could result in lossof control of your vehicle.

• Do not allow anything to inter-fere with the normal positionof the seatback and seatbackadjustment.

• Sit as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel whilestill maintaining comfortablecontrol of your vehicle. A dis-tance of at least 10" from yourchest to the steering wheel isrecommended. Failure to doso could result in air bag infla-tion injuries to the driver.



43

Front seat adjustment - manual Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked securelyby trying to move forward and back-ward without using the lever. If theseat moves, it is not locked properly.

WARNING - Unexpectedseat movement

After adjusting a manual seat,always check that it is locked byshifting your weight to the frontand back. Sudden or unexpect-ed movement of the driver'sseat could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle.

OYDDSA2002

WARNING - Seat adjustment

• Do not adjust the seat whilewearing seat belts. Moving theseat forward will cause strongpressure on the abdomen.

• Do not place your hand nearthe seat bottom or seat trackwhile adjusting the seat. Yourhand could get caught in theseat mechanism.

WARNING - Small ObjectsUse extreme caution when pick-ing small objects trapped underthe seats or between the seatand the center console. Yourhands might be cut or injuredby the sharp edges of the seatsmechanism.


3 5


Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of theseat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place.(The lever MUST return to its orig-inal position for the seatback tolock.)

Seat Cushion height (for driver's seat)

To change the height of the seatcushion push the lever upwards ordownwards.• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.• To raise the seat cushion, push the

lever up several times.

Lumbar support (for driver`s seat, if equipped)

Press the front portion of the switch toincrease support, or the rear portionof the switch to decrease support.

OYDDSA2004

OYDDSA2003

OYDDSA2008



63

Front seat adjustment - power(if equipped)The front seat can be adjusted byusing the control switch located onthe outside of the seat cushion.Before driving, adjust the seat to theproper position so as to easily con-trol the steering wheel, pedals andswitches on the instrument panel.

When in operation, the power seat-consumes a large amount of electri-cal power. To prevent unnecessarycharging system drain, don’t adjustthe power seat longer than neces-sary while the engine is not running.

Forward and backward

Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seat to thedesired position. Release the switchonce the seat reaches the desiredposition.

OYDDSA2005

CAUTION - Power seatadjustments

The power seating controlsfunction by electronic motor.Excessive operation may causedamage to the electrical equip-ment.

CAUTION - Power SeatingDo not operate two or morepower seat control switches atthe same time. Doing so maydamage the power seat motor orelectrical components.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

Do not leave children unattend-ed in the vehicle. Children mightoperate features of the vehiclethat could injure them.


3 7


Seatback angle

Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seatback tothe desired angle. Release theswitch once the seat reaches thedesired position.

Seat cushion height (for driver's side)

Pull the front portion of the controlswitch up to raise or down to lowerthe front part of the seat cushion. Pullthe rear portion of the control switchup to raise or down to lower the rearpart of the seat cushion. Release theswitch once the seat reaches thedesired position.

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat, if equipped)

The lumbar support can be adjustedby pressing the lumbar supportswitch on the side of the driver'sseat. Press the front portion of theswitch to increase support, or therear portion of the switch to decreasesupport.

OYDDSA2006

OYDDSA2007 OYDDSA2008



83

Driver position memory system(if equipped, for power seat)

A driver position memory system isprovided to store and recall the driverseat position with a simple buttonoperation. By saving the desired posi-tion into the system memory, differentdrivers can reposition the driver seatbased upon their driving preference.If the battery is disconnected, thedesired seat position memory willneed to be re-saved.

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorStoring driver’s seat positions

1. Vehicle speed is below 3 mph (3km/h) and the engine start/stopbutton is ON or ignition switch ON.

2. Adjust the driver seat to positioncomfortable for the driver.

3. Press SET button on the controlpanel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons(1 or 2) within 5 seconds afterpressing the SET button. The sys-tem will beep twice when memoryhas been successfully stored.

OYDDSA2014

WARNING - Driver posi-tion memory system

Never attempt to operate thedriver position memory systemwhile the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss of controlof your vehicle, and an accidentcausing death, or serious injury.


3 9


Recalling positions from memory

1. Vehicle speed is below 3 mph (3km/h).

2. To recall the position in memory,press the desired memory button(1 or 2). The system will beeponce, then the driver seat willautomatically adjust to the storedpositions.

Adjusting the control switch for thedriver seat while the system is recall-ing the stored position will cause themovement to stop and move in thedirection that the control switch ismoved.

Easy access function (if equipped)With the shift lever in the P position,the system will move the driver's seatautomatically as follows:• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rear-ward when the ignition key isremoved and front driver’s door isopened.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the ignition key isinserted.

• With smart key system- It will move the driver’s seat rear-

ward when the engine start/stopbutton is turned to the OFF posi-tion and front driver’s door isopened.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the engine start/stopbutton is turned to the ACC orSTART position.

You can activate or deactivate thisfeature. Refer to "User settings" inchapter 4.

Headrest (for front seat)

The driver's and front passenger'sseats are equipped with a headrestfor the occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and front passen-ger, but also helps protect the headand neck in the event of a collision.

OMG038400



103

For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of gravityof most people's head is similar withthe height of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the headrest as close toyour head as possible.For this reason, the use of a cushionthat holds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3).

OYDDSA2009

WARNING - Headrestremoval/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehiclewith the headrests removed.Headrests can provide criticalneck and head support in acrash.

• Do not adjust the headrestheight while the vehicle is inmotion. Driver may lose con-trol of the vehicle.


3 11


✽✽ NOTICEIf you recline the seatback towardsthe front with the headrest and seatcushion raised, the headrest maycome in contact with the sunvisor orother parts of the vehicle.

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest:1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline switch (1).2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

WARNING - HeadrestRemoval

NEVER allow anyone to ride in aseat with the headrest removed.Headrests can provide criticalneck and head support in acrash.

OYD034102

■ Type B

■ Type A

OYD034100OYFH034205



123

To reinstall the headrest :1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the releasebutton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with therecline switch or lever (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-priate height.

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided onthe back of the front passenger’sseatback.

WARNING - Seatbackpocket

Do not put heavy or sharpobjects in the seatback pocket.An occupant could contact suchobjects in a crash. Heavyobjects in the front passengerseatback could also interferewith the air bag sensing system.

OYDDCO2051

WARNING - HeadrestReinstallation

To reduce the risk of injury to thehead or neck, always make surethe head rest is locked into posi-tion and adjusted properly afterreinstalling.

OYD034103

■ Type B

■ Type A

OYD034101


3 13


Rear seat adjustmentHeadrest (for rear seat)

The rear seat is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions forthe occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides com-fort for passengers, but also helpsprotect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of gravityof most people's head is similar withthe height as the top of their eyes.Also adjust the headrest as close toyour head as possible. For this rea-son, the use of a cushion that holdsthe body away from the seatback isnot recommended. Adjusting the height up and down

(if equipped)

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3).

OYDDSA2012

ONF03940I



143

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it asfar as it can go then press therelease button (1) while pulling theheadrest upward (2).To reinstall the headrest, put theheadrest poles (3) into the holeswhile pressing the release button (1).Then adjust it to the appropriateheight and ensure that it locks inposition.

Armrest

To use the armrest, pull it forwardfrom the seatback.

Folding the rear seatThe rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or toincrease the luggage capacity of thevehicle.

OYDDSA2013

OYDDSA2019

WARNING - FoldedSeatback

Never allow passengers to siton top of the folded down seat-back while the vehicle is mov-ing. This is not a proper seatingposition and no seat belts areavailable for use. This couldresult in serious injury or deathin case of an accident or sud-den stop.


3 15


To fold the rear seatback :

• 4 door1. Make sure the rear seat belt web-

bing is in the guide to prevent theseat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to theupright position and if necessary,slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to thelowest position.

4. Open the trunk.

5.Pull the lock release lever (1) andfold the rear seatback forward anddown firmly.If the seat belt locks after unfoldingthe rear seatback, pull out thelocked seat belt, release it then pullit out again.

OYDDSA2017

OYDDSA2018

WARNING - ObjectsObjects carried on the foldeddown seatback should notextend higher than the top ofthe front seatbacks. This couldallow cargo to slide forward andcause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

OYDDSA2016



163

• 5 door1. Set the front seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide thefront seat forward.

2. Lower the rear headrests to lowestposition.

3. Pull the lock release lever (1) andfold the rear seatback forward anddown firmly.

4. To use the rear seat, lift and pull theseatback backward. Pull the seat-back firmly until it clicks into place.Make sure the seatback is locked inplace. When you return the seat-back to its upright position, alwaysbe sure it has locked into position bypushing on the top of the seatback.

If you can not see the red line atthe folding lever, it means the seat-back is locked completely.

To unfold the rear seat

1. To use the rear seat, lift and pullthe seatback rearward. Pull theseatback firmly until it clicks intoplace. Make sure the seatback islocked in place. When you returnthe seatback to its upright posi-tion, always be sure it has lockedinto position by pushing on the topof the seatback.

2. Return the rear seat belt to theproper position.

3. When the seatback is completelyinstalled, check the seatback fold-ing lever again.

When returning the rear seatbacks tothe upright position, remember toreturn the rear shoulder belts to theirproper position.

OYDDSA3042

WARNING - CargoDo not place heavy objects inthe rear seats, since they can-not be properly secured andmay hit vehicle occupants in afrontal collision.

WARNING - Rear seatbackWhen returning the rear seat-back from a folded to an uprightposition, hold the seatback andreturn it slowly. Ensure that theseatback is completely lockedinto its upright position bypushing on the top of the seat-back. In an accident or suddenstop, the unlocked seatbackcould allow cargo to move for-ward with great force and enterthe passenger compartment.


3 17


Seat belt restraint systemSeat belts are designed to bear uponthe bony structure of the body, andshould be worn low across the frontof the pelvis, chest and shoulders, asapplicable; wearing the lap section ofthe belt across the abdominal areamust be avoided.Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protection forwhich they have been designed.A slack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.Care should be taken to avoid con-tamination of the webbing with pol-ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-ularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mild soapand water. The belt should bereplaced if webbing becomes frayed,contaminated or damaged.

• For maximum restraint system pro-tection, the seat belts must alwaysbe used whenever the vehicle ismoving. A properly positionedshoulder belt should be positionedmidway over your shoulder acrossyour collarbone.

• Never allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. See childrestraint system section for furtherdiscussion.

SEAT BELTS

WARNING - Shoulder beltNever wear the shoulder beltunder your arm or behind yourback. An improperly positionedshoulder belt cannot protect theoccupant in a crash.

WARNING - Damagedseat belt

Replace the entire seat beltassembly if any part of the web-bing or hardware is damaged asyou can no longer be sure that adamaged seat belt will provideprotection in a crash.

WARNING - Twisted seatbelt

Make sure your seat belt is nottwisted when worn. A twistedseat belt may not properly pro-tect you in an accident andcould even cut into your body.

WARNING - Seat belt buckle

Do not allow foreign material(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) toobstruct the seat belt buckle.This may prevent the seat beltfrom fastening securely.



183

Seat belt warning (if equipped)

As a reminder to the driver, the dri-ver’s seat belt warning lights will illu-minate for approximately 6 secondseach time you turn the ignition switchON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition switch is turned ONor if it is disconnected after the igni-tion switch is turned ON, the seatbelt warning light will illuminate untilthe belt is fastened.If you continue not to fasten the seatbelt and you drive over 9 mph (9km/h), the illuminated warning lightwill start to blink until you drive under6 mph (6 km/h).If you continue not to fasten the seatbelt and you drive over 12 mph (20km/h) the seat belt warning chimewill sound for approximately 100 sec-onds and the corresponding warninglight will blink.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out ofthe retractor and insert the metal tab(1) into the buckle (2). There will bean audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle.

B180A01NF-1

OYDESA2035CN


3 19


The seat belt automatically adjusts tothe proper length only after the lapbelt portion is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips. Ifyou lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and letyou move around. If there is a sud-den stop or impact, however, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.If you are unable to pull out the seatbelt from the retractor, firmly pull thebelt out and release it. Then you willbe able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoul-der belt anchor to one of the 4 posi-tions for maximum comfort and safety.The height of the adjusting seat beltshould not be too close to your neck.The shoulder portion should beadjusted so that it lies across yourchest and midway over your shouldernearest the door and not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the heightadjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up(1). To lower it, push it down (3) whilepressing the height adjuster button (2).Release the button to lock the anchorinto position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it haslocked into position. Never position theshoulder belt across your neck or face.

WARNING - Seat beltreplacement

Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident. Failure toreplace seat belts after an acci-dent could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not pro-vide protection in the event ofanother collision.

WARNING - Shoulder beltpositioning

Never position the shoulder beltacross your neck or face.

OMG035038



203

You should place the lap belt portionas low as possible and snugly acrossyour hips. If the lap belt is located toohigh on your waist, it may increasethe chance of injury in the event of acollision.The arm closest to the seat beltbuckle should be over the belt whilethe other arm should be under thebelt as shown in the illustration.

Seat belts - Front passenger andrear seat 3-point system withcombination locking retractorTo fasten your seat belt

Combination retractor type seat beltsare installed in the rear seat posi-tions to help accommodate theinstallation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor isalso installed in the front passengerseat position, it is strongly recom-mended that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVERplace an infant restraint system inthe front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines thefeatures of both an emergency lock-ing retractor seat belt and an auto-matic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab intothe buckle. There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into thebuckle. When not securing a childrestraint, the seat belt operates in thesame way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portionof the seat belt is adjusted manuallyso that it fits snugly around your hips.When the seat belt is fully extendedfrom the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, theseat belt operation changes to allowthe belt to retract, but not to extend(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-tem” in this section.To convert from the automatic lock-ing feature to the emergency lockingoperation mode, allow the unbuckledseat belt to fully retract.

B200A01NF


3 21


When using the rear center seat belt,the buckle with the “CENTER” markmust be used.

To release the seat belt

The seat belt is released by pressingthe release button (1) of the lockingbuckle. When it is released, the beltshould automatically draw back intothe retractor.If this does not happen, check thebelt to be sure it is not twisted, thentry again.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts.1. Retractor pre-tensionerThe retractor pre-tensioner, which isa supplement system of the seatbelts. The purpose of the retractorpre-tensioner is to tighten the shoul-der belt against the occupant's upperbody in certain frontal collisions.

OYDDSA2021 B210A01NF-1

OXMA033101



223

2. Emergency Fastening Device(EFD)

The Emergency Fastening Device(EFD) is a supplemental system ofthe seat belts. The purpose of theEFD is to tighten the lap belt againstthe occupant's pelvis in certainfrontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner seat belts may beactivated, when a frontal collision issevere enough, together with the airbags.When the vehicle stops suddenly, orif the occupant tries to lean forwardtoo quickly, the seat belt retractormay lock into position. In certainfrontal collisions (or side collisions),the pre-tensioner may activate andpull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.If the system senses excessive ten-sion on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates,the load limiter inside the retractorpre-tensioner will release some of thepressure on the affected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following com-ponents.Their locations are shown inthe illustration:1. SRS air bag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)

To obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the properposition. Please read and follow allof the important information andprecautions about your vehicle'soccupant safety features - includ-ing seat belts and air bags - thatare provided in this manual.

2. Be sure you and your passengersalways wear seat belts properly.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the pre-tensioner seat beltsare activated, a loud noise may beheard and fine dust, which mayappear to be smoke, may be visiblein the passenger compartment.These are normal operating condi-tions and are not hazardous.

ODMESA2024


3 23


Because the sensor that activates theSRS air bag is connected with thepre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warning light ( ) on the instru-ment panel will illuminate for approxi-mately 6 seconds after the ignitionswitch has been turned to the ONposition, and then it should turn off.If the pre-tensioner seat belt doesnot work properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if the SRS air baghas not malfunctioned. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turnedON, or if it remains illuminated afterilluminating for approximately 6 sec-onds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, please havean authorized Kia dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not attempt to service or repairthe pre-tensioner seat belt system inany manner. Do not attempt toinspect or replace the pre-tensionerseat belts yourself. This must bedone by an authorized Kia dealer.

Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-ate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. If the pre-tensioner mustbe replaced, contact an authorizedKia dealer.

WARNING - Skin irritationWash all exposed skin areasthoroughly after an accident inwhich the pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated. The finedust from the pre-tensioneractivation may cause skin irrita-tion and should not be breathedfor prolonged periods.

WARNING - Hot pre-tensioner

Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies for severalminutes after they have beenactivated. When the pre-ten-sioner seat belt mechanismfires during a collision the pre-tensioner becomes hot and canburn you.

YDM USA 3.QXP 2016-05-03 19:37 Page 23


243

Seat belt precautionsInfant or small childAll 50 states have child restraintlaws. You should be aware of thespecific requirements in your state.Child and/or infant seats must beproperly placed and installed in therear seat. For more informationabout the use of these restraints,refer to “Child restraint system” in thissection.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occu-py the rear seat and use the availablelap/shoulder belts. The lap portionshould be fastened snug on the hipsand as low as possible. Periodicallycheck belt fit. A child's squirming couldput the belt out of position. Childrenare given the most safety in the eventof an accident when they arerestrained by a proper restraint systemin the rear seat. If a larger child (overage 12) must be seated in the frontseat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoul-der belt and the seat should be placedin the rearmost position. Children age12 and under should be restrainedsecurely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child age 12 and under in thefront seat. NEVER place a rear facingchild seat in the front seat of a vehicle.If the shoulder belt portion slightlytouches the child’s neck or face, tryplacing the child closer to the center ofthe vehicle. If the shoulder belt stilltouches their face or neck they need tobe returned to a child restraint system.

WARNING - Small chil-dren

Do not allow small children toride in the vehicle without anappropriate child restraint sys-tem. If the shoulder belt comesin contact with your child's neckor face your child is too small toride in the vehicle. In a crash theseat belt will inflict injury toyour child's neck, throat andface.


3 25


Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wearlap/shoulder belt assemblies when-ever possible according to specificrecommendations by their doctors.The lap portion of the belt should beworn AS SNUGLY AND LOW ASPOSSIBLE on the hips, not acrossthe abdomen.

Injured personA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you shouldconsult a physician for recommenda-tions.

One person per beltTwo people (including children)should never attempt to use a singleseat belt. This could increase theseverity of injuries in case of an acci-dent.

Do not lie downTo reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achievemaximum effectiveness of therestraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the frontseats should be in an upright positionwhen the vehicle is moving. A seatbelt cannot provide proper protectionif the person is lying down in the rearseat or if the front seat is in a reclinedposition.WARNING - Pregnant

womenPregnant women must neverplace the lap portion of the seatbelt above or on the abdomenwhere the fetus is located. Theforce of the seat belt during acollision will crush the fetus.



263

Care of seat beltsSeat belt systems should never bedisassembled or modified. In addi-tion, care should be taken to assurethat seat belts and belt hardware arenot damaged by seat hinges, doorsor other abuse.

Periodic inspectionAll seat belts should be inspectedperiodically for wear or damage ofany kind. Any damaged parts shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and drySeat belts should be kept clean anddry. If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solu-tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasivesshould not be used because theymay damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat beltsThe entire in-use seat belt assemblyor assemblies should be replaced ifthe vehicle has been involved in anaccident. This should be done even ifno damage is visible. Additionalquestions concerning seat belt oper-ation should be directed to anauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Pinched Seatbelts

Make sure that the webbingand/or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rearseat when returning the rearseatback to its upright position.A caught or pinchedwebbing/buckle may becomedamaged and could fail during acollision or sudden stop.


3 27


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMChildren riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat. Larger children who are not ina child restraint should use one of theseat belts provided.You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Childand/or infant safety seats must beproperly placed and installed in therear seat. You must use a commer-cially available child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS).Child restraint systems are designedto be secured in vehicle seats by seatbelt, or by a tether anchor and/orLATCH anchors.

Children could be injured or killed ina crash if their restraints are notproperly secured. For small childrenand babies, a child seat or infant seatmust be used. Before buying a par-ticular child restraint system, makesure it fits your car seat and seatbelts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the man-ufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

When the child restraint system is notin use, store it in the luggage area orfasten it with a seat belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in case of asudden stop or an accident.

WARNING - Restraint location

Never install a child or infantseat on the front passenger'sseat.A child riding in the front pas-senger seat can be forcefullystruck by an inflating air bag.

WARNING - Hot childrestraint

A child restraint system canbecome very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle on a sunny day.Be sure to check the seat cover,buckles and latches beforeplacing a child in the restraintsystem.



283

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, theuse of a child seat or infant seat isrequired. This child seat or infantseat should be of appropriate size forthe child and should be installed inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.

For safety reasons, we recommendthat the child restraint system beused in the rear seats.Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions andonly lock under extreme or emer-gency conditions (emergency lockmode), you must manually changethese seat belts to the auto lockmode to secure a child restraint.If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed in this section, have thesystem checked immediately by yourauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Holding children

Never hold a child in your armsor lap when riding in a vehicle.The violent forces created dur-ing a crash will tear the childfrom your arms and throw thechild against the car’s interior.Always use a child restraintsystem which is appropriate foryour child's height and weight.

WARNING - Seat belt useDo not use one seat belt for twooccupants at the same time.This will eliminate any safetybenefit provided by the seat beltto the occupants.

CRS09

OTQ037038

Rear- facing child restraint system

Forward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - UnattendedChildren

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle. The vehicle can heatup very quickly, resulting ininjuries to the child in the vehicle.


3 29


✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle headrest preventsproper installation of a child seat (asdescribed in the child seat systemmanual), the headrest of the respec-tive seating position shall be read-justed or entirely removed.

Placing a passenger seat beltinto the auto lock mode

The auto lock mode will help preventthe normal movement of the child inthe vehicle from causing the seat beltto loosen and compromise the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the followingprocedure.

To install a child restraint system onthe outboard or center rear seats, dothe following:1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoulderbelt around or through the restraint,following the restraint manufactur-er’s instructions. Be sure the seatbelt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latchinto the buckle. Listen for the dis-tinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that itis easy to access in case of an emer-gency.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• Always follow the instructionsprovided by the child restraintsystem manufacturer. Childrestraint system manufactur-ers know their products best.

• Failure to observe this manu-al's instructions regardingchild restraint system and theinstructions provided with thechild restraint system couldresult in the improper installa-tion of the child restraint sys-tem which may reduce theprotection to your child in acrash or a sudden stop.

E2MS103005

OEN036101



303

3. Pull the shoulder portion of theseat belt all the way out. When theshoulder portion of the seat belt isfully extended, it will shift theretractor to the “Auto Lock” (childrestraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portionof the seat belt to retract and listenfor an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-ing” sound. This indicates that theretractor is in the “Auto Lock”mode. If no distinct sound isheard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from thebelt as possible by pushing downon the child restraint system whilefeeding the shoulder belt back intothe retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seat beltis holding it firmly in place. If it isnot, release the seat belt andrepeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attemptingto pull more of the seat belt out ofthe retractor. If you cannot, theretractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode.

OEN036102 OEN036103 OEN036104


3 31


The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully.Therefore, the preceding sevensteps must be followed each time achild restraint is installed.To remove the child restraint, pressthe release button on the buckle andthen pull the lap/shoulder belt out ofthe restraint and allow the seat beltto retract fully.

Securing a child restraint seatwith tether anchorage system

Child restraint hook holders are locat-ed on the package tray (4 Door) or thefloor behind the rear seat (5 Door).

This symbol indicates theposition of the tetheranchor.

WARNING - Auto lockmode

Set the retractor to AutomaticLock mode when installing anychild restraint system.If the retractor is not in the AutoLock mode, the child restraintcan move when your vehicleturns or stops suddenly.

OYDESA4022

OYDDSA3043

• 4 Door

• 5 Door



323

1.Route the child restraint seat teth-er strap over the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap underthe headrest (remove the headrestand the re-install it) and betweenthe headrest posts, otherwiseroute the tether strap over the topof the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook tothe appropriate child restrainthook holder and tighten to securethe child restraint seat.

Check that the child restraint systemis secure by pushing and pulling it indifferent directions. Incorrectly fittedchild restraints may swing, twist, tipor separate causing death or seriousinjury.

Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturersmake child restraint seats that arelabeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-patible child restraint seats. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors andTethers for Children". These seatsinclude two rigid or webbing mount-ed attachments that connect to twoLATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates theneed to use seat belts to attach thechild seat in the rear seats.

OTF030030N

WARNING - Tether strapNever mount more than onechild restraint to a single tetheror to a single lower anchoragepoint. The increased loadcaused by multiple seats maycause the tethers or anchoragepoints to break.

B230D01NF


3 33


Child restraint symbols are locatedon the left and right rear seat backsto indicate the position of the loweranchors for child restraints.

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors arelocated in the left and right outboardrear seating positions. Their locationsare shown in the illustration.There is noLATCH anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The LATCH anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seatcushion of the rear seat left and rightoutboard seating positions.When you install your child's restraintsystem using the LATCH anchorsbuckle the shoulder lap belt, then lockthe retractor and pull the belt to removethe slack in the belt so it lies flat againstthe vehicle seat.Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the LATCHchild restraint, assure that the seat isproperly attached to the LATCH andtether anchors.Also, test the child restraint seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seatfrom side to side.Also try to tug the seatforward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

✽✽ NOTICEThe recommended weight for theLATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg).How to calculate the child restraintweight : Child restraint weight =

65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight

OTF030031N

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator

Lower Anchor

WARNING - Unused rearseatbelts

Always fasten the seatbeltsbehind the child restraint seatwhen they are not used tosecure the child seat. Failure todo so may result in child stran-gulation.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

Never attempt to attach aLATCH equipped seat in thecenter seating position. LATCHlower anchors are only to beused with the left and right rearoutboard seating positions. Youmay damage the anchors or theanchors may fail and break in acollision.



343

(1) Driver’s front air bag(2) Passenger’s front air bag(3) Side air bag(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, youand your passengers must alwayswear the safety belts provided inorder to minimize the risk and sever-ity of injury in the event of a collisionor rollover.

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OYDESA2024CN

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.


3 35


How does the air bag systemoperate • Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when theignition switch is turned to the ONor START the appropriate position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in theevent of serious frontal or side col-lision (if equipped with side air bagor curtain air bag) in order to helpprotect the occupants from seriousphysical injury.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate based upon the severity of acollision and its direction. Thesetwo factors determine whether thesensors produce an electronicdeployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of complex factors includ-ing vehicle speed, angles of impactand the density and stiffness of thevehicles or objects which yourvehicle hits in the collision.Though,factors are not limited to thosementioned above. Airbags deploydepending on the severity andangle of the impact.Airbags do not deploy in everyimpact situation.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you tosee the air bags inflate during anaccident. It is much more likely thatyou will simply see the deflated airbags hanging out of their storagecompartments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in certainside collisions, vehicles equippedwith a rollover sensor, side andcurtain air bags will inflate if thesensing system detects a rollover.When a rollover is detected, side andcurtain air bags will remain inflatedlonger to help provide protectionfrom ejection, especially when usedin conjunction with the seat belts.

• In order to help provide protectionin a severe collision, the air bagsmust inflate rapidly. The speed ofair bag inflation is a consequenceof extremely short time in which acollision occurs and the need toget the air bag between the occu-pant and the vehicle structuresbefore the occupant impacts thosestructures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe col-lision and is thus a necessary partof air bag design.



363

However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which can includefacial abrasions, bruises and bro-ken bones because the inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with thesteering wheel air bag can causefatal injuries, especially if theoccupant is positioned exces-sively close to the steering wheel.

Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they makea loud noise and they leave smokeand powder in the air inside of thevehicle. This is normal and is a resultof the ignition of the air bag inflator.After the air bag inflates, you mayfeel substantial discomfort in breath-ing due to the contact of your chestto both the seat belt and the air bag,as well as from breathing the smokeand powder. Open your doorsand/or windows as soon as possi-ble after the impact in order toreduce discomfort and preventprolonged exposure to smoke andpowder.Though smoke and powder are non-toxic,They may cause irritation to theskin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). Ifthis is the case, wash and rinse withcold water immediately and consult adoctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING - AirbagInflation

Sit as far back as possible fromthe steering wheel while stillmaintaining comfortable con-trol of the your vehicle. A dis-tance of at least 10" (25cm)from your chest to the steeringwheel is recommended. Failureto do so can result in airbaginflation injuries to the driver.


3 37


Installing a child restraint on afront passenger’s seat is forbidden

Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the air bag deploys, it wouldimpact the rear-facing child restraint,causing serious or fatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facingchild restraint in the front passen-ger’s seat either. If the front passen-ger air bag inflates, it would causeserious or fatal injuries to the child.

WARNING - Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storagearea's internal componentsimmediately after air bag infla-tion. The air bag related parts inthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel and the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors arevery hot. Hot components canresult in burn injuries.

1JBH3051

WARNING - Air bagdeployment

When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or cur-tain air bags, install the childrestraint system as far awayfrom the door side as possible.Inflation of the side and/or cur-tain air bags could impact thechild.



383

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warninglight in your instrument panel is toalert you of a potential problem withyour air bag - Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS).When the ignition switch is turnedON, the indicator light should illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds,then go off.

Have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer if:• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

SRS components and func-tions

The SRS consists of the followingcomponents:1. Driver's front air bag module2. Passenger's front air bag module3. Side air bag modules4. Curtain air bag modules5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-

blies*6. Air bag warning light7. SRS control module (SRSCM) /

Rollover sensor

W7-147

OTF032049N


3 39


8. Front impact sensors9. Side impact sensors10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator (Front passenger’s seatonly)

11. Occupant detection system (Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’sseat belt buckle sensors

13. Emergency fastening device(EFD)

* : if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components while the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to requireair bag deployment or pre-tensionerseat belt deployment.The SRS air bag warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate forabout 6 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position,after which the air bag warning lightshould go out.If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionof the SRS. Have an authorized Kiadealer inspect the air bag system assoon as possible.• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

The air bag modules are locatedboth in the center of the steeringwheel and in the front passenger'spanel above the glove box. When theSRSCM detects a sufficiently severeimpact to the front of the vehicle, itwill automatically deploy the front airbags.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)



403

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-ed directly into the pad covers willseparate under pressure from theexpansion of the air bags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows fullinflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-tion with a properly worn seat belt,slows the driver's or the passenger'sforward motion, reducing the risk ofhead and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating,enabling the driver to maintain for-ward visibility and the ability to steeror operate other controls.

B240B03L


B240B02L


B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING - Air bagobstructions

Do not install or place anyaccessories on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, or onthe front passenger's panelabove the glove box in a vehicleSuch objects may become dan-gerous projectiles if the air bagdeploys.


3 41


✽✽ NOTICEBefore you replace a fuse or discon-nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK positionand remove the ignition key. Neverremove or replace the air bag relatedfuse(s) when the ignition switch is inthe ON position. Failure to heed thiswarning will cause the SRS air bagwarning light to illuminate.

Occupant detection system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant detection system in the frontpassenger's seat.The occupant detection system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front airbag should be enabled (may inflate)or not. The driver's front air bag is notaffected or controlled by the occu-pant detection system.

Main components of occupantdetection system• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat track.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag sys-tems should be activated or deac-tivated.

• An indicator light located on theinstrument panel which illuminatesthe words PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicating the front passen-ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warn-ing light is interconnected with theoccupant detection system.

OYDNSA2037



423

If the front passenger seat is occupiedby a person that the system deter-mines to be of adult size, and he/shesits properly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extend-ed and their feet on the floor), thePASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-tor will turn off and the front passen-ger's air bag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the PASSENGER AIRBAG “OFF” indicator on the center faciapanel. This system detects the condi-tions 1~4 in the following table and acti-vates or deactivates the front passen-ger air bag based on these conditions.Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legscomfortably extended, feet on thefloor, and wearing the safety belt prop-erly) for the most effective protectionby the air bag and the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant DetectionSystem) may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions whichcan defeat the detection system.These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or cen-

ter console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locationswhich reduce the passengerweight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seat back.


3 43


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detectionsystem

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits inthe front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child dependingon his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child thanthe same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the frontpassenger seat. This is a normal condition.

Condition detected by the occupantdetection system

1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2

2. Infant or child restraint system

with 12 months old*3 *4

3. Unoccupied

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

PASSENGER AIRBAG “OFF” indica-

tor light

SRS warninglight

Front passengerair bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

WARNING - ODS systemRiding in an improper positionadversely affects the occupantdetection system (ODS) andmay result in the deactivation offront passenger air bag. It isimportant for the driver toinstruct the passenger as to theproper seating instructions ascontained in this manual.

(Continued)



443

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with the hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or cen-ter console.

- Never sit on one side of thefront passenger seat.

- Never place the feet on thedashboard.

B990A08O

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place the feet on thefront passenger seatback.

(Continued)


3 45


When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the PASSENGERAIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and ask the passenger to sitproperly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with their seatbelt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor). Restartthe engine and have the personremain in that position. This will allowthe system to detect the person andto enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator is still on, ask the passen-ger to move to the rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEThe PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position or afterthe engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is occupied, the occu-pant detection sensor will then clas-sify the front passenger after severalmore seconds.

Any child age 12 and under shouldride in the rear seat. Children toolarge for child restraints should usethe available lap/shoulder belts. Nomatter what type of crash, children ofall ages are safer when restrained inthe rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket, front seat covers or after marketseat heater to the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect theoccupant detection system.

B990A01O

WARNING - “AIR BAGOFF” light

Do not allow an adult passengerto ride in the front seat when thePASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator is illuminated, becausethe air bag will not deploy in theevent of a crash. The driver mustinstruct the passenger to reposi-tion himself in the seat. Failureto properly position yourselfmay lead to air bag deactivationresulting in air bag non-deploy-ment in a collision. If the PAS-SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-tor remains illuminated after thepassenger repositions them-selves properly and the car isrestarted, it is recommendedthat passenger move to the rearseat because the passenger'sfront air bag will not deploy.



463

If the occupant detection system isnot working properly, the SRS air bagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because the pas-senger's front air bag is connectedwith the occupant detection system. Ifthere is a malfunction of the occupantdetection system, the PASSENGERAIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-minate and the passenger's front airbag will inflate in frontal impact crash-es even if there is no occupant in thefront passenger's seat.

✽✽ NOTICEAir bags can only be used once - havean authorized Kia dealer replace theair bag immediately after deployment.

Driver's and passenger's frontair bag

Your vehicle is equipped with anAdvanced Supplemental Restraint(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulderbelts at both the driver and passen-ger seating position.

OYDDSA2025

OYDDSA2026

Driver’s front air bag

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING - ODSInterference

• Do not place a heavy load oran active electronic device (ex.laptop computer, after marketDMB/navigat ion/sate l l i teaudio, video game machine,MP3, etc.) in the front passen-ger seatback pocket or on thefront passenger seat.

• Do not hang onto the frontpassenger seat.

• Do not hang any items suchas seatback table on the frontpassenger seatback.

• Do not place feet on the frontpassenger seatback.

• Do not place any items underthe front passenger seat.

• Do not place sharp objects onthe front passenger seat.These may damage the occu-pant detection system, if theypuncture the seat cushion.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not spill any liquids on the

seat.Any of the above could interferewith the proper operation of theODS sensor thereby increasingthe risk of an injury in an acci-dent.


3 47


The indications of the system's pres-ence are the letters "AIR BAG"embossed on the air bag pad coverin the steering wheel and the pas-senger's side front panel pad abovethe glove box.

The SRS consists of air bagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel abovethe glove box.The purpose of the SRS is to providethe vehicle's driver and/or the frontpassenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt sys-tem alone in case of a frontal impactof sufficient severity. The SRS usessensors to gather information aboutthe driver's seat position, the driver'sand front passenger's seat beltusage and impact severity.

The advanced SRS offers the abilityto control the air bag inflation withtwo levels. A first stage level is pro-vided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided formore severe impacts.

The passenger’s front air bag isdesigned to help reduce the injury ofchildren sitting close to the instru-ment panel in low speed collisions.However, children are safer if theyare restraint in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity,seating position and seat belt usage,the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)controls the air bag inflation. Failureto properly wear seat belts canincrease the risk or severity of injuryin an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equippedwith an occupant detection system inthe front passenger's seat. The occu-pant detection system detects thepresence of a passenger in the frontpassenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's air bag under cer-tain conditions. For more detail, see"Occupant detection system" in thissection.Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the frontseat.These may cause a malfunctionof the seat track position sensor.



483

1JBB3520

1JBA3514

1JBA3522

Side impact

Rear impact

Rollover

Manufacturers are required by gov-ernment regulations to provide acontact point concerning modifica-tions to the vehicle for persons withdisabilities, which modifications mayaffect the vehicle’s advanced air bagsystem. That contact is Kia’s toll-freeCustomer Assistance center at 1-800-333-4KIA. However, Kia doesnot endorse nor will it support anychanges to any part or structure ofthe vehicle that could affect theadvanced air bag system, includingthe occupant detection system.

Advanced air bags are combinedwith pre-tensioner seat belts to helpprovide enhanced occupant protec-tion in frontal crashes. Front air bagsare not intended to deploy in colli-sions in which sufficient protectioncan be provided by the pre-tensionerseat belt alone.

Front air bags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impact orrollover crashes. In addition, front airbags will not deploy in frontal crash-es below the deployment threshold.

WARNING - SRS WiringDo not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment ofthe air bags or by rendering theSRS inoperative.

WARNING - Replacement /Modifications

The front passenger seat, dash-board or door should not bereplaced except by an authorizedKia dealer using original Kia partsdesigned for this vehicle andmodel. Any other such replace-ment or modification couldadversely affect the operation ofthe occupant detection systemand your advanced air bags.


3 49


Side air bag

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a sideair bag in each front seat.

The purpose of the air bag is to pro-vide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional pro-tection than that offered by the seatbelt alone.The side air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity of impact.The side air bags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

The side air bag is supplemental tothe driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitutefor them. Therefore your seat beltsmust be worn at all times while thevehicle is in operation.For best protection from the side airbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side air bag,both front seat occupants should sitin an upright position with the seatbelt properly fastened. The driver'shands should be placed on the steer-ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-tions. The passenger's arms andhands should be placed on their laps.

WARNING - Unexpecteddeployment

Avoid impact to the side air bagsensor when the ignition switchis ON to prevent unexpecteddeployment of the side air bag.

OYDDSA2027

OYDDSA2037

Front

WARNING - DeploymentDo not install any accessoriesincluding seat covers, on theside or near the side air bag asthis may affect the deploymentof the side air bags.



503

If seat or seat cover is damaged,have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kia dealer.Inform that your vehicle is equippedwith side air bags and an occupantdetection system.

Curtain air bag


Curtain air bags are located alongboth sides of the roof rails above thefront and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupantsand the rear outboard seat occupantsin certain side impact collisions.The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side impactcollisions, depending on the severityof impact.The curtain air bags are not designedto deploy in all side impact situations,collisions from the front or rear of thevehicle or in most rollover situations.Do not allow the passengers to leantheir heads or bodies onto doors, puttheir arms on the doors, stretch theirarms out of the window, or placeobjects between the doors and pas-sengers when they are seated onseats equipped with side and/or cur-tain air bags.

✽✽ NOTICENever try to open or repair any com-ponents of the side curtain air bagsystem. This should only be done byan authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Flyingobjects

Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.

OYDDSA2039

OYDDSA2038


3 51


Why didn’t my air bag go off ina collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the airbag)There are many types of accidentsin which the air bag would not beexpected to provide additionalprotection.These include rear impacts, sec-ond or third collisions in multipleimpact accidents, as well as lowspeed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module /Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor(4) Pressure side impact sensor

OYDM036004/OYDDSA2029/OYDM036006/OYDDSA2031

1 2 3



523

Problems may arise if the sensorinstallation angles are changed dueto the deformation of the frontbumper, body or B pillar where sidecollision sensors are installed. Havethe vehicle checked and repaired byan authorized Kia dealer.Installing aftermarket bumper guardsor replacing a bumper with non-gen-uine parts may adversely affect yourvehicle’s collision and air bag deploy-ment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflatein a frontal collision depending onthe severity of impact of the front col-lision.

WARNING - Air bag sensors

• Do not hit or allow any objectsto impact the locations whereair bag or sensors are installed.This may cause unexpectedair bag deployment, whichcould result in serious per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is alteredin any way, the air bags maydeploy when they should notor they may not deploy whenthey should.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around theair bag sensors. Have the vehi-cle checked and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer.

1JBA3513


3 53



Side air bags

Side air bags (side and/or curtain airbags) are designed to inflate when animpact is detected by side collisionsensors depending on the severity ofimpact resulting from a side impactcollision.

Although the front air bags (driver'sand front passenger's air bags) aredesigned to inflate in frontal colli-sions, they also may inflate in othertypes of collisions if the front impactsensors detect a sufficient frontalforce in another type of impact.Side and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate only in sideimpact collisions or rollover situa-tions, but they may inflate in othercollisions if they side impact sensorsdetect a sufficient impact.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimprovedroads or sidewalks, air bags maydeploy. Drive carefully on unim-proved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic to preventunintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions theair bags may not deploy. The airbags are designed not to deploy insuch cases because they may notprovide benefits beyond the pro-tection of the seat belts in such col-lisions.

1JBA3516

OYDDSA2040

1JBA3515



543

• Air bags are not designed to inflatein rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case,inflated air bags would not be ableto provide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate inside impact collisions, becauseoccupants move to the direction ofthe collision, and thus in sideimpacts, front air bag deploymentwould not provide additional occu-pant protection.

• In a slant or angled collision, theforce of impact may direct theoccupants in a direction where theair bags would not be able to pro-vide any additional benefit, andthus the sensors may not deployany air bags.

OED036100 1JBA35211JBA3516


3 55


• Just before impact, drivers oftenbrake heavily. Such heavy brakinglowers the front portion of the vehi-cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-cle with a higher ground clearance.Air bags may not inflate in this"under-ride" situation becausedeceleration forces that are detect-ed by sensors may be significantlyreplaced by such “under-ride” colli-sions.

• Front air bags may not inflate inrollover accidents because front airbag deployment would not provideadditional occupant protection.However, side and curtain air bagsmay inflate when the vehicle isrolled over.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-cle collides with objects such asutility poles or trees, where thepoint of impact is concentrated toone area and the full force of theimpact is not delivered to the sen-sors.

1JBA3517 1JBA3522 1JBA3518



563

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminate, orcontinuously remains on, have yourvehicle immediately inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, suchas removing, installing, repairing, orany work on the steering wheel mustbe performed by an authorized Kiadealer. Improper handling of the SRSsystem may result in serious person-al injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or one whichhas been moistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners could adverselyaffect the air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

If components of the air bag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. Anauthorized Kia dealer knows theseprecautions and can give you thenecessary information. Failure to fol-low these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of per-sonal injury.

Adding equipment to or modi-fying your air bag-equippedvehicleIf you modify your vehicle by chang-ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-tem, front end or side sheet metal orride height, this may affect the opera-tion of your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING - Tamperingwith SRS

Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring, or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in theaccidental inflation of the airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.


3 57


Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, somerequired by the U.S. NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), are attached to alert thedriver and passengers of potentialrisks of the air bag system.

OYDM036015

OYDNSA2033



Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6• Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17

• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-17

• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Trunk (4 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21• Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Smart trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Tailgate (5 Door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

4

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:44 Page 1

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

• Tilt and telescoping steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

• FLEX STEER (5door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• LCD window Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

LCD window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60• Over view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

• LCD Modes (for Type B, C instrument cluster) . . . 4-65

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

• Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 door) . . . 4-98

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

• Interior light welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

• Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

4

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:44 Page 2

• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

• Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

• Air Conditioning refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-116

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-125• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

• Luggage tray (5 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132• Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

• Climate control seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

• LCD monitor (clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

• Covering shelf (5 Door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

• Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

4

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:44 Page 3


44

Record your key numberThe key code num-ber is stamped onthe key code tagattached to the keyset. Should you

lose your keys, this number willenable an authorized Kia dealer toduplicate the keys easily. Removethe key code tag and store it in a safeplace. Also, record the key codenumber and keep it in a safe andhandy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

Type AUsed to start the engine, lock andunlock the doors.

Type BTo unfold the key, press the releasebutton and the key will unfold auto-matically.To fold the key, fold the key manuallywhile pressing the release button.

KEYS

■ Type A

OYDDCO2231/OYDECO2231

WARNING - Aftermarketkeys

Use only Kia original parts forthe ignition key in your vehicle.If an aftermarket key is used, theignition switch may not return toON after START. If this happens,the starter will continue to oper-ate causing possible fire due toexcessive current in the wiring.

OYDDCO2001

■ Type B

CAUTION - Key buttonoperation

Do not fold the key withoutpressing the release button.This may damage the key.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 4

4 5


Type CTo remove the mechanical key, pressand hold the release button andremove the mechanical key.To reinstall the mechanical key, putthe key into the hole and push it untila click sound is heard.

OYDDCO2002

■ Type C

WARNING - Ignition key(Smart key)

Never leave the keys in yourvehicle with unsupervised chil-dren. Leaving children unat-tended in a vehicle with a man-ual ignition key or a smart keyis dangerous.Children copy adults and theycould place the key in the igni-tion switch or press the startbutton. The key would enablechildren to operate power win-dows or other controls, or evenmake the vehicle move, whichcould result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 5


64

With a smart key, you can lock orunlock a door and even start theengine without inserting the key.The functions of the buttons on asmart key are similar to the remotekeyless entry. (Refer to the "Remotekeyless entry" in this chapter.)

Smart key functionsCarrying the smart key, you may lockand unlock the vehicle doors. Also,you may start the engine. Refer tothe following, for more details.

Locking

Pressing the button of the front out-side door handles with all doorsclosed and any door unlocked, locksall the doors. The hazard warninglights will blink and the chime willsound once to indicate that all doorsare locked. The button will only oper-ate when the smart key is within0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outsidedoor handle. If you want to makesure that a door has locked or not,you should check the door lock but-ton inside the vehicle or pull the out-side door handle.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

OYDDCO2007

OYDDCO2008

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 6

4 7


Even though you press the button,the doors will not lock and the chimewill sound for 3 seconds if any of thefollowing occurs:• The smart key is in the vehicle.• The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.• Any door except the trunk/tailgate

is opened.

Unlocking Pressing the button of the driver'soutside door handle with all doorsclosed and locked, unlocks the dri-ver's door. The hazard warning lightswill blink and the chime will soundtwice to indicate that the driver's dooris unlocked.Pressing the button in the front pas-senger's outside door handle with alldoors closed and locked, unlocks allthe doors. The hazard warning lightswill blink and the chime will soundtwice to indicate that all doors areunlocked. The button will only oper-ate when the smart key is within28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outsidedoor handle.

Start-upYou can start the engine withoutinserting the key. For detailed infor-mation refer to "Starting the enginewith a smart key" in section 5.

Smart key precautions• If you lose your smart key, you will

not be able to start the engine. Towthe vehicle, if necessary, and con-tact an authorized Kia dealer.

• A maximum of 2 smart keys can beregistered to a single vehicle. Ifyou lose a smart key, you shouldimmediately take the vehicle andkey to your authorized Kia dealerto protect it from potential theft.

• The smart key will not work if anyof following occurs:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which can inter-fere with normal operation of thesmart key.

- The smart key near a mobile two-way radio system or a cellularphone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is beingoperated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the mechanical key. If youhave a problem with the smart key,contact an authorized Kia dealer.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 7


84

• If the smart key is in close proximityto your cell phone or smart phone,the signal from the smart key couldbe blocked by normal operation ofyour cell phone or smart phone.This is especially important whenthe phone is active such as makingcall, receiving calls, text messaging,and/or sending/receiving emails.Avoid placing the smart key andyour cell phone or smart phone inthe same pants or jacket pocket andmaintain adequate distancebetween the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

✽✽ NOTICEChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due to changesor modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsiblefor compliance, it will not be cov-ered by your manufacturer’s vehiclewarranty.

CAUTION - TransmitterKeep the smart key away fromwater or any liquid as it canbecome damaged and not func-tion properly.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 8

4 9


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)Remote keyless entry systemoperations

Lock (1)All doors are locked if the lock buttonis pressed. If all doors (and trunk/tail-gate) are closed, the hazard warninglights will blink once to indicate thatall doors (and trunk/tailgate) arelocked.Also, if the lock button is pressedonce more within 4 seconds, thehazard warning lights will blink andthe chime will sound once to confirmthat the door is locked.However, if any door remains open,the hazard warning lights (and/or thechime) will not operate. But if alldoors are closed after the lock buttonis pressed, the hazard warning lightswill blink once.

Unlock (2) The driver's door is unlocked if theunlock button is pressed once. Thehazard warning lights will blink (forsmart key, the chime also sounds)twice to indicate that the driver's dooris unlocked.All doors are unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed once more within 4seconds. The hazard warning lightswill blink (for smart key, the chimealso sounds) twice again to indicatethat all doors are unlocked. Afterpressing this button, the doors willlock automatically unless you openany door within 30 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the keyless entry system is inoper-ative due to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer's vehicle warranty.

OYDDCO2004

■ Type B

■ Type A

OYDDCO2003

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 9


104

Trunk/tailgate open (3)(if equipped)The trunk/tailgate is opened if thebutton is pressed for more than 1second.Once the trunk/tailgate is opened andthen closed, the trunk/tailgate will lockautomatically.

Alarm (4)The horn sounds and the hazardwarning lights blink for about 30 sec-onds if this button is pressed formore than 0.5 seconds. To stop thehorn and lights, press any button onthe transmitter.

Transmitter precautionsThe transmitter (or smart key) will notwork if any of following occurs:• The ignition key is in the ignition

switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).• The battery in the transmitter (or

smart key) is weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter (or smart key) is

close to a radio transmitter such asa radio station or an airport whichcan interfere with normal operationof the transmitter.

When the transmitter (or smart key)does not work properly, open andclose the door with the ignition key. Ifyou have a problem with the trans-mitter (or smart key), contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

• If the transmitter is in close proximi-ty to your cell phone or smart phone,the signal from the transmitter couldbe blocked by normal operation ofyour cell phone or smart phone.Thisis especially important when thephone is active such as making call,receiving calls, text messaging,and/or sending/receiving emails.Avoid placing the transmitter andyour cell phone or smart phone inthe same pants or jacket pocket andmaintain adequate distancebetween the two devices.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 10

4 11





✽✽ NOTICEChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment. If the keyless entry sys-tem is inoperative due to changes ormodifications not expressly approvedby the party responsible for compli-ance, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Battery replacement

A battery should last for several years,but if the transmitter or smart key isnot working properly, try replacing thebattery with a new one. If you areunsure how to use or replace the bat-tery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Type A1. Pry open the transmitter cover.2. Replace the battery with a new

battery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryposition.

3. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

Type B1. Remove the mechanical key.2. Pry open the rear cover.3. Replace the battery with a new

battery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryposition.

4. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

■ Type B, COYDDCO2005

■ Type A

OYDDCO2006

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 11


124

• The transmitter or smart key isdesigned to give you years of trou-ble-free use, however it can mal-function if exposed to moisture orstatic electricity. If you are unsurehow to use or replace the battery,contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can causethe transmitter or smart key to mal-function. Be sure to use the correctbattery.

• An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andhuman health. Dispose thebattery according to yourlocal law(s) or regulation.

Immobilizer system (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped withan electronic engine immobilizer sys-tem to reduce the risk of unautho-rized vehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in theignition key and electronic devicesinside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, when-ever you insert your ignition key intothe ignition switch and turn it to ON,it checks and determines and verifiesthat the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the keycylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion. The immobilizer system acti-vates automatically. Without a validignition key for your vehicle, theengine will not start.Your Immobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password and shouldbe kept confidential. Do not leave thisnumber anywhere in your vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEKeep each key separately in order toavoid a starting malfunction.

OHD046100

CAUTION - Transmitterdamage

The transmitter or smart key canmalfunction if dropped, exposedto moisture, static electricity,heat or direct sunlight.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 12

4 13


Do not put metal accessories nearthe ignition switch.Metal accessories may interrupt thetransponder signal and may preventthe engine from being started.If you need additional keys or loseyour keys, consult an authorized Kiadealer.




✽✽ NOTICEChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

CAUTION - Immobilizerdamage

Do not expose your immobilizersystem to moisture, static elec-tricity and rough handling. Thismay damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizeralterations

Do not change, alter or adjustthe immobilizer system becauseit could cause the immobilizersystem to malfunction.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 13


144

This system is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entryinto the vehicle. This system is operat-ed in three stages: the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third isthe "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, thesystem provides an audible alarm withblinking of the hazard warning lights.

Armed stagePark the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Remove the ignition key from the

ignition switch and exit the vehicle.2. Make sure that all doors (and

trunk/tailgate) and engine hoodare closed and latched.

3. • Lock the doors by depressing thedoor lock button on the transmit-ter (or smart key).After completion of the stepsabove, the hazard warning lightswill blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.If any door, trunk/tailgate orengine hood remains open, thehazard warning lights won’toperate and theft-alarm will notarm. After this, if all doors,trunk/tailgate and engine hoodare closed, the hazard warninglights blink once.

• Lock the doors by pressing thebutton of the front outside doorhandles with the smart key inyour possession.After completion of the stepsabove, the hazard warning lightswill blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.If any door remains open, thehazard warning lights won’t oper-ate and theft-alarm will not arm.Close the door and try again tolock the doors.If trunk/tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warn-ing lights won’t operate and theft-alarm will not arm. Close thetrunk/tailgate or engine hood. Thehazard warning lights blink onceand theft-alarm arms.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stageDisarmed

stage

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 14

4 15


The theft-alarm system can be acti-vated by an authorized Kia dealer.If you want this feature, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

Do not arm the system until allpassengers have left the vehicle. Ifthe system is armed while a pas-senger(s) remains in the vehicle,the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s)leaves the vehicle. If any door (ortrunk/tailgate) or engine hood isopened within 30 seconds afterthe system enters the armedstage, the system will be disarmedto prevent unnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any ofthe following occurs while the systemis armed.• A front or rear door is opened without

using the mechanical key or trans-mitter (or smart key).

• The trunk/tailgate is opened with-out using the mechanical key ortransmitter (or smart key).

• The engine hood is opened.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuously forapproximately 27 seconds (2times). Toturn off the system, unlock the doorswith the transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stageThe system will be disarmed when:

Transmitter- The door unlock button is pressed.- The engine is started. (within 3

seconds)- The ignition switch is in the "ON"

position for 30 seconds or more.

Smart key- The door unlock button is pressed.- The button of the front outside door

is pressed while carrying the smartkey.

- The engine is started. (within 3seconds)

After the doors are unlocked, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice toindicate that the system is disarmed.After pressing the unlock button, if anydoor (or trunk/tailgate) is not openedwithin 30 seconds, the system will berearmed.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 15


164

• Avoid trying to start the enginewhile the alarm is activated. Thevehicle starting motor is disabledduring the theft-alarm stage.If the system is not disarmed withthe transmitter, insert the key intothe ignition switch, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position and waitfor 30 seconds. Then the systemwill be disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, consult yourauthorized Kia dealer.

• If the system is not disarmed withthe transmitter, insert the key intothe ignition switch and start theengine. Then the system will bedisarmed.

• If you lose your keys, consult yourauthorized Kia dealer.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 16

4 17


DOOR LOCKSOperating door locks fromoutside the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of thevehicle to unlock and toward thefront of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock/unlock the door with akey, all vehicle doors willlock/unlock automatically. (ifequipped with power door locks)

• From the driver’s door, turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle onceto unlock the driver’s door andonce more within 4 seconds tounlock all doors. (if equipped withpower door locks)

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key(or smart key). (if equipped)

• Once the doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle.

• When closing the door, push thedoor by hand. Make sure the doorsare closed securely.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may notwork properly due to freezing con-ditions.

• If the door is locked/unlockedmultiple times in rapid successionwith either the vehicle key or doorlock switch, the system may stopoperating temporarily in order toprotect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

Operating door locks frominside the vehicleWith the door lock button

• To unlock a door, pull the door lockbutton (1) to the "Unlock" position.The red mark (2) on the button willbe visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lockbutton (1) to the "Lock" position. Ifthe door is locked properly, the redmark (2) on the door lock buttonwill not show.

• To open a door, pull the door han-dle (3) outward.

OYDDCO2009

OYDDCO2010

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 17


184

• If the inner door handle of the frontdoor is pulled when the door lockbutton is in the lock position, thebutton will unlock and the door willopen. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch(or if the smart key is in the vehicle)and any front door is opened. (ifequipped)

If a power door lock ever fails to func-tion while you are in the vehicle, tryone or more of the following tech-niques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from outside.

With central door lock switch (if equipped)

Operate by pressing the central doorlock switch.• Press the switch to the "Lock" posi-

tion (1), all vehicle doors will lock.

OUB041180N

■ Passenger’s door

■ Driver's door

OYDM046401N

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 18

4 19


• Press the switch to the "Unlock"position (2), all vehicle doors willunlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch (orif the smart key is in the vehicle)and any front door is opened, thedoors will not lock when the "Lock"position (1) of the central door lockswitch is pressed. (if equipped)

Impact sensing door unlocksystem (if equipped)All doors will automatically unlockwhen an impact causes the air bagsto deploy.

Auto door lock/unlock feature (if equipped)• All doors will automatically lock

when the transaxle shift lever isshifted out of P (Park).

• All doors will automatically unlockwhen the transaxle shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

WARNING - Unattendedchildren /animals

Never leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannotescape the vehicle.

WARNING - DoorsThe doors should always befully closed and locked whilethe vehicle is in motion to pre-vent accidental opening of thedoor.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 19


204

Speed sensing door lock sys-tem (if equipped)All doors will be automatically lockedafter the vehicle speed exceeds 9mph. And all doors will be automati-cally unlocked when you turn theengine off or when you remove theignition key. (if equipped)An authorized Kia dealer can acti-vate or deactivate some auto doorlock/ unlock features as follows;• Auto door unlock by using the dri-

ver's door lock button• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting

the transaxle shift lever out of P(Park) or into P (Park)

• Auto door unlock when the ignitionkey is removed from the ignitionswitch (for smart key, when theENGINE START/STOP button isturned to the OFF position)

If you want to activate or deactivatesome door lock/unlock feature, con-sult an authorized Kia dealer.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided tohelp prevent children from acciden-tally opening the rear doors frominside the vehicle. The rear doorsafety locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.1. Open the rear door.2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the

hole and turn it to the lock ( ) posi-tion. the child safety lock (1) locatedon the rear edge of the door to thelock position. When the child safetylock is in the lock position, rear doorwill not open even when the innerdoor handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the out-side door handle (2).Even though the doors may beunlocked, the rear door will not openby pulling the inner door handle untilthe rear door child safety lock isunlocked.

OYDDCO2012

Lock

Unlock

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

Use the rear door safety lockswhenever children are in thevehicle. If a child accidentlyopens the rear doors while thevehicle is motion, he can fall out.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 20

4 21


Opening the trunk

• Press the trunk unlock button formore than 1 second on the trans-mitter (or smart key).

• Press the button on the trunk han-dle with the smart key in your pos-session.Once the trunk is opened and thenclosed, the trunk locks automati-cally.

• To open the trunk from inside thevehicle, pull the trunk lid releaselever.Once the trunk is opened and thenclosed, the trunk locks automati-cally.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, trunk lockand trunk mechanisms may not workproperly due to freezing conditions.

TRUNK (4 DOOR)

OYDDCO2014

OYDM046003N

CAUTIONMake certain that you close thetrunk before driving your vehi-cle. Possible damage may occurto attached hardware if the trunkis not closed prior to driving.

WARNINGThe trunk swings upward. Makesure no objects or people arenear the rear of the vehiclewhen opening the trunk.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 21


224

Closing the trunkTo close, lower the trunk lid, thenpress down on it until it locks. To besure the trunk lid is securely fas-tened, always check by trying to pullit up again.

Emergency trunk safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with anemergency trunk release lever locat-ed inside the trunk. If someone isinadvertently locked in the trunk,moving the handle in the direction ofthe arrow will release the trunk latchmechanism and open the.

No one should be allowed to occupythe trunk at any time. The trunk is avery dangerous location in the eventof a crash.Use the release lever for emergen-cies only. Use extreme caution,especially while the vehicle is inmotion.

WARNING - ExhaustFumes

The trunk lid should always bekept completely closed whilethe vehicle is in motion. If it isleft open or ajar, poisonousexhaust gases may enter thecar and serious illness or deathmay result.

WARNINGNo one should be allowed tooccupy the trunk at any time.The trunk is a very dangerouslocation in the event of a crash.

OYD046004L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 22

4 23


On a vehicle equipped with a smartkey, the trunk can be opened withno-touch activation using the SmartTrunk system.

How to use the Smart Trunk The trunk can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all theconditions below.• After 15 seconds when all doors

are closed and locked• Positioned in the detecting area for

more than 3 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Trunk does not operate

when:- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and is contin-uously detected.

- The smart key is detected within15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and 1.5 mfrom the front door handles. (forvehicles equipped with WelcomeLight)

- A door is not locked or closed.- The smart key is in the vehicle.

1. SettingTo activate the Smart Trunk, (1) Change the LCD modes to User

setting mode(2) Select the Door mode(3) Check the Smart Trunk.For more details, refer to "LCDWindows" in this chapter

SMART TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)

OYDM046318N

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 23


244

2. Detect and AlertIf you are positioned in the detectingarea (20~40 inches (50~100 cm)behind the vehicle) carrying a smartkey, the hazard warning lights will blinkand chime will sound for about 3 sec-onds to alert you the smart key hasbeen detected and the trunk will open.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not approach the detecting area ifyou do not want the trunk to open. Ifyou have unintentionally entered thedetecting area and the hazard warn-ing lights and chime starts to operate,leave the detecting area with thesmart key. The trunk will stay closed.

3. Automatic openingThe hazard warning lights will blinkand chime will sound 2 times andthen the trunk will open.

• Make certain that you close thetrunk before driving your vehicle.

• Make sure there are no people orobjects around the trunkbeforeopening or closing the trunk.

• Make sure to deactivate the Smarttrunk function when washing yourvehicle.Otherwise, the trunk may openinadvertently.

OYDM046319 OYDM046320N

WARNING• Make sure objects in the rear

cargo area do not come outwhen opening the trunk onthe slope way. It may causeserious injury.

• The key should be kept out ofreach of children. Children mayinadvertently open the SmartTrunk while playing around therear area of the vehicle.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 24

4 25


How to deactivate the Smart Trunkfunction using the smart key

1. Door lock2. Door unlock3. Trunk open4. AlarmIf you press any button of the smartkey during the Detect and Alertstage, the Smart Trunk function willbe deactivated.Make sure to be aware of how todeactivate the Smart Trunk functionfor emergency situations.

✽✽ NOTICE• If you press the door unlock but-

ton (2), the Smart Trunk functionwill be deactivated temporarily.But, if you do not open any doorfor 30 seconds, the smart trunkfunction will be activated again.

• If you press the trunk open button(3) for more than 1 second, thetrunk opens.

• If you press the door lock button(1) or trunk open button (3) whenthe Smart Trunk function is not inthe Detect and Alert stage, thesmart trunk function will not bedeactivated.

(Continued)

(Continued)• In case you have deactivated the

Smart Trunk function by pressingthe smart key button and opened adoor, the smart trunk function canbe activated again by closing andlocking all doors.

OYDDCO2007

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 25


264

Detecting area

• The Smart Trunk operates with awelcome alert if the smart key isdetected within 20~40 inches(50~100 cm) from the trunk.

• The alert stops at once if the smartkey is positioned outside thedetecting area during the Detectand Alert stage.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Trunk function will not

work if any of the followingoccurs:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which caninterfere with normal operationof the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobiletwo way radio system or a cellu-lar phone.

- Another vehicle's smart key isbeing operated close to yourvehicle.

• The detecting range may decreaseor increase when :- One side of the tire is raised to

replace a tire or to inspect thevehicle.

- The vehicle is slantingly parkedon a slope or unpaved road, etc.

OYDM046052

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:24 Page 26

4 27


Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlockedwhen all doors are locked orunlocked with the transmitter (orsmart key) or central door lockswitch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can beopened by pressing the handle andpulling it up.

• When all doors are lock if the tail-gate unlock button on the smart keyis pressed for more than 1 second,the tailgate is unlocked. Once thetailgate is opened and then closed,the tailgate is locked automatically.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, tailgatelock and tailgate mechanisms maynot work properly due to freezingconditions.

The tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when openingthe tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate firmly. Make surethat the tailgate is securely latched.Make sure your hands, feet andother parts of your body are safelyout of the way before closing the tail-gate.

TAILGATE (5 DOOR)

CAUTIONMake certain that you close thetailgate before driving your vehi-cle. Possible damage may occurto the tailgate lift cylinders andattached hardware if the tailgateis not closed prior to driving.

OYDDCO3233OYDDCO3232

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 27


284

Emergency tailgate safetyrelease

Your vehicle is equipped with theemergency tailgate safety releaselever located on the bottom of thetailgate. When someone is inadver-tently locked in the luggage compart-ment. The tailgate can be opened bydoing as follows:1. Input the machanical key into the

hole.2. Push the machanical key to the

right.3. Push up the tailgate.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgateopen, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injuryor death to vehicle occupants.If you must drive with the tail-gate open, keep the air ventsand all windows open so thatadditional outside air comesinto the vehicle.

WARNING - Riding incargo area

Occupants should never ride inthe rear cargo area where norestraints are available. To avoidinjury in the event of an accidentor sudden stops, occupantsshould always be properlyrestrained.

CAUTIONMake sure nothing is near thetailgate latch and striker whileclosing the tailgate. It may dam-age the tailgate's latch.

OYDDCO3234

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 28

4 29


You and your children should be fullyaware of the location of the emer-gency tailgate safety release leverand how to open the tailgate in caseyou are accidently locked inside theluggage compartment.

✽✽ NOTICEUse the release lever for emergenciesonly. Use with extreme caution,especially while the vehicle is inmotion.

WARNINGNo one should be allowed tooccupy the luggage compart-ment of the vehicle at any time.The luggage compartment is avery dangerous location in theevent of a crash.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 29


304

(1) Driver’s door power window switch(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window

UP*/DOWN*(7) Power window lock button*

*: if equipped

WINDOWS

OYDM046105N

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 30

4 31


In cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

Power windows (if equipped)The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to oper-ate. Each door has a power windowswitch that controls the door’s win-dow. The driver has a power windowlock switch which can block the oper-ation of passenger windows.The power windows can be operatedfor approximately 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position. However, if thefront doors are opened, the powerwindows cannot be operated evenwithin the 30 second period.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile driving with the rear windowsdown or with the sunroof (ifequipped) in an open (or partiallyopen) position, your vehicle maydemonstrate a wind buffeting orpulsation noise. This noise is a nor-mal occurrence and can be reducedor eliminated by taking the follow-ing actions. If the noise occurs withone or both of the rear windowsdown, partially lower both frontwindows approximately one inch. Ifyou experience the noise with thesunroof open, slightly reduce thesize of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing (if equipped)

The driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all thewindows in the vehicle.To open or close a window, pressdown or pull up the front portion ofthe corresponding switch to the firstdetent position (5).

OYDDCO2017

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 31


324

Auto down window (if equipped) (Driver’s window)

Pressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detentposition (6) completely lowers thedriver’s window even when theswitch is released. To stop the win-dow at the desired position while thewindow is in operation, momentarilypull up the switch to the oppositedirection of the window movement.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-dow switch momentarily to the sec-ond detent position (6) completelylowers or lifts the window even whenthe switch is released. To stop thewindow at the desired position whilethe window is in operation, pull up orpress and release the switch to theopposite direction of the movement.If the power window is not operatedcorrectly, the automatic power win-dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. Close the window and continuepulling up on the driver’s powerwindow switch for at least 1 secondafter the window is completelyclosed.

OYDECO2224CN

OYDDCO2018

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 32

4 33


Automatic reversal (if equipped)

If the upward movement of the win-dow is blocked by an object or part ofthe body, the window will detect theresistance and will stop upwardmovement. The window will thenlower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)to allow the object to be cleared.If the window detects the resistancewhile the power window switch ispulled up continuously, the windowwill stop upward movement thenlower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).

And if the power window switch ispulled up continuously again within 5seconds after the window is loweredby the automatic window reversalfeature, the automatic window rever-sal will not operate.The automatic reverse feature for thedriver’s window is only active whenthe "auto up" feature is used by fullypulling up the switch. The automaticreverse feature will not operate if thewindow is raised using the halfwayposition on the power window switch.Always check for obstructions beforeraising any window to avoid injuriesor vehicle damage. If an object lessthan 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter iscaught between the window glassand the upper window channel, theautomatic reverse window may notdetect the resistance and will notstop and reverse direction.

Power window lock button (if equipped)

The driver can disable the powerwindow switches on the rear passen-gers' doors by pressing the powerwindow lock switch to the lock posi-tion (pressed).When the power window lockswitch is pressed:• The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.• The front passenger's control

can operate the front passen-ger's power window.

• The rear passenger's controlcannot operate the rear passen-ger's power window.

OUN026013

OYDM046402N

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 33


344

Always double check to make sureall arms, hands, head and otherobstructions are safely out of the waybefore closing a window.

CAUTION - Opening / closingWindow

To prevent possible damage tothe power window system, donot open or close two windowsor more at the same time. Thiswill also ensure the longevity ofthe fuse.

WARNING - Power windows

Do not allow children to playwith the power windows. Keepthe driver’s door power windowlock switch in the LOCK position(pressed).

WARNINGAlways check for obstructionsbefore raising any window toavoid injuries or vehicle damage.If an object less than 0.16 in. (4mm) in diameter is caughtbetween the window glass andthe upper window channel, theautomatic reverse window maynot detect the resistance and willnot stop and reverse direction.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 34

4 35


Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatchthe hood. The hood should popopen slightly.

Open the hood after turning off theengine on a flat surface, shifting theshift lever to the P(Park) position forautomatic transaxle and to the1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) formanual transaxle, and setting theparking brake.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raisethe hood slightly, push the second-ary latch (1) left side and lift thehood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-pletely by itself after it has beenraised about halfway.

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:• All filler caps in the engine com-

partment must be correctlyinstalled.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-bustible material must beremoved from the engine com-partment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip toprevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft.(30 cm) above the closed positionand let it drop. Make sure that itlocks into place.

HOOD

OYDDCO2020

OYDM046008

WARNING - Fire riskDo not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 35


364

The support rod must be insertedcompletely into the hole wheneveryou inspect the engine compartment.This will prevent the hood from fallingand possibly injuring you.

WARNING - Unsecuredengine hood

Always double check to be surethat the hood is firmly latchedbefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could fly openwhile the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility,which might result in an accident.

CAUTIONBefore closing the hood, ensurethat all obstructions areremoved from the engine com-partment and surrounding bodysheet metal. Closing the hoodwith an obstruction presentcould result in damage to theengine, sheet metal or theimpacted objects.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 36

4 37


Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be openedfrom inside the vehicle by pulling upthe fuel filler lid opener.If the fuel filler lid does not openbecause ice has formed around it,tap lightly or push on the lid to breakthe ice and release the lid. Do not pryon the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid(do not use radiator anti-freeze) ormove the vehicle to a warm placeand allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the

fuel filler lid opener up.3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to

fully open.4. To remove the cap turn the fuel

filler cap (2) counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it "clicks" one time. This indi-cates that the cap is securely tight-ened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push itlightly and make sure that it issecurely closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

WARNING - RefuelingAlways remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the capis venting fuel or if you hear ahissing sound, wait until thecondition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.If pressurized fuel sprays out, itcan cover your clothes or skinand subject you to the risk offire and burns.

OYDDCO2023

OYDDCO2024

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 37


384

✽✽ NOTICETighten the cap until it clicks one time,otherwise the fuel cap open warningindicator light will illuminate.

Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.

WARNING - Fire / explosion risk

Read and follow all warningsposted at the gas station facili-ty. Failure to follow all warningswill result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or deathdue to fire or explosion. WARNING - Cell phone

firesDo not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cel-lular phones can potentiallyignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

WARNING - Portable fuelcontainer

When using an approved portablefuel container, be sure to placethe container on the ground priorto refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Once refueling has begun, con-tact with the vehicle should bemaintained until the filling is com-plete. Use only approved portableplastic fuel containers designedto carry and store gasoline.

WARNING - Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel noz-zle, you should eliminatepotentially dangerous staticelectricity discharge by touch-ing another metal part of thevehicle, a safe distance awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

• Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refuel-ing since you can generatestatic electricity by touching,rubbing or sliding against anyitem or fabric (polyester, satin,nylon, etc.) capable of produc-ing static electricity. Staticelectricity discharge canignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate poten-tially dangerous static elec-tricity discharge by touching ametal part of the vehicle, awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle or other gasoline source.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 38

4 39


Make sure to refuel your vehicleaccording to the "Fuel requirements"suggested in chapter 1.If the fuel filler cap requires replace-ment, use only a genuine Kia cap orthe equivalent specified for your vehi-cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap canresult in a serious malfunction of thefuel system or emission control sys-tem.

CAUTION - Exterior paintDo not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Anytype of fuel spilled on paintedsurfaces may damage the paint.

WARNING - Refueling&Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components relatedto the engine can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. Oncerefueling is complete, check tomake sure the filler cap andfiller door are securely closed,before starting the engine.

WARNING - SmokingDO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave alit cigarette in your vehicle whileat a gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can, whenignited, result in fire.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 39


404

If your vehicle is equipped with asunroof, you can slide or tilt yoursunroof with the sunroof control leverlocated on the overhead console.The sunroof can only be opened,closed, or tilted when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

In cold and wet climates, the sunroofmay not work properly due to freez-ing conditions.After the vehicle is washed or in arainstorm, be sure to wipe off anywater that is on the sunroof beforeoperating it.The sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tiltedwhile in an open or slide position.

Sunroof open warning (if equipped)

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION - Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to press thesunroof control lever after thesunroof is fully opened, closed,or tilted. Damage to the motor orsystem components couldoccur.

OYDM046382 OYDDDI2016

OYDNDI2030

OYDNDI2052

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type CWARNING - Sunroof

operationWhen closing the sunroof, makesure there are no body parts inthe movement range of the slid-ing roof. Parts of the body couldbecome trapped or crushed.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the sun-roof, periodically remove anydirt that may accumulate on theguide rail.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 40

4 41


If the driver removes the ignition key(smart key: turns off the engine) andopens the driver-side door when thesunroof is not fully closed, the warningchime will sound for a few secondsand a warning image will appear onthe LCD display.Close the sunroof securely whenleaving your vehicle.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever back-ward to the second detent positionand then release it. The sunroof willslide all the way open.The sunroof will slide to the recom-mended open position (about 2in. (5cm) before the maximum slide openposition).To stop the sunroof sliding at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

To open the sunroof to the maximumslide open position, press the switchtowards the rear of the vehicle onceagain and hold it until the sunroofslide all the way open.To reduce wind noise while driving,we recommend you to drive at therecommended position (about 2in (5cm) before the maximum slide openposition).

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever for-ward to the second detent positionand then release it. The sunroof willautomatically close all the way.To stop the sunroof sliding at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.While driving with the sunroof in anopen (or partially open position),your vehicle may demonstrate a windbuffeting or pulsation noise. Thisnoise is a normal occurrence andcan be reduced or eliminated by tak-ing the following actions. If you expe-rience the noise with the sunroofopen, slightly reduce the size of thesunroof opening.

OYDDCO2026

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 41


424

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body isdetected while the sunroof glass orsunshade is closing automatically, itwill reverse the direction, and thenstop.The auto reverse function does notwork if a tiny obstacle is between thesliding glass or sunshade and thesunroof sash. You should alwayscheck that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroofbefore closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

To open the sunroof, push the sunroofcontrol lever upward until the sunroofmoves to the desired position.To close the sunroof, push the sunrooflever forward or pull downward until thesunroof moves to the desired position.

OYF049215 OYDDCO2027

CAUTION - Sunroof motor damage

If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could bedamaged.

WARNING - SunroofDo not extend the face, neck,arms or body outside throughthe sunroof opening while driv-ing or operating the sunroof.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 42

4 43


Sunshade

When opening the sunroof, the sun-shade will also open. Once the sun-roof is closed, the sunshade can bemanually closed.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, or relatedfuse is blown, you must reset yoursunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition or start the engine. Werecommend resetting the sunroofwhile the engine is running.

2. Push and release the control leverforward in the direction of closerepeatedly until the sunroof doesnot move. Sunroof will stop at theclose position Glass will tilt up thenwill move up and down slightly.

3. Release the control lever whensunroof does not move.

4. Glass will tilt up then will move upand down slightly.

5. Within 5 seconds, push the sun-roof control lever forward in thedirection of close until the sunroofoperates as follows:

Tilt down → Slide Open →Slide Close.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not release the lever until theoperation is completed.If you release the lever during oper-ation, try again from step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control leverafter all operation has completed.(The sunroof system has beenreset.)

❈ For more detailed information,contact an authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the sunroof is not reset when thevehicle battery is disconnected ordischarged, or related fuse is blown,the sunroof may operate improperly.

OBK049019

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 43


444

Electric power steering (EPS)Power steering uses the motor toassist you in steering the vehicle. Ifthe engine is off or if the power steer-ing system becomes inoperative, thevehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.The electric power steering is con-trolled by the power steering controlunit which senses the steering wheeltorque and vehicle speed to com-mand the motor.The steering wheel becomes heavieras the vehicle’s speed increases andbecomes lighter as the vehicle’sspeed decreases for better control ofthe steering wheel.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the powersteering checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEThe following symptoms may occurduring normal vehicle operation:• The steering effort is increased

immediately after turning the igni-tion switch on. This happens as thesystem performs the EPS systemdiagnostics. When the diagnosticsare completed, the steering wheelwill return to its normal condition

• A click noise may be heard fromthe EPS relay after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON orLOCK position.

• Motor noise may be heard whenthe vehicle is at a stop or at a lowdriving speed.

• The steering effort increases if thesteering wheel is rotated continu-ously when the vehicle is not inmotion. However, after a few min-utes, it will return to its normalcondition.

• When you operate the steeringwheel in low temperature, noisemay occur. If the temperaturerises, the noise will likely disap-pear. This is a normal condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the charging system warn-

ing light comes on or the batteryvoltage is low (when the alternatoror battery does not operate nor-mally), the steering wheel may getheavy and become difficult to con-trol operate abnormally.

If the Electric Power Steering Systemdoes not operate normally, the warn-ing light will illuminate on the instru-ment cluster.The steering wheel mayrequire increased steering effort.Take your vehicle to an authorizedKia dealer and have the vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

STEERING WHEEL

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:25 Page 44

4 45


Tilt and telescoping steeringTilt steering allows you to adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. Youcan also raise it to give your legsmore room when you exit and enterthe vehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi-tioned so that it is comfortable foryou to drive, while permitting you tosee the instrument panel warninglights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle,pull down the lock release lever (1),adjust the steering wheel to thedesired angle (2) and height (3), thenpull up the lock-release lever to lock(4) the steering wheel in place. Besure to adjust the steering wheel tothe desired position before driving.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the hornsymbol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.To sound the horn, press the areaindicated by the horn symbol on yoursteering wheel (see illustration). Thehorn will operate only when this areais pressed.

WARNING - Steeringwheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle andheight of the steering wheelwhile driving. You may losesteering control

OYDDCO3028

OYDDCO2030

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 45


464

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

With the ignition switch in the ONposition, pressing the heated steer-ing wheel button warms the steeringwheel. The indicator on the buttonwill illuminate and notify you on theLCD display.To turn the heated steering wheel off,press the button once again. Theindicator on the button will turn offand notify you on the LCD display.If you turn on the ignition again afterturning off your engine in half anhour (after operating heater button),the heating system will be main-tained in its 'on' condition.

✽✽ NOTICEThe heated steering wheel will turnoff automatically approximately 30minutes after the heated steeringwheel is turned on.

CAUTION• Do not install any grip to oper-

ate the steering wheel. Thiscauses damage to the heatedsteering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heatedsteering wheel, do not use anorganic solvent such as paintthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may dam-age the surface of the steeringwheel.

• If the surface of the steeringwheel is damaged by a sharpobject, damage to the heatedsteering wheel componentscould occur.

OYDM046397

WARNINGIf the steering wheel becomestoo warm, turn the system off.The heated steering wheel maycause burns even at low tem-peratures, especially if used forlong periods of time.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 46

4 47


FLEX STEER(5door, if equipped)

The FLEX STEER controls steeringeffort based upon driver's preferenceor road condition.You can select the desired steeringmode by pressing the FLEX STEERbutton.

When the steering mode button ispressed, the selected steering modewill appear on the LCD display.If the steering mode button is pressedwithin 4 seconds, the steering modewill change as shown above the pic-tures.If the steering mode button is notpressed for about 4 seconds, theLCD display will change to the previ-ous screen.

Normal mode

The normal mode offers mediumsteering effort.

OYDDCO2204

OYDDCO2207

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYDECO2233

OYDECO2232

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYDDCO2223

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 47


484

Sport mode

The steering wheel becomes heav-ier. The sport mode is usually usedwhen driving on the highway.

Comfort mode

The steering wheel becomes lighter.The comfort mode is usually usedwhen driving in the city or when park-ing the vehicle.

For your safety, if you press thesteering mode button while operatingthe steering wheel, the LCD displaywill change, but steering effort willnot change immediately. After oper-ating the steering wheel, the steeringeffort will change automatically to theselected mode.Use caution when changing thesteering mode while driving.When the electronic power steeringis not operating, the flex steeringwheel will not work.

OYDDCO2205

OYDDCO2209

■ Type A

■ Type BOYDDCO2206

OYDDCO2208

■ Type A

■ Type B

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 48

4 49


Inside rearview mirrorAdjust the rearview mirror so that thecenter view through the rear windowis seen. Make this adjustment beforeyou start driving.Do not place objects in the rear seatwhich would interfere with your visionthrough the rear window.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before youstart driving and while the day/nightlever is in the day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce the glare from the headlightsof the vehicles behind you duringnight driving.Remember that you lose somerearview clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)The electric rearview mirror automat-ically controls the glare from theheadlights of the vehicles behind youin nighttime or low light driving condi-tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-ror senses the light level around thevehicle, and automatically controlsthe headlight glare from the vehiclesbehind you.When the engine is running, theglare is automatically controlled bythe sensor mounted in the rearviewmirror.Whenever the shift lever is shiftedinto reverse (R), the mirror will auto-matically go to the brightest setting inorder to improve the drivers viewbehind the vehicle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust the rearview mirrorwhile the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control.

OYDDCO2031

Day

Night

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 49


504

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-tion whenever the ignition switch isturned on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) toturn the automatic dimming func-tion off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) toturn the automatic dimming func-tion on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

Outside rearview mirrorBe sure to adjust mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with bothleft-hand and right-hand outsiderearview mirrors. The mirrors can beadjusted remotely with the remoteswitch (if equipped).The mirror headscan be folded to prevent damage dur-ing an automatic car wash or whenpassing through a narrow street.The right outside rearview mirror isconvex. Objects seen in the mirrorare closer than they appear.Use your interior rearview mirror ordirect observation to determine theactual distance of following vehicleswhen changing lanes.

CAUTION - Cleaning mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror. It maycause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing which maydamage the mirror.

OYDM046383

Indicator Sensor

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 50

4 51


Remote control

Electric type

The electric remote control mirrorswitch allows you to adjust the posi-tion of the left and right outsiderearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-tion of either mirror the ignition switchshould be in the ACC or ON position.Move the lever (1) to R or L to selectthe right side mirror or the left sidemirror, then press a correspondingpoint on the mirror adjustment con-trol to position the selected mirror up,down, left or right.After the adjustment, put the leverinto neutral (center) position to pre-vent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION - Outside mirror• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximumadjusting angles, but themotor continues to operatewhile the switch is pressed.Do not press the switch longerthan necessary, the motormay be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust theoutside rearview mirror byhand. Doing so may damagethe parts.OYDM046403N

CAUTION - Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the sur-face of the glass. If ice shouldrestrict movement of the mirror,do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, usea deicer spray, or a sponge orsoft cloth with very warm water.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehi-cle is moving. This could resultin loss of control.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 51


524

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can befolded or unfolded by pressing theswitch as below.Left (1) : The mirrors will unfold.Right (2) : The mirrors will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :The mirror will fold or unfold auto-matically as follows:• Without smart key system

- The mirrors will fold or unfoldwhen the door is locked orunlocked by the transmitter.

• With smart key system- The mirrors will fold or unfold

when the door is locked orunlocked by the smart key.

- The mirrors will fold or unfoldwhen the door is locked orunlocked by the button on theoutside door handle.

- The mirrors will unfold when youapproach the vehicle (all doorsclosed and locked) with a smartkey in possession. (if equipped)

OYDDCO2041

CAUTION - Electric typeoutsiderearview mirror

The electric type outsiderearview mirror operates eventhough the ignition switch is inthe OFF position. However, toprevent unnecessary batterydischarge, do not adjust themirrors longer than necessarywhile the engine is not running.Do not attempt to fold the elec-tric type outside rearview mirrorby hand because doing socould cause motor damage orfailure.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 52

4 53


Manual type

To fold outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

OYDDCO2040

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 53


544

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Turn signal indicators

6. Warning and indicator lights

7. LCD window

OYDM046404/OYDM046375N

■■ Type A / Type B

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.For more details refer to the "Gauges" inthe next pages.

■■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 54

4 55


Instrument Cluster ControlAdjusting Instrument ClusterIllumination

The instrument panel illuminationintensity can be adjusted by pressingthe control switch with the headlightswitch in any position when the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.The illumination intensity is shownon the instrument cluster LCD win-dow.

• If you hold the illumination controlbutton ("+" or "-"), the brightnesswill be changed continuously.

• If the brightness reaches to themaximum or minimum level, analarm will sound.

OYDM046398

OYDDDI2011/OYDEDI2020

OYDEDI2034

■ Type A ■ Type B

■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 55


564

LCD window Control

The LCD window modes can bechanged by using the control buttonson the steering wheel.

[Type A](1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing

trip modes(2) RESET : RESET button for reset-

ting items

[Type B](1) : MODE button for changing

modes(2) : MOVE button for changing

items(3) : SELECT/RESET button for

setting or resetting theselected item

❈ For the LCD modes, refer to "LCDwindow" in this chapter.

GaugesSpeedometer

The speedometer indicates the for-ward speed of the vehicle.The speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour and/or kilometers perhour.

OYDDDI2018 OYDEDI2003R

OYDEDI2004R

■ Type A, B

■ Type C

■ Type A

■ Type B

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 56

4 57


Tachometer

The tachometer indicates theapproximate number of engine revo-lutions per minute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the cor-rect shift points and to prevent lug-ging and/or over-revving the engine.

The tachometer pointer may moveslightly when the ignition switch is inACC or ON position with the engineOFF. This movement is normal andwill not affect the accuracy of thetachometer once the engine is run-ning.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

This gauge shows the temperatureof the engine coolant when the igni-tion switch is ON.Do not continue driving with an over-heated engine. If your vehicle over-heats, refer to "If the engine over-heats" in chapter 6.If the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the "H"position, it indicates overheating thatmay damage the engine.

OYDDDI2005

OYDDDI2006

■ Type A, B

■ Type C

CAUTION - Red zoneDo not operate the engine with-in the tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe enginedamage.

OYDDDI2007/OYDDDI2008

■ Type A, B ■ Type B

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 57


584

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approx-imate amount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank. The fuel tank capacity isgiven in chapter 8. The fuel gauge issupplemented by a low fuel warninglight, which will illuminate when thefuel tank is nearly empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gaugepointer may fluctuate or the low fuelwarning light may come on earlierthan usual due to the movement offuel in the tank.

✽✽ NOTICE - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can expose vehi-cle occupants to danger. You muststop and obtain additional fuel assoon as possible after the warninglight comes on or when the gaugeindicator comes close to the "E(Empty)" level.

Odometer

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.You will also find the odometer usefulto determine when periodic mainte-nance should be performed.

OYDDDI2009

OYDDDI2010

■ Type A, B

■ Type C

CAUTION - Low fuelAvoid driving with extremelylow fuel level. Running out offuel could cause the engine tomisfire, damaging the catalyticconverter.

OYDNDI2902/OYDNDI2904

OYDNDI2906


■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 58

4 59


Transaxle Shift IndicatorAutomatic Transaxle ShiftIndicator (if equipped)

This indicator displays which auto-matic transaxle shift lever is selected.

• Park : P• Reverse : R• Neutral : N• Drive : D• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Manual transaxle shiftindicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you whichgear is desired while driving to savefuel.For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the3rd gear is desired (currentlythe shift lever is in the 2ndgear).

: Indicates that shifting down tothe 3rd gear is desired (current-ly the shift lever is in the 4thgear).

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the system is not workingproperly, up & down arrow indica-tor and Gear are not displayed.

OYD046244L/OYD046245L

OYDM046376


■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 59


604

Over view LCD windows show the following var-ious information to drivers.- Trip information- LCD modes (for Type B, C)- Warning messages (for Type B, C)

Trip information (Trip computer)The trip computer is a microcomput-er-controlled driver information sys-tem that displays information relatedto driving.

✽✽ NOTICESome driving information stored inthe trip computer (for exampleAverage Vehicle Speed) resets if thebattery is disconnected.

Trip Modes LCD WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

• Tripmeter [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

TRIP B

• Distance To Empty

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

FUEL ECONOMY

Digital speedometer(for Type B,C)

OYDM046395

OYD046307L

OYDM04630

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 60

4 61


Type ATo change the trip mode, press the“TRIP” button.

Type BTo change the trip mode, press theMOVE button ▼.

Fuel Economy

Distance To Empty (1)

• The range is the estimated dis-tance the vehicle can be drivenwith the remaining fuel.

- Distance range : 30 ~ 9999 mi or50 ~ 9999 km.

• If the estimated distance is below30 mi. (50 km), the trip computerwill display "---" as distance toempty.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has beeninterrupted, the distance to emptyfunction may not operate correct-ly.

• The distance to empty may differfrom the actual driving distance asit is an estimate of the availabledriving distance.

• The trip computer may not regis-ter additional fuel if less than 6liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel areadded to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance toempty may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, driv-ing habits, and condition of thevehicle.

OYDM046386N/OYDNDI2033

OYDM046389N


■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 61


624

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is cal-culated by the total driving dis-tance and fuel consumption sincethe last average fuel economyreset.- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-cally.

Manual resetTo clear the average fuel economymanually, press the RESET button(Type A : RESET, Type B, C : ) onthe steering wheel for more than 1second when the average fuel econo-my is displayed.

Automatic resetTo make the average fuel economybe reset automatically whenever refu-eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode inUser Setting menu of the LCD win-dow (Refer to “LCD window”).Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-age fuel economy will be cleared tozero (---) when the vehicle speedexceeds 1MPH after refueling morethan 1.6 gallons(6 liters).

✽✽ NOTICEThe average fuel economy is not dis-played for more accurate calculationif the vehicle does not drive morethan 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03miles) since the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop button is turnedto ON.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fueleconomy during the last few sec-onds when the vehicle speed ismore than 6.2MPH(10km/h).- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

L/100km or 0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG(Type A), 0.0 ~ 30.0 L/100km or0.0 ~ 50.0 MPG (Type B, C)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 62

4 63


Trip A/B

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-tance since the last tripmeter reset.- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or

km

• To reset the tripmeter, press theRESET button (Type A : RESET,Type B, C : ) on the steeringwheel for more than 1 secondwhen the tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-culated by the total driving dis-tance and driving time since thelast average vehicle speed reset.- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h

• To reset the average vehicle speed,press the RESET button (Type A :RESET, Type B, C : ) on thesteering wheel for more than 1 sec-ond when the average vehiclespeed is displayed.

✽✽ NOTICE• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is lessthan 0.03 miles (50 meters) or thedriving time is less than 10 secondssince the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,the average vehicle speed keepsgoing while the engine is running.

OYDM046390N/OYDM046396

OYDM046392N


■ Type C

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:26 Page 63


644

Elapsed Time (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driv-ing time since the last elapsed timereset.- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

• To reset the elapsed time, pressthe RESET button (Type A :RESET, Type B, C : ) on thesteering wheel for more than 1second when the elapsed time isdisplayed.

✽✽ NOTICEEven if the vehicle is not in motion,the elapsed time keeps going whilethe engine is running.

Digital speedometer

This mode displays the currentspeed of the vehicle.

One time driving information mode

This display shows trip distance (1),average fuel economy (2) and thevehicle can be driven with theremaining fuel (3).This information is displayed for afew seconds when you turn off theengine and then goes off automati-cally. The information provided is cal-culated according to each trip.If the estimated distance is below1mi (1km), the distance to empty (3)will display as "---" and a refuel mes-sage will appear (4).

OYDM046394 OJFA045285

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 64

4 65


LCD Modes (for Type B, Cinstrument cluster)

(1) Trip Computer modeThis mode displays driving informa-tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy,and so on.For more details, refer to “TripComputer” in this chapter.

(2) Turn By Turn mode (if equipped)This mode displays the state of thenavigation.

(3) Audio mode (if equipped)This mode displays the state of theA/V system.

(4) Service mode This mode informs of service interval(mileage or days) and pressure sta-tus of each tire.

(5) Master warning modeThis mode informs of warning mes-sages related to washer fluid or mal-function of Blind Spot Detection sys-tem (BSD) and so on.

(6) User Setting mode On this mode, you can change set-tings of the doors, lamps and so on.

❈ For controlling the LCD modes,refer to "LCD window Control" inthis chapter.

Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of thenavigation.

OYD046310L

OYD046299

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 65


664

A/V Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of theA/V system.

Service Mode

Service in

It calculates and displays when youneed a scheduled maintenanceservice (mileage or days).If the remaining mileage or timereaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30days, "Service in" message is dis-played for several seconds each timeyou set the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop Button to the ON position.

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serv-iced according to the already inputtedservice interval, “Service required”message is displayed for several sec-onds each time you set the ignitionswitch or Engine Start/Stop Button tothe ON position.

OYD046298 OYDNDI2059 OYD046220L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 66

4 67


To reset the service interval to themileage and days you inputted before:- Press the SELECT/RESET button

for more than 1 second.

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,“Service in OFF” message is dis-played on the LCD window.

✽✽ NOTICEIf any of the following conditionsoccurs, the mileage and days may beincorrect.- The battery cable is disconnected.- The fuse switch is turned off.- The battery is discharged.

User Settings Mode

On this mode, you can change set-ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.

OYD046218L

OYD046210L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 67


684

Driving Assist (if equipped)• Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS, if equipped) : To adjust thesensitivity of the Lane KeepingAssist System.

- Lane Departure/StandardLKA/Activ LKA For more informa-tion, refer to the "Lane Keep AssistSystem" in chap ter 5.

• Autonomous Emergency Brakingsystem (AEB,if equipped) : To acti-vate or deactivate the AutonomousEmergency Braking (AEB).

For more information, refer to"Autonomous Emergency Braking(AEB)" in chapter 5.

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW, ifequipped) : To adjust the initialwarning alert time for AutonomousEmergency Braking system.

- Late/Normal/Early For more infor-mation, refer to "AutonomousEmergency Braking (AEB)" inchapter 6.

• Rear Collision Warning (RCW,ifequipped)

- Rear Cross Traffic Alert : To acti-vate or deactivate the Rear CrossTraffic Alert system.

For more information, refer to "BlindSpot Detection" in chapter 5.

- Blind Spot Detection sound : Toactivate or deactivate the BlindSpot Detection sound.

For more information, refer to "BlindSpot Detection" in chapter 5.

Door• Automatically Lock- Disable : The auto door lock opera-

tion will be deactivated.- Enable on Speed : All doors will be

automatically locked when thevehicle speed exceeds9.3mph(15km/h).

- Enable on Shift : All doors will beautomatically locked if the auto-matic transaxle shift lever is shiftedfrom the P (Park) position to the R(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)position.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 68

4 69


• Automatically Unlock- Disable : The auto door unlock

operation will be canceled.- Vehicle Off : All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the igni-tion key is removed from the igni-tion switch or the Engine Star/Stopbutton is set to the OFF position.

- On Shift to P : All doors will beautomatically unlocked if the auto-matic transaxle shift lever is shiftedto the P (Park) position.

• Two Press Unlock- Off:

The two press unlock function willbe deactivated.Therefore, all doorswill unlock if the door is unlocked.

- On:The driver’s door will unlock if thedoor is unlocked. When the door isunlocked again within 4 seconds,all doors will unlock.

• Horn Feedback (if equipped)- Off:

The Horn feedback operation willbe deactivated.

- On:After locking the door by pressingthe lock button on the transmitter, ifyou press the lock button againwithin 4 seconds, the warningsound will operate once to indicatethat all doors are locked.

• Smart Trunk (if equipped)To activate or deactivate the SmartTrunk system.For more details, refer to "SmartTrunk" in this chapter.

Light• One Touch Turn Signal (if equipped)

- Off: The one touch turn signal functionwill be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane changesignals will blink 3, 5, or 7 timeswhen the turn signal lever is movedslightly.

For more details, refer to "Light" inthis chapter.• Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)- If this item checked, the head lamp

delay function will be activated.• Welcome Light (If equipped)- If this item checked, the welcome

light function will be activated.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 69


704

Sound• Cluster voice guide Vol. (if

equipped) : Adjust the cluster voiceguide volume. (Level 0~3)

• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) Sound(if equipped)

If this item checked, the blind spotdetection sound will be activated.For more details, refer to "Blind SpotDetection System" in chapter 5.• Welcome Sound (if equipped)If this item checked, the welcomesound function will be activated.

Convenience• Seat Easy Access(if equipped)- None : The seat easy access func-

tion is deactivated.- Normal/Extended : When you turn

off the engine, the driver’s seat willautomatically move rearward short(Normal) or long (Extended) foryou to enter or exit the vehiclemore comfortably.If you change the EngineStart/Stop button from OFF posi-tion to the ACC, ON, or STARTposition, the driver’s seat will returnto the original position.

For more details, refer to "DriverPosition Memory System" in chapter 3.

Service interval (if equipped)On this mode, you can activate theservice interval function with mileage(km or mi.) and period (months).- Off : The service interval function

will be deactivated.- On :You can set the service interval

(mileage and months).For more details, refer to "ServiceMode" in this chapter.

✽✽ NOTICEIf it is not available to set serviceinterval on your vehicle, we recom-mend that you consult an authorizedKia dealer.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 70

4 71


Other features• Fuel Economy Auto Reset- Off : The average fuel economy will

not reset automatically wheneverrefueling.

- After Ignition : The average fueleconomy will reset automaticallywhen driving.

- After Refueling : The average fueleconomy will reset automaticallywhen refueling.

• Fuel Economy UnitChoose the preferred fuel economyunit.• Temperature UnitChoose the preferred temperatureunit.• Language (if equipped)Choose preferred the language.

Warning messagesWarning messages appear on theLCD to warn the driver. It is located inthe center of the instrument cluster.The warning message may appeardifferently depending on the type ofinstrument cluster and some may notshow the warning message at all.The warning message is shown ineither symbol, symbol and text, ortext type only. You can choose thepreferred language (for Type B only)by selecting the User setting menu inLCD mode.

Door Open• It means that any door is open.

OYD046191

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 71


724

Trunk (tailgate) Open• It means that the trunk (tailgate) is

open.

Sunroof Open (if equipped)• This warning is displayed if you

turn off the engine when the sun-roof is open.

Turn on FUSE SWITCH (if equipped)• This warning message illuminates

if the fuse switch under the steer-ing wheel is OFF.

• It means that you should turn thefuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” inchapter 7.

OYD046193 OYD046250L/OYD046197


YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 72

4 73


Engine has overheatedThis warning message illuminateswhen the engine coolant tempera-ture is above 120°C (248°F). Thismeans that the engine is overheatedand may be damaged.If your vehicle is overheated, refer to“Overheating” in chapter 6.

Shift to P (for smart key system andautomatic transaxle)• This warning message illuminates if

you try to turn off the engine withoutthe shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/StopButton turns to the ACC position (Ifyou press the Engine Start/StopButton once more, it will turn to theON position).

Low Key Battery (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the battery of the smart key isdischarged when the EngineStart/Stop Button changes to theOFF position.

Press START button while turn steer-ing (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the steering wheel does notunlock normally when the EngineStart/Stop Button is pressed.

• It means that you should press theEngine Start/Stop Button whileturning the steering wheel rightand left.

Steering wheel unlocked (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the steering wheel does not lockwhen the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the OFF position.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 73


744

Check Steering Wheel Lock System (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the steering wheel does not locknormally when the EngineStart/Stop Button changes to theOFF position.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system and automatictransaxle)• This warning message illuminates

if the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the ACC position twiceby pressing the button repeatedlywithout depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depressthe brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (forsmart key system and manual transaxle)• This warning message illuminates if

the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the ACC position twiceby pressing the button repeatedlywithout depressing the clutch pedal.

• It means that you should depressthe clutch pedal to start the engine.

Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the smart key is not in the vehiclewhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

• It means that you should alwayshave the smart key with you.

Key not detected (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if the smart key is not detectedwhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

Press START button again (for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if you can not operate the EngineStart/Stop Button when there is aproblem with the Engine Start/StopButton system.

• It means that you could start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates eachtime you press the EngineStart/Stop Button, we recommendthat you have the vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 74

4 75


Press START button with smart key(for smart key system)• This warning message illuminates

if you press the Engine Start/StopButton while the warning message“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indica-tor light blinks.

Check fuse “BRAKE SWITCH” (for smart key system and automatictransaxle/transmission)• This warning message illuminates

if the brake switch fuse is discon-nected.

• It means that you should replacethe fuse with a new one. If that isnot possible, you can start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/Stop Button for 10 seconds inthe ACC position.

Shift to P or N to start engine (for smart key system and automatictransaxle)• This warning message illuminates

if you try to start the engine withthe shift lever not in the P (Park) orN (Neutral) position.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can start the engine with theshift lever in the N (Neutral) position.But, for your safety, we recommendthat you start the engine with theshift lever in the P (Park) position.

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)• This warning message illuminates

on the service reminder mode ifthe washer fluid level in the reser-voir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill thewasher fluid.

Low Fuel• This warning message illuminates

if the fuel tank is nearly empty.- When the low fuel level warning

light is illuminates.Add fuel as soon as possible.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 75


764

Warning lights

✽✽ NOTICE - Warning lightsMake sure that all warning lightsare OFF after starting the engine. Ifany light is still ON, this indicates asituation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driverthat the seat belt is not fastened.For more details, refer to the "SeatBelts" in chapter 3.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 76

4 77


Parking Brake & BrakeFluid Warning Light



seconds- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.• When the parking brake is applied.• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, itindicates the brake fluid level inreservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoiris low:

1.Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2.With the engine stopped, check thebrake fluid level immediately andadd fluid as required (For moredetails, refer to "Brake Fluid" inchapter 7).Then check all brake componentsfor fluid leaks. If any leak on thebrake system is still found, thewarning light remains on, or thebrakes do not operate properly, donot drive the vehicle.In this case, have your vehicletowed to an authorized Kia dealerand inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. Thismeans you still have braking on twowheels even if one of the dual sys-tems should fail.With only one of the dual systemsworking, more than normal pedaltravel and greater pedal pressure arerequired to stop the vehicle.Also, the vehicle will not stop in asshort a distance with only a portionof the brake system working.If the brakes fail while you are driv-ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-al engine braking and stop the vehi-cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 77


784

Driving the vehicle with a warninglight ON is dangerous. If the ParkingBrake & Brake Fluid Warning Lightilluminates with the parking brakereleased, it indicates that the brakefluid level is low.In this case, have your vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light




the ABS (The normal braking sys-tem will still be operational withoutthe assistance of the anti-lockbrake system).In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

ElectronicBrake forceDistribution(EBD) SystemWarning LightThese two warning lights illuminate atthe same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 78

4 79


✽✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brakeforce Distribution(EBD) SystemWarning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is onor both ABS and Parking Brake &Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,the speedometer, odometer, or trip-meter may not work. Also, the EPSWarning Light may illuminate andthe steering effort may increase ordecrease.In this case, have your vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

Electronic PowerSteering (EPS) WarningLight (if equipped)


• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It remains on until the engine is

started.• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - ABS/BrakeLight

When both ABS and ParkingBrake & Brake Fluid WarningLights are on, the brake systemwill not work normally and youmay experience an unexpectedand dangerous situation duringsudden braking thereby increas-ing the risk of a crash or injury.In this case, avoid high speeddriving and abrupt braking.Have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 79


804

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL)




the emission control system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Charging SystemWarning Light




either the alternator or electricalcharging system.

CAUTION - MalfunctionIndicatorLamp (MIL)

Driving with the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) on maycause damage to the emissioncontrol systems which couldeffect drivability and/or fueleconomy.

CAUTION - GasolineEngine

If the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-tial catalytic converter damageis possible which could result inloss of engine power.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 80

4 81


If there is a malfunction with eitherthe alternator or electrical chargingsystem:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check thealternator drive belt for loosenessor breakage.If the belt is adjusted properly,there may be a problem in theelectrical charging system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

Engine Oil PressureWarning Light



started.• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check theengine oil level (For more details,refer to "Engine Oil" in section 7).If the level is low, add oil asrequired.If the warning light remains onafter adding oil or if oil is not avail-able, have your vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION - Enginedamage

If the engine is not stoppedimmediately after the engine oilpressure warning light is illumi-nated and stays on while theengine is running, seriousengine damage may result.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 81


824

If the warning light stays on while theengine is running, there may be seri-ous engine damage. In this case,1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is

safe to do so.2. Turn off the engine and check the

oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warn-ing light stays on after the engineis started, turn the engine offimmediately. In this case, haveyour vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Low Fuel Level WarningLight


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Low FuelLevel

Driving with the Low Fuel Levelwarning light on or with the fuellevel below can cause theengine to misfire and damagethe catalytic converter (ifequipped).

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 82

4 83


Low Tire PressureWarning Light



seconds and then goes off.• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated.For more details, refer to "TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on afterblinking for approximately 60 secondsor repeats blinking and off at theintervals of approximately 3 seconds:

• When there is a malfunction withthe TPMS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.For more details, refer to "TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

The TPMS cannot alert you to severeand sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.If you notice any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator pedal, apply the brakesgradually with light force, and slowlymove to a safe position off the road.

WARNING - Low tire pressure

• Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstableand can contribute to loss ofvehicle control and increasedbraking distances.

• Continued driving or low pres-sure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 83


844

Door Ajar WarningLight (if equipped)


When a door is not closed securely.

Trunk (tailgate) OpenWarning Light(if equipped)


When the trunk (tailgate) is notclosed securely.

Adaptive Front LightingSystem (AFLS) WarningLight (if equipped)

This warning light blinks:

• Once you set the EngineStart/Stop Button to the ON posi-tion.- It illuminates for approximately 3


the AFLS.

If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:


2. Turn the engine off and restart theengine. If the warning light remainson, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

Washer Fluid WarningLight (if equipped)


• When the washer fluid level in thereservoir is nearly empty.In this case, you should refill thewasher fluid.

AFLS

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 84

4 85


Master Warning Mode (if equipped)

• This warning light informs the driv-er the following situations- Low washer fluid (if equipped)- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-

function (if equipped)- Service reminder and so on.

The Master Warning Light illumi-nates when more than one of theabove warning situations occur. Atthis time, the LCD Modes Icon willchange from ( ) to ( ).If the warning situation is solved, themaster warning light will be turned offand the LCD Modes Icon will bechanged back to its previous icon ( ).(ex : refill the washer fluid)

Indicator LightsElectronic StabilityControl (ESC) IndicatorLightThis indicator light illuminates:



the ESC system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to "ElectronicStability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) OFFIndicator LightThis indicator light illuminates:


seconds and then goes off.• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-ton.

For more details, refer to "ElectronicStability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 85


864

SPORT Mode IndicatorLight (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates

• When you select "SPORT" modeas drive mode.

For more details, refer to "DriveMode Integrated Control System" inchapter 5.

ECO Mode IndicatorLight (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you select “ECO” mode asdrive mode.

For more details, refer to “DriveMode Integrated Control System” inchapter 5.

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (Without Smart Key)(if equipped)


• When the vehicle detects theimmobilizer in your key properlywhile the ignition switch is ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.


• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (With Smart Key) (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for upto 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects thesmart key in the vehicle properlywhile the Engine Start/Stop Buttonis ACC or ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a fewseconds:

• When the smart key is not in thevehicle.- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 86

4 87


This indicator light illuminates for 2seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detectthe smart key which is in the vehi-cle while the Engine Start/StopButton is ON.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.


• When the battery of the smart keyis weak.- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can startthe engine if you press the EngineStart/Stop Button with the smartkey. (For more details, refer to"Starting the Engine" in section5).

• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Turn Signal IndicatorLight


• When you turn the turn signal lighton.

If any of the following occurs, theremay be a malfunction with the turnsignal system. In this case, have yourvehicle inspected by an authorizedKia dealer.

- The indicator light does not blinkbut illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks morerapidly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-nate at all.

High Beam IndicatorLight


• When the headlights are on and inthe high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light


• When the tail lights or headlightsare on.

Front Fog IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the front fog lights are on.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 87


884

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)


• When the cruise control system isenabled.

For more details, refer to "CruiseControl System" in chapter 5.

Cruise SET IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to "CruiseControl System" in chapter 5.

KEY OUT Indicator Light(if equipped)

When the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is in the ACC or ON position,if any door is open, the systemchecks for the smart key.


When the smart key is not in thevehicle and any door is open with theignition switch or Engine Start/Stopbutton in the ACC or ON position.- At this time, if you close all doors,

the chime will also sound forapproximately 5 seconds.

- The indicator will go off while thevehicle is moving.

LKAS (Lane KeepingAssistant System)Indicator (if equipped)

The LKAS indicator will illuminatewhen you turn the lane keepingassistant system on by pressing theLKAS button.If there is a problem with the system,the yellow LKAS indicator will illumi-nate.For more details, refer to "LKAS" inchapter 5.

CRUISE

SET

KEYOUT

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 88

4 89


The rear view camera will activatewith the ignition switch on and theshift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

Note- during initial start up, systemmay not display instantly due to theaudio system booting up.2 ~ 4 seconds may be requiredbefore displaying during initialreverse selection. This occurs whenstarting and immediately shifting toreverse.This system is a supplemental sys-tem that shows behind the vehiclethrough the UVO audio or navigationdisplay backing-up.

Always keep the camera lens clean. Iflens is covered with foreign matter,the camera may not operate normally.The rearview camera is not a substi-tute for proper and safe backing-upprocedures. Always drive safely anduse caution when backing up. Therearview camera may not displayevery object behind the vehicle.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Backing Up &Using Camera

Never rely solely on the rear viewcamera when backing up. Priorto entering your vehicle alwaysdo a visual check of the areabehind your vehicle, and beforebacking up be aware of your sur-roundings and supplement therear view camera by looking overyour shoulders and checkingyour rear view mirrors. Due to thedifficulty of ensuring that thearea behind you remains clear,always back up slowly and stopimmediately if you even suspectthat a person, and especially achild, might be behind you.

OYDM046015

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 89


904

Battery saver function• The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the parking lights whenthe driver removes the ignition keyand opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lightswill turn off automatically if the driv-er parks on the side of the road atnight.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed,perform the following:1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switchon the steering column.

Headlight escort function (if equipped)The headlights (and/or taillights) willremain on for approximately 20 min-utes after the ignition key is removedor turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-tion. However, if the driver’s door isopened and closed, the headlightsare turned off after 30 seconds.The headlights can be turned off bypressing the lock button on the trans-mitter (or smart key) twice or turningoff the light switch from the headlightor Auto light position.

If the driver gets out of the vehiclethrough other doors (except driver'sdoor), the battery saver functiondoes not operate and the headlightescort function does not turn offautomatically. Therefore, It causesthe battery to be discharged. In thiscase, make sure to turn off the lampbefore getting out of the vehicle.If the headlights are not workingproperly have your vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer.Don't attempt to inspect or replacethe wiring yourself to prevent mal-function.

LIGHTING

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 90

4 91


Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight anda Parking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob atthe end of the control lever to one ofthe following positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position(4) Auto light / AFLS position

(if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the park-ing light position (1st position), thetail, position, license and instrumentpanel lights will turn ON.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position) the head,tail, position, license and instrumentpanel lights will turn ON.The ignition switch must be in the ONposition to turn on the headlights.

OAM049041OXM049110 OAM049042

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 91


924

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTOlight position, the taillights and head-lights will turn ON or OFF automati-cally depending on the amount oflight outside the vehicle.Never place anything over the sensor(1) located on the instrument panel.This will ensure better auto-light sys-tem control.Do not clean the sensor using a win-dow cleaner, the cleaner may leave alight film which could interfere withsensor operation.

If your vehicle has window tint orother types of metallic coating on thefront windshield, the Auto light sys-tem may not work properly.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull itback for low beams.The high-beam indicator will lightwhen the headlight high beams areswitched on.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the lightson for a prolonged time while theengine is not running.

OYDDCO2042 OAM049044

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:27 Page 92

4 93


To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released.The headlight switch does not need tobe on to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane changesignals

The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn onthe turn signals, move the lever up ordown (A). The green arrow indicatorson the instrument panel indicatewhich turn signal is operating. Theywill self-cancel after a turn is com-pleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.To signal a lane change, move theturn signal lever slightly and hold it inposition (B). The lever will return tothe OFF position when released.

WARNING - High beamsDo not use high beam whenthere are other vehicles. Usinghigh beam could obstruct theother driver's vision.

OAM049043

OAM049045

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 93


944

If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one ofthe turn signal bulbs may be burnedout and will require replacement.If an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, a bulb may be burnedout or have a poor electrical connec-tion in the circuit.

One-touch lane change functionTo activate an one-touch lanechange function, move the turn sig-nal lever slightly and then release it.The lane change signals will blink 3,5 or 7 times.You can choose one-touch lanechange blinking function in "Onetouch turn lamp" of "User setting".Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, the bulb may beburned out or have a poor electricalconnection in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provideimproved visibility when visibility ispoor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Thefog lights will turn on when the fog lightswitch (1) is turned to the on positionafter the headlights are turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn theswitch (1) to the off position.When in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor.

OAM049046N

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 94

4 95


AFLS (Adaptive Front LightingSystem) (if equipped)

Adaptive front lighting system usesthe steering angle and vehiclespeed, to keep your field of visionwide by swiveling and leveling theheadlamp.Change the switch to the AUTO posi-tion when the engine is running. Theadaptive front lighting system willoperate when the headlamp is ON.To turn off the AFLS, change theswitch to other positions. After turn-ing the AFLS off, headlamp swivelingno longer occurs, but leveling oper-ates continuously.

Never place anything over the sen-sor(1) located on the instrumentpanel. This will ensure better auto-light system to turn on and off auto-matically.If the AFLS malfunction indicatorcomes on, the AFLS is not workingproperly. Drive to the nearest safelocation and restart the engine. If theindicator continuously remains on,have system be checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

OYDDCO2042

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 95


964

A : Wiper speed control (front)· HI – High wiper speed· LO – Low wiper speed· INT – Intermittent wipe · OFF – Off· MIST – Single wipe

B : Intermittent control wipe timeadjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*

D : Rear wiper/washer control· /ON – Continuous wipe· ---/INT – Intermittent wipe · O/OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

* : if equipped

Windshield wipersOperates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward andrelease it. The wipers willoperate continuously if thelever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist.To vary the speed setting, turnthe speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speed

If there is a heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield, defrostthe windshield for about 10 minutes,or until the snow and/or ice isremoved before using the windshieldwipers to ensure proper operation.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OAM049100L

OAM049048N

Front

Rear ( 5 Door, if equipped)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 96

4 97


Windshield washers (front)

In the OFF position, pull the levergently toward you to spray washerfluid on the windshield and to run thewipers 1-3 cycles.Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.The spray and wiper operation willcontinue until you release the lever. Ifthe washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level.If the fluid level is not sufficient, youadd appropriate non-abrasive wind-shield washer fluid to the washerreservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located inthe front of the engine compartmenton the passenger side.

OYF049101

CAUTION - Washer pumpTo prevent possible damage tothe washer pump, do not oper-ate the washer when the fluidreservoir is empty.

CAUTION - Wiper positionWhen washing the vehicle, setthe wiper switch in the off posi-tion to stop the auto wiper oper-ation. The wiper may operateand be damaged if the switch isset in the AUTO mode whilewashing the vehicle.

WARNING - Obscuredvisibility

Do not use the washer in freez-ing temperatures without firstwarming the windshield withthe defrosters; the washer solu-tion could freeze on the wind-shield and obscure your vision.

CAUTION - Wipers & windshields

• To prevent possible damageto the wipers or windshield,do not operate the wiperswhen the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, orother solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to thewiper arms and other compo-nents, do not attempt to movethe wipers manually.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 97


984

Rear window wiper and wash-er switch (5 door) (if equipped)

The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of thewiper and washer switch lever. Turnthe switch to desired position tooperate the rear wiper and washer.ON - Normal wiper operationINT - Intermittent wipe OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you tospray rear washer fluid and to run therear wipers 1~3 cycles. The sprayand wiper operation will continueuntil you release the lever.

OAM049103N

OYD044500

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 98

4 99


Do not use the interior lights forextended periods when the engine isnot running.It may cause battery discharge.

Automatic turn off function (if equipped)The interior lights automatically turnoff approximately 20 minutes afterthe ignition switch is turned off.If your vehicle is equipped with thetheft alarm system, the interior lightsautomatically turn off approximately3 seconds after the system is inarmed stage.

Map lamp (if equipped)

Push the lens (1) to turn the map lampon or off. This light produces a spotbeam for convenient use as a maplamp at night or as a personal lamp forthe driver and front passenger.

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING - Interior lightDo not use the interior lightswhen driving in the dark. Theglare from the interior lightsmay obstruct your view andcause an accident.

OYDM046385

OYDM046384

■ Type B

■ Type A

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 99


1004

• DOOR (2) :In the DOOR position, the maplamp and the room lamp come onwhen any door is opened regard-less of the ignition switch position.When doors are unlocked by thetransmitter (or smart key), the maplamp and the room lamp come onfor approximately 30 seconds aslong as any door is not open.The map lamp and the room lampgo out gradually after approximate-ly 30 seconds if the door is closed.However, if the ignition switch isON or all doors are locked, themap lamp and the room lamp willturn off immediately. If a door isopened with the ignition switch inthe ACC or LOCK position, themap lamp and the room lamp stayson for about 20 minutes. However,if a door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the ON position, the maplamp and the room lamp stays oncontinuously. If the type B roomlamp switch is OFF, it doesn't work.

• OFF (3) : The lights turn off even ifa door is opened.When the lamp isturned ON by pressingthe lens (1), the lampdoes not turn off evenif the switch (2) is in theOFF position.

• ON (4) : The map lamp and theroom lamp stay on at alltimes.

Room lamp

To turn the room lamp ON or OFF,push the switch.If your vehicle is not equipped with amap lamp, the room lamp will alsoturn on or off as follows.

- The room lamp comes on when adoor is opened. The lamps go outafter approximately 30 seconds.

- The room lamp comes on forapproximately 30 seconds whendoors are unlocked with a trans-mitter or smart key as long as thedoors are not opened.

OMD040097

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 100

4 101


- The room lamp will stay on forapproximately 20 minutes if adoor is opened with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or LOCK/OFFposition.

- The room lamp will stay on con-tinuously if the door is openedwith the ignition switch in the ONposition.

- The room lamp will go out imme-diately if the ignition switch ischanged to the ON position or alldoors are locked.

Luggage room lamp

The luggage room lamp comes onwhen the trunk (tailgate) is opened.

The luggage lamp comes on as longas the trunk lid (tailgate) is open. Toprevent unnecessary charging sys-tem drain, close the trunk lid (tail-gate) securely after using the lug-gage room.

OYDDCO2045

OYDDCO3237

• 4 Door

• 5 Door

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 101


1024

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on whenthe glove box is opened. To preventunnecessary charging system drain,close the glove box securely afteruse.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light on oroff.• : The lamp will turn on if this

button is pressed.• : The lamp will turn off if this

button is pressed.Always have the switch in the offposition when the vanity mirror lampis not in use. If the sunvisor is closedwithout turning the lamp off, it maydischarge the battery or damage thesunvisor.

OLM049105OYDECO2046CN

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 102

4 103


Headlamp welcomeWhen the headlight(light switch in theheadlight or AUTO position) is on andall doors (and trunk/tailgate) arelocked and closed, the headlight,position light and tail light will comeon for 15 seconds if any of the belowis performed.• Without smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the transmitter.

• With the smart key system- When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.At this time, if you press the door lockbutton (on the transmitter or smartkey), the lights will turn off immediately.

Interior light welcomeWhen the interior light switch is in theDOOR position and all doors (andtrunk/tailgate) are locked and closed,the room lamp will come on for 30seconds if any of the below is per-formed.• Without smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the transmitter.

• With the smart key system- When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.- When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

Puddle lamp and pocket lamp(if equipped)When all doors are locked andclosed, the puddle lamp and pocketlamp will come on for 15 seconds ifany of the below is performed.• With the smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the smart key.

- When the button of the outsidedoor handle is pressed.

- When the vehicle is approachedwith the smart key in possession.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 103


1044

If you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to "WindshieldDefrosting and Defogging" in thissection.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice fromthe interior and exterior of the rearwindow, while the engine is running.To activate the rear windowdefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button located in the centerfacia switch panel. The indicator onthe rear window defroster button illu-minates when the defroster is on.If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow on the rear window, brush it offbefore operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automati-cally turns off after approximately 20minutes or when the ignition switch isturned off. To turn off the defrostermanually, press the rear windowdefroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with theoutside rearview mirror defrosters,they will operate at the same time youturn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with thefront wiper deicer, it will be operatingat the same time you operate thefront windshield defroster.

DEFROSTER

OYD046017L

CAUTION - ConductorsTo prevent damage to the con-ductors bonded to the insidesurface of the rear window,never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners containingabrasives to clean the window.


YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 104

4 105


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Air conditioning button2. Fan speed control knob3. Mode selection knob

4. Rear window defroster button5. Air intake control button6. Temperature control knob

OYD046018L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:28 Page 105


1064

Heating and air conditioning1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.To improve the effectiveness ofheating and cooling :- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air or recirculatedair position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

OYD046239L

(if equipped)(if equipped)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 106

4 107


Mode selection

The mode selection knob controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.Air can be directed to the floor, dash-board outlets, or windshield. Sixsymbols are used to represent Face,Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost andDefrost air position.

Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the faceand the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield andside window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

OYD046019L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 107


1084

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

The MAX A/C mode is used to coolthe inside of the vehicle faster. Airflow is directed toward the upperbody and face.In this mode, the air conditioning andthe recirculated air position will beselected automatically.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivered from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allowsyou to control the temperature of theair flowing from the ventilation sys-tem.To change the air temperature inthe passenger compartment, turnthe knob to the right for warm air orleft for cooler air.

OYD046020L OYDDCL2007

OYD046021L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 108

4 109


Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on thebutton illuminates whenthe recirculated air posi-tion is selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, airfrom the passengercompartment will bedrawn through the heat-ing system and heatedor cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on thebutton will not illuminatewhen the outside (fresh)air position is selected.With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

Prolonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side win-dows and the air within the passengercompartment may become stale.In addition, prolonged operation ofthe air conditioning with the recircu-lated air position selected will resultin excessively dry air in the passen-ger compartment.

OYD046022L WARNING - ReducedVisibility

Continuous use of the climatecontrol system in the recirculat-ed air position may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog the glassand obscure visibility.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 109


1104

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allowsyou to control the fan speed of the airflowing from the ventilation system.To change the fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed orleft for lower speed.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fanspeed control knob to the "0" posi-tion.

WARNING - RecirculatedAir

Continue using the climate con-trol system in the recirculatedair position can cause drowsi-ness or sleepiness, and loss ofvehicle control. Set the airintake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.

WARNING - Sleeping withAC on

Do not sleep in a vehicle withthe air conditioning or heatingon as this may cause seriousharm or death due to a drop inthe oxygen level and/or bodytemperature.

OYDDCL2009 OYDDCL2032

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 110

4 111


Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicator lightwill illuminate). Press the button againto turn the air conditioning system off.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the , position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasantfumes from entering the vehiclethrough the ventilation system,temporarily set the air intake con-trol to the recirculated air position.Be sure to return the control to thefresh air position when the irritationhas passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driv-er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling systemis drawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Careshould be taken that these are notblocked by leaves, snow, ice orother obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on theair conditioning system, and adjustthe temperature control to desiredtemperature.

OYD046023L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 111


1124

Air conditioning (if equipped) Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with R-134a refrigerant.1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,prolonged operation in the recircu-lated air position will excessivelydry the air. In this case, change theair position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control andtemperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position, set the modecontrol to the MAX A/C position,then set the fan speed control tothe highest speed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked indirect sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofthe windows on rainy or humiddays, decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle by operating the airconditioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed as the air conditioning com-pressor cycles. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month only for a few minutesto ensure maximum system per-formance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristic.

CAUTION - Excessive ACWhile using the air conditioningsystem, monitor the tempera-ture gauge closely while drivingup hills or in heavy traffic whenoutside temperatures are high.Air conditioning system opera-tion may cause engine over-heating and potential enginedamage. Continue to use theblower fan but turn the air con-ditioning system off if the tem-perature gauge indicates engineoverheating.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 112

4 113


• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positionprovides maximum cooling, how-ever, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling andhumid air intake. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system. Ifdust or other pollutants accumulate inthe filter over a period of time, the airflow from the air vents may decrease,resulting in moisture accumulation onthe inside of the windshield evenwhen the outside (fresh) air position isselected. If this happens, have the cli-mate control air filter replaced by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is being driven insevere conditions such as dusty,rough roads, more frequent cli-mate control air filter inspectionsand changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenlydecreases, the system should bechecked at an authorized Kiadealer.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 113


1144

Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a negative influence on the airconditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

The air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerantlabel

❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerantlabel in the vehicle may differ from theillustration.

Each symbols and specification onair conditioning refrigerant labelmeans as below ;

1. Classification of refrigerant2. Amount of refrigerant3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detaillocation of air conditioning refrigerantlabel.

CAUTIONIt is important that the correcttype and amount of oil and refrig-erant is used, otherwise damageto the vehicle may occur.To prevent damage, the air con-ditioning system in your vehicleshould only be serviced bytrained and certified technicians.

OXM063009

■ Example

WARNINGThe oil and refrigerant in yourvehicle’s air conditioning sys-tem is under very high pressure.If proper service procedures arenot followed an explosion mayresult. To reduce the risk of seri-ous injury or death, the air con-ditioning system in your vehicleshould only be serviced bytrained and certified technicians.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 114

4 115


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Driver’s temperature control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button

3. OFF button

4. Climate control display

5. Front windshield defroster button

6. Mode selection button

7. Fan speed control switch

8. Air intake control button

9. Rear window defroster button

10. Passenger's temperature control knob

11. SYNC button

12. Air conditioning button

OYD046024L

CAUTIONOperating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause thebattery to discharge. It is best to operate the blower when the engine is running.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 115


1164

Automatic heating and air con-ditioning

1. Push the AUTO button.The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-con-ditioning will be controlled automat-ically by temperature setting.

2. Turn the temperature control knobto set the desired temperature.

✽✽ NOTICE• To turn the automatic operation

off, select any button or switch ofthe following:- Mode selection button- Air conditioning button- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more timeto deselect the front windshielddefroster function. The 'AUTO'sign will illuminate on the infor-mation display once again.)

- Air intake control button- Fan speed control knobThe selected function will be con-trolled manually while other func-tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and toimprove the effectiveness of theclimate control, use the AUTObutton and set the temperature to73°F (23°C).

OYDDCL2012

OYD046025L

■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 116

4 117


✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi-tioningThe heating and cooling system canbe controlled manually by pushingbuttons other than the AUTO button.In this case, the system workssequentially according to the order ofbuttons selected.1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness ofheating and cooling :- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air or recirculatedair position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order toconvert to full automatic control ofthe system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.Every time you press the modeselection button, the mode willchange as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the"Manual climate control system".

OYDDCL2013

OYD046026L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 117


1184

Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is discharged towards theface and floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield andside window defroster.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters.

Defrost-level

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side windowdefrosters.

OYD046027L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:29 Page 118

4 119


Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivered from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allowsyou to control the temperature of theair flowing from the ventilation sys-tem.To change the air temperature inthe passenger compartment, turnthe knob to the right for warm air orleft for cooler air.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually

1. Press the SYNC button to operatethe driver and passenger sidetemperature individually. Pressingthe right temperature control but-ton will automatically switch to theDUAL mode as well.

2. Operate the left temperature con-trol to adjust the driver side tem-perature. Operate the right tem-perature control to adjust the pas-senger side temperature.

OYDDCL2006 OYD046028L

OYD046025L

■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 119


1204

When the driver side temperature isset to the highest (HIGH) or lowest(LOW) temperature setting, theDUAL mode is deactivated for maxi-mum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again todeactivate DUAL mode. The pas-senger side temperature will beset to the same temperature asthe driver side temperature.

2. Operate the driver side tempera-ture control switch. The driver andpassenger side temperature willbe adjusted equally.

Air intake control

The air intake control is used toselect outside (fresh) air position orrecirculated air position.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

OYD046029L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 120

4 121


Recirculated air position

With the recirculated airposition selected, airfrom the passengercompartment will bedrawn through the heat-ing system and heatedor cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

Prolonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side win-dows and the air within the passengercompartment may become stale.In addition, prolonged operation ofthe air conditioning with the recircu-lated air position selected will resultin excessively dry air in the passen-ger compartment.

WARNING - ReducedVisibility

Continuous use of the climatecontrol system in the recirculat-ed air position may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog the glassand obscure visibility.

WARNING - Sleeping withAC on

Do not sleep in a vehicle withthe air conditioning or heatingsystem on as this may causeserious harm or death due to adrop in the oxygen level and/orbody temperature.

WARNING - Recirculatedair

Continued use of the climatecontrol system in the recirculat-ed air position can causedrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set theair intake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 121


1224

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to thedesired speed by pressing the fanspeed control switch.To change the fan speed press the

part of the switch for higherspeed or press the part of theswitch for lower speed.To turn the fan speed control off,press the OFF button.

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate).Press the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

OFF mode

Press the OFF button to turn off theair climate control system. Howeveryou can still operate the mode andair intake buttons as long as the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

OYDDCL2022OYD046031LOYD046030L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 122

4 123


System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumesfrom entering the vehicle throughthe ventilation system, temporarilyset the air intake control to therecirculated air position. Be sure toreturn the control to the fresh airposition when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driv-er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling systemis drawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Careshould be taken that these are notblocked by leaves, snow, ice orother obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on theair conditioning system, and adjustthe temperature control to desiredtemperature.

Air conditioningKia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with R-134a refrigerant.1. Start the engine. Press the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the out-

side air or recirculated air position.4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position, then set thefan speed control to the highestspeed.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 123


1244

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked indirect sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofthe windows on rainy or humiddays, decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle by operating the airconditioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed as the air conditioning com-pressor cycles. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month only for a few minutesto ensure maximum system per-formance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positionprovides maximum cooling, how-ever, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling andhumid air intake. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• If you operate air conditionerexcessively, the difference betweenthe temperature of the outside airand that of the windshield couldcause the outer surface of thewindshield to fog up, causing lossof visibility. In this case, set themode selection knob or button tothe position and fan speedcontrol to the lower speed.

CAUTION• When using the air condition-

ing system, monitor the tem-perature gauge closely whiledriving up hills or in heavy traf-fic when outside temperaturesare high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may causeengine overheating. Continueto use the blower fan but turnthe air conditioning system offif the temperature gauge indi-cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay create water dropletsinside the vehicle. Since exces-sive water droplets may causedamage to electrical equip-ment, air conditioning shouldonly be used with the windowsclosed.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 124

4 125


WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhile defrosting or defogging, set themode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow andice from the windshield, rear win-dow, outside rear view mirrors, andall side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from thehood and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster effi-ciency and to reduce the probabili-ty of fogging up the inside of thewindshield.

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except "0"position.

2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position isnot selected automatically, press thecorresponding button manually.

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the ( ) or ( )position during cooling opera-tion in extremely humid weath-er. The difference between thetemperature of the outside airand the windshield could causethe outer surface of the wind-shield to fog up, causing loss ofvisibility.

OYD046032L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 125


1264

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extremehot position.

3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.

Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position isnot selected automatically, adjust thecorresponding button manually.If the position is selected, lowerfan speed is adjusted to a higher fanspeed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highestposition.

2. Set the temperature to theextreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.If the position is selected, lowerfan speed is adjusted to a higher fanspeed.

OYD046033L

OYD046034L

OYD046035L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 126

4 127


Defogging LogicTo reduce the probability of foggingup inside of the windshield, the airintake or air conditioning are con-trolled automatically according tocertain conditions such as or position. Logic can be disabled andenabled by doing following :

Manual climate control system


2. Turn the mode selection knob tothe defrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control buttonat least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intakecontrol button will blink 3 times with0.5 second of interval. It indicates thatthe defogging logic is canceled orreturned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defoglogic status.

Automatic climate control system


2. Select the defroster position beforepressing the defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioningbutton (A/C), press the air intakecontrol button ( ) at least 5times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake buttonblinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds ofinterval. It indicates that the defog-ging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

OYD046036L OYD046037L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 127


1284

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defoglogic status.

Auto defogging system(if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the probabil-ity of fogging up the inside of thewindshield by automatically sensingthe moisture inside the windshield.The auto defogging system operateswhen the heater or air conditioning ison.

This indicator illuminateswhen the auto defoggingsystem senses the mois-ture inside the windshieldand operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle,higher steps operate as follows. Forexample, if auto defogging does notdefog inside the windshield at step 1Outside air position, it tries to defogagain at step 2 Blowing air towardthe windshield.

Step 1 : Outside air positionStep 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shieldStep 3 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshieldStep 4 : Operating the air conditioningStep 5 : Maximizing the air condi-

tioning

OYDDCL2029

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 128

4 129


If your vehicle is equipped with theauto defogging system, it is automat-ically activated when the conditionsare met. However, if you would like tocancel the auto defogging system,press the front defroster button 4times within 2 seconds while press-ing the AUTO button. The indicatorwill blink 3 times to notify you that thesystem is cancelled. To use the autodefogging system again, follow theprocedures mentioned above.If the battery has been disconnectedor discharged, it resets to the autodefogging status.

✽✽ NOTICE• When the air conditioning is

turned on by Auto defogging sys-tem, if you try to turn off the airconditioning, the indicator willblink 3 times and the air condi-tioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recir-culated air position while Autodefogging system is operating.

When the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the clean air function turnson automatically.Also, the clean air function turns offautomatically, when the ignitionswitch turns to the OFF position.

CAUTIONDo not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of thedriver side windshield glass.Damage to the system partscould occur and may not be cov-ered by your vehicle warranty.

CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)

OYD046038L

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 129


1304

These compartments can be used tostore small items.To avoid possible theft, do not leavevaluables in the storage compartment.Always keep the storage compart-ment covers closed while driving.

Center console storage (if equipped)

To open the center console storage,pull up the lever.

Glove box

To open the glove box, push the button(1) and the glove box will automatical-ly open. Close the glove box after use.Always keep the glove box closedwhile the vehicle is in motion.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store flammable/explo-sive materials in the vehicle.These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

WARNING - Glove boxTo reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

OYDDCO2049

OYDDCO2048

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 130

4 131


Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, pressthe cover and the holder will slowlyopen. Place your sunglasses with thelenses facing out. To close the sun-glass holder, push it up. Do not openthe sunglass holder while the vehicleis moving. The rear view mirror of thevehicle can be blocked by an opensunglass holder.

Luggage tray (5 door, if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box foreasy access.Grasp the strap on the top of thecover and lift it.

OYDM046399

WARNING - Sunglassholder

Do not keep objects except sun-glasses inside the sunglassholder. Such objects can bethrown from the holder in theevent of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring thepassengers in the vehicle.

OYDDCO3238

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:30 Page 131


1324

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, theignition switch must be in the ACC orON position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it allthe way into its socket. When the ele-ment is heated, the lighter will popout to the "ready" position.If it is necessary to replace the ciga-rette lighter, use only a genuine Kiareplacement or its approved equiva-lent.

• Do not hold the lighter in after it isalready heated because it willoverheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out with-in 30 seconds, remove it to preventoverheating.

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover.To clean or empty the ashtray, pull itout.

INTERIOR FEATURES

OYD046040LOYD046039L

CAUTION - Cigarettelighter

Do not insert accessories intothe cigarette lighter socket.Doing so can damage the lightersocket.

WARNING - Ashtray usePutting lit cigarettes or matchesin an ashtray with other com-bustible materials may cause afire.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 132

4 133


Cup holder

✽✽ NOTICEWhen cleaning spilled liquids, donot dry the cup holder at high tem-perature. This may damage the cupholder.

Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Sliding armrest (if equipped)

To move forwardGrab the front portion of the armrest(1) then pull it forward

To move rearwardPush the armrest rearward with yourpalm.

WARNING - Hot liquidsDo not place uncovered cups ofhot liquid in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion. Ifthe hot liquid spills, you mayburn yourself. Such a burn tothe driver could lead to loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.

OYDECO2226CN

OYD046041L

OYDECO2056CN

■ Front

■ Rear (if equipped)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 133


1344

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.To use the sunvisor for the side win-dow, pull it downward, unsnap it fromthe bracket (1) and swing it to theside (2).Adjust the sunvisor extension for-ward or backward (3).To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (4).The ticket holder (5) is provided forholding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warmthe front seats during cold weather.With the ignition switch in the ONposition, push either of the switchesto warm the driver's seat or the frontpassenger's seat.

CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp

Close the vanity mirror coversecurely and return the sunvi-sor to its original position afteruse. If the vanity mirror is notclosed securely, the lamp willstay on and could result in bat-tery discharge and possiblesunvisor damage.

OVG049174

OYD046043L

OYD046042L

■ Front• Type A

■ Front• Type B

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 134

4 135


During mild weather or under condi-tions where the operation of the seatwarmer is not needed, keep theswitches in the OFF position.• Each time you push the button, the

temperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to theOFF position whenever the ignitionswitch is turned on.

• With the seat warmer switch in theON position, the heating system inthe seat turns off or on automaticallydepending on the seat temperature.

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

CAUTION - Seat damage• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solventsuch as thinner, benzene,alcohol and gasoline. Doingso may damage the surface ofthe heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating theseat warmer, do not place any-thing on the seats that insu-lates against heat, such asblankets, cushions or seatcovers while the seat warmeris in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equippedwith seat warmers. Damage tothe seat warming componentscould occur.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

The seat warmer may causeburns even at low temperatures,especially if used for long peri-ods of time. The occupantsmust be able to feel if the seat isbecoming too warm and to turnthe seat warmer off.In particular, the driver mustexercise extreme care for thefollowing types of passengers:1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospitaloutpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skinor those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills,cold tablets, etc.)

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 135


1364

Climate control seat (if equipped)

The climate control seat is providedto cool or warm the seat during hot orcold weather by blowing air throughsmall vent holes on the surface of theseat and seatback. While the engineis running, push the rear portion ofthe switch (blue color) to cool theseat, and push the front portion of theswitch (red color) to warm the seat.When the operation of the climatecontrol seat is not needed, keep theswitch in the OFF position.

The climate control seat defaults tothe OFF position whenever the igni-tion switch is turned on.• Each time you push the button, the

airflow is changed as follows:

When the air vent does not operate,restart the vehicle. If there is nochange, have your vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer.

OYD046044L

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

CAUTION• The climate control seat is a

supplementary cooling/heat-ing system. Use the climatecontrol seat when the climatecontrol system is on. Using theclimate control seat for pro-longed periods of time with theclimate control system offcould impair the performanceof the climate control seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solventsuch as paint thinner, ben-zene, alcohol and gasoline.Doing so may damage the sur-face of the seats.

• Do not spill liquid such aswater or beverages on the sur-face of the front seats andseatbacks, or the air ventholes may be blocked and pre-vented from working properly.

• Do not place materials suchas plastic bags or newspapersunder the seats. The air ventmay not work properly as theair intake can be blocked.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 136

4 137


Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to pro-vide power for mobile telephones orother devices designed to operatewith vehicle electrical systems. Thedevices should draw less than 12V,15A with the engine running.

Use the power outlet only when theengine is running and remove theaccessory plug after use. Using theaccessory plug for prolonged periodsof time with the engine off couldcause the battery to discharge.Only use 12V electric accessorieswhich are less than 15A in electriccapacity.Adjust the air-conditioner or heater tothe lowest operating level whenusing the power outlet.

Close the cover when not in use.Some electronic devices can causeelectronic interference when pluggedinto a vehicle’s power outlet. Thesedevices may cause excessive audiostatic and malfunctions in other elec-tronic systems or devices used inyour vehicle.

OYD046046L

OYD046045L

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING - Electric shockDo not put a finger or a foreignelement (pin, etc.) into a poweroutlet and do not touch with awet hand.You may get an electricshock.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 137


1384

LCD monitor (clock) Whenever the battery terminals orrelated fuses are disconnected, youmust reset the time.When the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the clock but-tons operate as follows:

• HOUR (1) :Pressing the 'H" button will advancethe time display by one hour.

• MINUTE (2) :Pressing the "M" button will advancethe time display by one minute.

• Display conversion:- ClockTo change the 12 hour format tothe 24 hour format, press the "H"and "M" button at the same time formore than 4 seconds.For example, if the time is 10:15p.m., the display will change to22:15.

WARNING - Clock settingdistraction

Do not adjust the clock whiledriving.You may lose your steer-ing control and cause severepersonal injury or an accident.

OYD046323

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 138

4 139


Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down theupper portion of the hanger.

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the floorcarpet, make sure it attaches to thefloor mat anchor(s) in the front andrear floor carpet of your vehicle. Thiskeeps the floor mat from sliding for-ward.

OUN026348

CAUTION - Hanging clothing

Do not hang heavy clothes, sincethose may damage the hook.

ODMECO2034

WARNING - After marketfloor mat

Do not install aftermarket floormats that are not capable ofbeing securely attached to thevehicle's floor mat anchors.Unsecured floor mats can inter-fere with pedal operation.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 139


1404

The following must be observedwhen installing ANY floor mat in thevehicle.• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle'sfloor mat anchor(s) before drivingthe vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-not be firmly attached to the vehi-cle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top ofone another (e.g. ,all-weather rub-ber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floor mat shouldbe installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle wasmanufactured with driver's side floormat anchors that are designed tosecurely hold the floor mat in place.To avoid any interference with pedaloperation, Kia recommends that onlythe Kia floor mat designed for use inyour vehicle be installed.

Luggage net (holder) (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in thecargo area, you can use the fourholders located in the cargo area toattach the luggage net.If necessary, we recommend thatyou contact an authorized Kia dealer.

OYDDCO3239

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the goodsor the vehicle, care should betaken when carrying fragile orbulky objects in the luggagecompartment.

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOToverstretch the luggage net.ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of the luggage net’srecoil path. DO NOT use the lug-gage net when the strap has vis-ible signs of wear or damage.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 140

4 141


Covering shelf (5 Door)

Use the cover to hide items stored inthe cargo area.The covering shelf will be lifted whenthe tailgate is opened. Disconnect thestrap (1) from holder if you want toreturn the cover to original position.Toremove the covering shelf completely,lift the cover to a 43-degree angle andpull it out to the full (2). For installationof the cover, reverse the removal pro-cedure.When you return the covering shelfto its original position, hold the coverand lower it.

Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-gage compartment. It is designed forluggage only.Maintain the balance of the vehicleand locate the weight as far forwardas possible.

OYDDCO3240

CAUTION• Do not operate the vehicle

with the cover removed. It maydamage to the cover.

• The covering shelf may be lift-ed when the tailgate isopened. Ensure that the lug-gage on the cover is moved toa safe place.

• Since the covering shelf maybe damaged or malformed, donot apply excessive force tothe cover or do not put theheavy loads on it.

WARNINGDo not place objects on the cov-ering shelf while driving. Suchobjects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possiblyinjure vehicle occupants duringan accident or when braking.

YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 141

Navigation system (if equipped)The navigation system identifies thepresent position of our vehicle byusing GPS information and can helpguide you to a selected destination.Detailed information for the naviga-tion system is described in a sepa-rately supplied manual.

4 142


YDM USA 4a.QXP 2016-05-03 17:31 Page 142

✽✽ NOTICE If you install an after market HIDhead lamp, your vehicle’s audio andelectronic device may malfunction.

Glass antenna (if equipped)

When the radio power switch isturned on while the ignition switch isin either the “ON” or “ACC” position,your car will receive both AM and FMbroadcast signals through the anten-na in the rear window glass.

AUDIO SYSTEM

1434


CAUTION• Do not clean the inside of the

rear window glass with acleaner or use a scraper toremove foreign deposits asthis may cause damage to theantenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coat-ings such as Ni, Cd, and soon. These can disturb receiv-ing AM and FM broadcast sig-nals.

OYD046053L

YDM USA 4b (AUDIO).QXP 5/1/2016 1:06 PM Page 143

Steering wheel audio controls (if equipped)

The steering wheel may incorporateaudio control buttons.

Do not operate audio remote controlbuttons simultaneously.

VOLUME ( / ) (1)• Press the lever upward ( ) to

increase the volume.• Press the lever downward ( ) to

decrease the volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-ferent functions based on the systemmode. For the following functions thebutton should be pressed for 1 sec-ond or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEKselect button.

CD/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button ispressed for less than 1 second, it willwork as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-TION buttons.

CD/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

4 144


OYDDMM2002

OYDDMM2003

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver's primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver'seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be usedduring operation of the vehicle.


MODE (3)Press the button to change audiosource.FM(1~2)➟AM➟SAT(1~3)➟CD➟USBAUX(iPod®)➟FM...In addition to mode change, Poweron/off can be made by pressing thisbutton when the ignition switch is onACC or ON.- Power ON: Press the button when

the audio is off- Power OFF: Press the button for

more than 1 second when theaudio is on.

MUTE (4, if equipped)• Press the button to mute the

sound.• Press the button to turn off the

microphone during a telephonecall.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons are described in the followingpages in this chapter.

Aux, USB and iPod®* port

If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port oriPod® port, you can use an aux portto connect audio devices and anUSB port to plug in an USB and alsoan iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source of theportable audio device.

* iPod® is a Registered trademark of Apple Inc.

1454


OYD046047L


How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-cast from transmitter towers locatedaround your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-cle. This signal is then processed bythe radio and sent to your vehiclespeakers.When a strong radio signal hasreached your vehicle, the preciseengineering of your audio systemensures the best possible qualityreproduction. However, in somecases the signal coming to your vehi-cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such asthe distance from the radio station,closeness of other strong radio sta-tions or the presence of buildings,bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broad-casts. This is because AM radiowaves are transmitted at low fre-quencies. These long distance,lowfrequency radio waves can follow thecurvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight. In addition, theycurve around obstructions resultingin better signal coverage.

4 146


JBM002

AM reception

JBM001

FM reception


FM broadcasts are transmitted athigh frequencies and do not bend tofollow the earth's surface. Becauseof this, FM broadcasts generallybegin to fade within short distancesfrom the station. short distances fromthe station. Also, FM signals are eas-ily affected by buildings, mountains,and obstructions. This can lead toundesirable or unpleasant listeningconditions which might lead you tobelieve a problem exists with yourradio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radiotrouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle movesaway from the radio station, thesignal will weaken and sound willbegin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select anotherstronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static orfluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen thiseffect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-nal weakens, another more power-ful signal near the same frequencymay begin to play. This is becauseyour radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs,select another station with astronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radiosignals being received from sever-al directions can cause distortionor fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal fromthe same station, or by signalsfrom two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the conditionhas passed.

1474


JBM003

FM radio station

JBM005JBM004


Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio system. This does notmean that something is wrong withthe audio equipment. In such a case,try to operate mobile devices as farfrom the audio equipment as possi-ble.When using a communication sys-tem such as a cellular phone or aradio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-rate external antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system and adverselyaffect safe operation of the vehicle.

Caring for disc• If the temperature inside the car is

too high, open the car windows toventilate before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA files without permis-sion. Use CDs that are createdonly by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, suchas benzene and thinner, normalcleaners and magnetic spraysmade for analogue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface fromgetting damaged, hold CDs by theedges or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a pieceof soft cloth before playback (wipeit from the center to the outsideedge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape orpaper.

• Make certain only CDs are insert-ed into the CD player (Do not insertmore than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after useto protect them from scratches ordirt.

4 148


WARNING - Cell PhoneUse

Do not use a cellular phonewhile driving. Stop at a safelocation to use a cellular phone.


• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs maynot operate normally according tothe manufacturing companies. Insuch circumstances, continueduse may cause malfunctions toyour audio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible

Copy Protected AudioCD

Some copy protected CDs, which donot comply with international audioCD standards (Red Book), may notplay on your car audio. Please notethat inabilities to properly play acopy protected CD may indicatethat the CD is defective, not the CDplayer.

NOTE:Order of playing files (folders) :1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.2. Folder playing order :❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

1494



4 150


WARNING - DriverDistraction

• Do not stare at the screenwhile driving. Staring at thescreen for prolonged periodsof time could lead to trafficaccidents.

• Using the phone while drivingmay lead to a lack of attentionof traffic conditions andincrease the likelihood ofaccidents. Use the phone fea-ture after parking the vehicle.

WARNING - AudioSystem

• Do not disassemble, assem-ble, or modify the audio sys-tem. Such acts could result inaccidents, fire, or electricshock.

• Heed caution not to spill wateror introduce foreign objectsinto the device. Such actscould lead to smoke, fire, orproduct malfunction.

WARNING - AntennaDo not touch the antenna dur-ing thunder or lightening assuch acts may lead to lightninginduced electric shock.

CAUTIONRefrain from use if the screen isblank or no sound can be heardas these signs may indicate aproduct malfunction.


• Adjust the volume to levels thatallow the driver to hear soundsfrom outside of the vehicle. Drivingin a state where external soundscannot be heard may lead to acci-dents.

• Pay attention to the volume settingwhen turning the device on. A sud-den output of extreme volumeupon turning the device on couldlead to hearing impairment. (Adjustthe volume to a suitable levelsbefore turning off the device.)

• If you want to change the positionof device installation, pleaseinquire with your place of purchaseor service maintenance center.Technical expertise is required toinstall or disassemble the device.

• Turn on the car ignition beforeusing this device. Do not operatethe audio system for long periodsof time with the ignition turned offas such operations may lead tobattery discharge.

✽✽ NOTICE In case of product malfunction,please contact your place of pur-chase or After Service center.

1514


CAUTION - LCD MonitorDo not subject the device tosevere shock or impact. Directpressure onto the front side ofthe monitor may cause damageto the LCD or touch screen.

CAUTION - Device cleaning

• When cleaning the device,make sure to turn off thedevice and use a dry andsmooth cloth.

• Never use tough materials,chemical cloths, or solvents(alcohol, benzene, thinners,etc.) as such materials maydamage the device panel orcause color/quality deteriora-tion.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Prevent caustic solutions such

as perfume and cosmetic oilfrom contacting the dashboardbecause they may cause dam-age or discoloration.

• Placing the audio systemwithin an electromagneticenvironment may result innoise interference.


4 152


USING THE USB DEVICE• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-nected when starting up thevehicle. Connect the device afterstarting up.

• If you start the engine when theUSB device is connected, it maydamage the USB device. (USBflashdrives are very sensitive toelectric shock.)

• If the engine is started up orturned off while the external USBdevice is connected, the externalUSB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-thenticated MP3 or WMA files.1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA musicfiles with the compression ratebetween 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-tricity when connecting or discon-necting the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, theconnected external USB devicecan be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sectorsetting of External USB device isnot either 512BYTE or2048BYTE, then the device willnot be recognized.

• Use only a USB device format-ted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/Fauthentication may not be recog-nizable.

• Make sure the USB connectionterminal does not come in con-tact with the human body orother objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-connect the USB device in ashort period of time, it may breakthe device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnect-ing a USB device.

• If you disconnect the externalUSB device during playback inUSB mode, the external USBdevice can be damaged or maymalfunction. Therefore, discon-nect the external USB devicewhen the audio is turned off or inanother mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)

• Depending on the type andcapacity of the external USBdevice or the type of the filesstored in the device, there is adifference in the time taken forrecognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device forpurposes other than playingmusic files.

• Playing videos through the USBis not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such asrechargers or heaters using USBI/F may lower performance orcause trouble.

(Continued)


1534


(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may notrecognize the USB device. In thatcase, connect the USB devicedirectly to the multimedia terminalof the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by log-ical drives, only the music files onthe highest-priority drive are rec-ognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera canbe unrecognizable by standardUSB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB maynot be supported in some mobiledevices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable toconnection failures due to vehiclevibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices(METAL COVER TYPE USB) canbe unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB flash memory read-

ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,etc.) or external-HDD typedevices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memorymay be lost while using thisaudio. Always back up importantdata on a personal storagedevice.

• Please avoid usingUSB memory prod-ucts which can beused as key chainsor cellular phoneaccessories as they could causedamage to the USB jack. Pleasemake certain only to use plugtype connector products.


4 154


(Continued)• Some iPod® devices, such as the

iPhone®, can be connectedthrough the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology interface. The devicemust have audio Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology capability(such as for stereo headphoneBluetooth® Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it willnot be controlled by the audiosystem.

• To use iPod® features within theaudio, use the cable providedupon purchasing an iPod®

device.• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on thecharacteristics of youriPod®/iPhone® device.

• If your iPhone® is connected toboth the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dockconnector or Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology to changethe sound output (source).

(Continued)

(Continued)• When connecting iPod® with the

iPod® Power Cable, insert theconnector to the multimediasocket completely. If not insertedcompletely, communicationsbetween iPod® and audio maybe interrupted.

• When adjusting the soundeffects of the iPod® and theaudio system, the sound effectsof both devices will overlap andmight reduce or distort the qual-ity of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equaliz-er function of an iPod® whenadjusting the audio system’s vol-ume, and turn off the equalizerof the audio system when usingthe equalizer of an iPod®.

• When not using iPod® with caraudio, detach the iPod® cablefrom iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®

may remain in accessory mode,and may not work properly.

• Beside support 1M cable whenpurchasing iPod/iPhone products,Long Cable cannot be recognized.

USING THE iPod® DEVICE• Some iPod® models may not

support communication protocoland files may not properly play.Supported iPod® models:- iPhone® 3GS/4- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation- iPod® classic

• The order of search or playbackof songs in the iPod® can be dif-ferent from the order searched inthe audio system.

• If the iPod® is disabled due to itsown malfunction, reset theiPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®

manual)• An iPod® may not operate nor-

mally on low battery.(Continued)


Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology

Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyThe Bluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use ofsuch marks by Kia is under license.A Bluetooth® enabled call phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® wirelesstechnology.

Before Using the Bluetooth®

Handsfree

What is Bluetooth® ?• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis-

tance wireless networking technol-ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~2.48GHz frequency to connect var-ious devices within a certain dis-tance.

• Supported within PCs, externaldevices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,various electronic devices, andautomotive environments,Bluetooth® allows data to be trans-mitted at high speeds without hav-ing to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to adevice which allows the user to con-veniently make phone calls withBluetooth® mobile phones throughthe audio system.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not besupported in some mobile phones.To learn more about mobile devicecompatibility, visithttp://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

Precautions for Safe Driving

• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a featurethat enables drivers to practice safedriving. Connecting the head unitwith a Bluetooth® phone allows theuser to conveniently make andreceive calls and use contacts.Before using Bluetooth®, carefullyread the contents of this user’smanual.

• Excessive use or operations whiledriving may lead to negligent driv-ing practices and result in acci-dents. Refrain from excessive oper-ations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolongedperiods of time is dangerous andmay lead to accidents. When driv-ing, view the screen only for shortperiods of time.

1554


WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be used dur-ing operation of the vehicle.


When connecting a Bluetooth®

Phone

• Before connecting the head unitwith the mobile phone, check tosee that the mobile phone sup-ports Bluetooth® features.

• Even if the phone supportsBluetooth®, the phone will not befound during device searches ifthe phone has been set to hiddenstate or the Bluetooth® power isturned off. Disable the hiddenstate or turn on the Bluetooth®

power prior to searching/connect-ing with the Head unit.

• Bluetooth phone is automaticallyconnected when the ignition on.

• If you do not want automatic con-nection with your Bluetooth®

device, turn off the Bluetooth®

feature within your mobile phone.• The Handsfree call volume and

quality may differ depending onthe mobile phone.

• Park the vehicle when connectingthe head unit with the mobilephone.

• Bluetooth® connection maybecome intermittently discon-nected in some mobile phones.Follow these steps to try again.1. Within the mobile phone, turn

the Bluetooth® function off/onand try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobilephone battery, reboot, and thenagain.

4. Reboot the Audio System andtry again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pairand try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volumemay differ depending on themodel of your mobile phone.

4 156



Voice Recognition

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listed with-in the user's manual are supported.

• Be aware that during the operationof the voice recognition system,pressing any key other than the

key terminate voice recognitionmode.

• For superior voice recognition per-formance, position the microphoneused for voice recognition abovethe head of the driver’s seat andmaintain a proper position whensaying commands.

• Within the following situations,voice recognition may not functionproperly due to external sound.- When the windows and sunroof

are open- When the wind of the cooling /

heating device is strong- When entering and passing

through tunnels(Continued)

(Continued)- When driving on rugged and

uneven roads- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)• Phone related voice commands

can be used only when aBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice is connected.

• When making calls by stating aname, the corresponding contactmust be downloaded and storedwithin the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone book, ittakes some times to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properly oper-ate.

• Pronounce the voice commandsnaturally and clearly as if in a nor-mal conversation.

1574



4 158


AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)

B0G3G0000EU

■ Type A


1594


Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

❈ The actual features in the vehiclemay differ from the illustration.

(1) EJECT• Ejects the disc.

(2) RADIO• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.• Each time the button is pressed,

the mode is changed in the orderof FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟

SAT2 ➟ SAT3.• In [SETUP] button � [Display], the

radio pop up screen will be dis-played when [Mode Pop up] isturned [On]. When the pop upscreen is displayed, use the TUNEknob or preset buttons to select thedesired mode.

(3) MEDIA• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,

My Music, BT Audio mode.• Each time the button is pressed, the

mode is changed in the order of CD➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟

BT(Bluetooth®) Audio.• In [SETUP] button � [Display], the

media pop up screen will be dis-played when [Mode Pop up] isturned [On]. When the pop upscreen is displayed, use the TUNEknob or preset buttons to select thedesired mode.

(4) PHONE• Operates Phone Screen.• When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

(5) SEEK/TRACK• Radio mode: Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode

- Shortly press the button: Movesto next or previous song (file).

- Press and hold the button:Rewinds or fast-forwards the cur-rent song.

• Bluetooth® Audio mode: Moves tonext or previous song(file).- The Play/Pause feature may

operate differently depending onthe mobile phone.

(6) POWER/VOL knob• Power knob: Turns power On/Off

by pressing the knob.• Volume knob: Sets volume by turn-

ing the knob left/right.


4 160


(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)• Radio mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-quencies (channels).

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode- [RPT] button: Repeat- [RDM] button: Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, andMenu pop up screen, the numbermenu is selected.

(8) DISP• Each time the button is shortly

pressed, sets the Screen Off ➟

Screen On ➟ Screen Off.• Audio operation is maintained and

only the Screen will be turned Off.• In the Screen Off state, press any

button to turn the Screen On again.

(9) SCAN• Radio mode

- Shortly press the button:Previews each broadcast for 5seconds each.

- Press and hold the button:Previews the broadcasts savedin preset [1] ~ [6] buttons for 5seconds each.

- Press the [SCAN] button againto continue listening to the cur-rent frequency.

- SAT Radio does not support thepreset scan feature.

• CD, USB, My Music mode- Shortly press the button:

Previews each song (file) for 10seconds each.

- Press the [SCAN] button againto continue listening to the cur-rent song (file).

(10) SETUP• Moves to the Display, Sound,

Phone, System setting modes.


1614


(11) MENU• Displays menus for the current

mode.• iPod® List: Move to parent category.

(12) CAT/FOLDER• SiriusXM Radio: Category Search.• MP3 CD/USB mode: Folder Search.

(13) TUNE knob• Radio mode: Changes frequency

by turning the knob left/right.• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turningthe knob left/right.When the desired song is dis-played, press the knob to play thesong.

• Moves focus in all selection menusand selects menus.


4 162


✽✽ NOTICE - Using CompactDiscs

• If the temperature inside the car istoo high, open the car windows toventilate before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA files without permis-sion. Use CDs that are createdonly by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, such asbenzene and thinner, normal clean-ers and magnetic sprays made foraudio cassettes onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface fromgetting damaged, hold CDs by theedges or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a pieceof soft cloth before playback (wipeit from the center to the outsideedge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape orpaper.

• Make certain only CDs are insert-ed into the CD player (Do notinsert more than one CD at atime).

• Keep CDs in their cases after useto protect them from scratches ordirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs maynot operate normally dependingon manufacturing company orrecording methods.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible CopyProtected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which donot comply with international audioCD standards (Red Book), may notplay on your car audio. Please notethat inabilities to properly play acopy protected CD may indicatethat the CD is defective, not the CDplayer.

NOTE:Order of playing files (folders):1. Song playing order: to

sequentially.2. Folder playing order:❋ If no song file is contained in

the folder, that folder is not dis-played.


1634


WARNING- Audio System Safety

Warnings• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at thescreen for prolonged periodsof time could lead to trafficaccidents.

• Do not disassemble, assem-ble, or modify the audio sys-tem. Such acts could result inaccidents, fire, or electricshock.

• Using the phone while drivingmay lead to a lack of attentionof traffic conditions andincrease the likelihood ofaccidents. Use the phone fea-ture after parking the vehicle.

• Exercise caution not to spillwater or introduce foreignobjects into the device. Suchacts could lead to smoke, fire,or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no soundcan be heard as these signsmay indicate product malfunc-tion. Continued use in suchconditions could lead to acci-dents (fires, electric shock) orproduct malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-ing thunder or lightening assuch acts may lead to light-ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-ing-restricted areas to operatethe product. Such acts couldlead to traffic accidents.

WARNING - DistractedDriving

Driving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle con-trol that may lead to an acci-dent, severe personal injury,and death. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of avehicle or which are not permis-sible by law should never beused during operation of thevehicle.


4 164


✽✽ NOTICE• If you want to change the position

of device installation, pleaseinquire with your place of pur-chase or service maintenance cen-ter. Technical expertise is requiredto install or disassemble thedevice.

• Turn on the car ignition beforeusing this device. Do not operatethe audio system for long periodsof time with the ignition turned offas such operations may lead tobattery discharge.

✽✽ NOTICEIn case of product malfunction,please contact your dealer or vehicleservice center.

CAUTION• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Directpressure onto the front side ofthe monitor may cause damageto the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device,make sure to turn off thedevice and use a dry andsmooth cloth. Never usetough materials, chemicalcloths, or solvents (alcohol,benzene, thinners, etc.) assuch materials may damagethe device panel or causecolor/quality deterioration

• Do not place beverages closeto the audio system. Spillingbeverages may lead to systemmalfunction.

• Placing the audio system with-in an electromagnetic environ-ment may result in noise inter-ference.


1654


✽✽ NOTICE - Using the USBDevices

• To use an external USB device,make sure the device is not con-nected when starting up the vehi-cle. Connect the device after start-ing up.

• If you start the engine when theUSB device is connected, it maydamage the USB device. (USBflashdrives are very sensitive toelectric shock.)

• If the engine is started up orturned off while the external USBdevice is connected, the externalUSB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with thecompression rate between 8Kbps~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music fileswith the compression ratebetween 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electric-ity when connecting or disconnect-ing the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.• Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connect-ed external USB device can beunrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sectorsetting of External USB device isnot either 512BYTE or2048BYTE, then the device willnot be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formattedto FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/Fauthentication may not be recog-nizable.

• Make sure the USB connectionterminal does not come in contactwith the human body or otherobjects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-connect the USB device in a shortperiod of time, it may break thedevice.

(Continued)

(Continued)• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnectinga USB device.

• If you disconnect the external USBdevice during playback in USBmode, the external USB device canbe damaged or may malfunction.Therefore, disconnect the externalUSB device when the audio isturned off or in another mode.(e.g, Radio)

• Depending on the type and capac-ity of the external USB device orthe type of files stored in thedevice, there is a difference in thetime for recognition the device.

• Do not use the USB device for pur-poses other than playing musicfiles.

• Playing videos through the USB isnot supported.

• Use of USB accessories such asrechargers or heaters using USBI/F may lower performance orcause trouble.

(Continued)


4 166


(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may notrecognize the USB device. In thatcase, connect the USB devicedirectly to the multimedia termi-nal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by log-ical drives, only the music files onthe highest-priority drive are rec-ognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera canbe unrecognizable by standardUSB I/F.

• Charging through the USB maynot be supported in some mobiledevices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable toconnection failures due to vehiclevibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices(METAL COVER TYPE USB)can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) orexternal-HDD type devices can beunrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIG-ITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory maybe lost while using this audio.Always back up important data ona personal storage device.

• Please avoid usingUSB memory productswhich can be used askey chains or cellularphone accessories asthey could cause damage to theUSB jack. Please make certainonly to use plug type connectorproducts.


1674


✽✽ NOTICE - Using iPod® DeviceiPod® is a registered trademark ofApple inc.• Some iPod® models may not sup-

port communication protocol andfiles may not play properly.Supported iPod® models: - iPhone® 3GS/4- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation- iPod® classic

• The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod® can be differentfrom the order searched in theaudio system.

• If the iPod® is disabled due to itsown malfunction, reset the iPod®.(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)

• An iPod® may not operate nor-mally on low battery.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some iPod® devices, such as the

iPhone®, can be connectedthrough the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology interface. The devicemust have audio Bluetooth®Wireless Technology capability(such as for stereo headphoneBluetooth® Wireless Technology ).The device can play, but it will notbe controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod® features within theaudio mode, use the cable provid-ed upon purchasing an iPod®

device.• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®

device.• If your iPhone® is connected to

both the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, only iPod®

mode will be supported duringBluetooth® Audio Streaming. Touse Bluetooth® Audio Streaming,disconnect iPod® cable withiPhone®.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When connecting iPod® with the

iPod® Power Cable, insert the con-nector to the multimedia socketcompletely. If not inserted com-pletely, communications betweeniPod® and audio may be interrupt-ed.

• When adjusting the sound effectsof the iPod® and the audio system,the sound effects of both deviceswill overlap and might reduce ordistort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod® when adjust-ing the audio system’s volume, andturn off the equalizer of the audiosystem when using the equalizer ofan iPod®.

• When not using iPod® with caraudio, detach the iPod® cable fromiPod®. Otherwise, iPod® mayremain in accessory mode, andmay not work properly.

• Use an iPod®/iPhone® USB cableshorter than 1 meter in length,longer cables cannot be recognized.


4 168


✽✽ NOTICE - Using theBluetooth® WirelessTechnology CellularPhone

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree refers to a device whichallows the user to convenientlymake phone calls with Bluetooth®Wireless Technology mobilephones through the audio system.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyallows devices to be connected in ashort distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wire-less remote controllers, etc. Formore information, visit theBluetooth® Wireless Technologywebsite at www.Bluetooth.com.Before using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features.

• The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by Kia isunder license. Other trademarksand trade names are those of theirrespective owners. A Bluetooth®

enabled cell phone is required touse Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

features supported within thevehicle are as follows. Some fea-tures may not be supporteddepending on your Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device.- Answering and placingBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree calls

- Menu operation during call(Switch to Private, Switch to callwaiting, Outgoing volume)

- Download Call History- Download Mobile Phone book- Phone book/Call History Auto

Download- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

device auto connection- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Audio• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology related features of theaudio system, refer your phone’sUser’s Manual for phone-sideBluetooth® Wireless Technologyoperations.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The phone must be paired to the

audio system to use Bluetooth®Wireless Technology related fea-tures.

• Pairing and connecting aBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled mobile phone will workonly when the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology option within yourmobile phone has been turned on.(Methods of turning on theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled feature may differdepending on the mobile phone.)

• Do not use a cellular phone or per-form Bluetooth® Wireless Technologysettings (e.g. pairing a phone)while driving.

• Even if the phone supportsBluetooth® Wireless Technology,the phone will not be found duringdevice searches if the phone hasbeen set to hidden state or theBluetooth® Wireless Technologypower is turned off. Disable thehidden state or turn on theBluetooth® Wireless Technologypower prior to searching/connect-ing with the car audio system.

(Continued)


1694


(Continued)• You will not be able to use the

hands-free feature when yourphone (in the car) is outside of thecellular service area (e.g. in a tun-nel, in an underground location, ina mountainous area, etc.).

• If the cellular phone signal is pooror the vehicle's interior noise is tooloud, it may be difficult to hear theother person’s voice during a call.

• Do not place the phone near orinside metallic objects, otherwisecommunications with Bluetooth®Wireless Technology system or cel-lular service stations can be dis-turbed.

• Placing the audio system within anelectromagnetic environment mayresult in noise interference.

• Some cellular phones or otherdevices may cause interferencenoise or a malfunction to the audiosystem. In this case, storing thedevice in a different location mayresolve the condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)• While a phone is connected

through Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology your phone may dis-charge quicker than usual foradditional Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology-related operations.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-tion (IGN/ACC ON), theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone will be automatically con-nected. Even if you are outside, theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone will be automatically con-nected once you are in the vicinityof the vehicle. If you do not wantto automatically connect yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone, try the following.

1) Turn off the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature in yourmobile phone.

2) Turn off the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature in your caraudio system.

(Continued)

(Continued)- To turn off the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology feature inyour car audio system, go to[SETUP] button � [Phone] and[turn off] the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology feature.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyconnection may become intermit-tently disconnected in somemobile phones. Follow these stepsto try again.

1) Turn the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology function within themobile phone off/on and tryagain.

2) Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3) Completely remove the mobilephone battery, reboot, and thenagain.

4) Reboot the audio system and tryagain.

5) Delete all paired devices, pair andtry again.

• It is possible to pair up to fiveBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices to the car system.

(Continued)


4 170


(Continued)• Phone contact names should be

saved in English or they may notbe displayed correctly.

• The Handsfree call volume andquality may differ depending onthe mobile phone.

• Only one Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device can be connect-ed at a time.

• In some mobile phones, startingthe ignition while talking throughBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled handsfree call will resultin the call becoming disconnected.(Switch the call back to yourmobile phone when starting theignition.)

• If the mobile phone is not pairedor connected, it is not possible toenter Phone mode. Once a phoneis paired or connected, the guid-ance screen will be displayed.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not besupported in some mobile phones.To learn more about mobile devicecompatibility, visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

✽✽ NOTICE• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Handsfree is a feature that enablesdrivers to practice safe driving.Connecting the car audio systemwith a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone allows the userto conveniently make calls, receivecalls, and manage the phone book.Before using the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology, carefullyread the contents of this user’smanual.

WARNING• Excessive use or operations

while driving may lead to neg-ligent driving practices and bethe cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the deviceexcessively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for pro-longed periods of time whiledriving is dangerous and maylead to accidents.


1714


✽✽ NOTICE - Using VoiceRecognition

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listedwithin the user's manual are sup-ported.

• Be aware that during the opera-tion of the voice recognition sys-tem, pressing any button otherthan the button terminates thevoice recognition mode.

• For optimal voice recognition per-formance, position your headbelow the microphone above thedriver’s seat and maintain properposition when speaking voice com-mands.


are open- When the blower AC/heater is

set to high- When entering and passing

through tunnels- When driving on rugged and


windstorms)(Continued)

(Continued)• Phone related voice commands can

be used only when a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device is con-nected.


• After downloading the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology phone book,it takes some times to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properlyoperate.



4 172


Radio Mode

With the Radio Mode Button

Seek

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button.• Shortly pressing the button:

Automatically searches for the nextstation.

• Pressing and holding the button:While holding the button, frequen-cy changes without stopping.When the button is released, auto-matically searches for the next fre-quency from that point.

Preset Seek

Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons.• Shortly pressing the button: Plays

the frequency saved in the corre-sponding button.

• Pressing and holding the button:Pressing and holding the desiredbutton from [1] ~ [6] will save thecurrently playing broadcast to theselected button and sound a BEEP.

Scan

Press the [SCAN] button.• Shortly pressing the button: The

broadcast frequency increasesand previews each broadcast for 5seconds each. After scanning allfrequencies, returns and plays thecurrent broadcast frequency.

• Pressing and holding the button:Previews the broadcasts saved inpreset [1] ~ [6] buttons for 5 sec-onds each.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right toadjust the frequency.

MENU: Radio

Within [MENU] button is the A.Store(Auto Store).

A.Store (Auto Store): [1] Button

Select A.Store (Auto Store) to savefrequencies with superior receptionto preset [1] ~ [6] buttons. If no fre-quencies are received, then the mostrecently received frequency will bebroadcast.


1734


SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a3-month trial subscription to theSirius Select package. You’ll get over140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favoritesports, exclusive talk, entertainment,and a selection of premium program-ming. For more information and acomplete list of SiriusXM channels,visit siriusxm.com in the UnitedStates, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:To receive the satellite signal, yourvehicle has been equipped with asatellite radio antenna located on theroof of your vehicle. The vehicle roofprovides the best location for anunobstructed, open view of the sky, arequirement of a satellite radio sys-tem. Like AM/FM, there are severalfactors that can affect satellite radioreception performance:• Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep theantenna clear of snow and icebuild-up and keep luggage andother material as far away from theantenna as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-ings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages,dense tree foliage and thunder-storms can interfere with yourreception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-basedsatellite radio service that broad-casts music, sports, news and enter-tainment programming to radioreceivers, which are available forinstallation in motor vehicles or facto-ry installed, as well as for the home,portable and wireless devices, andthrough an Internet connection on apersonal computer.Vehicles that are equipped with afactory installed SiriusXM SatelliteRadio system include:• Hardware and an introductory trial

subscription term, which begins onthe date of sale or lease of thevehicle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access toSiriusXM music channels, andother select channels over theInternet using any computer con-nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-tomers only).

For information on extended sub-scription terms, contact SiriusXM at1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:SiriusXM services require a sub-scription sold separately, or as apackage, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. Ifyou decide to continue serviceafter your trial, the subscriptionplan you choose will automatical-ly renew thereafter and you will becharged according to your chosenpayment method at then-currentrates. Fees and taxes apply. Tocancel you must call SiriusXM at1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXMCustomer Agreement for com-plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.SiriusXM U.S. satellite and dataservices are available only in the48 contiguous states, DC andPuerto Rico (with coverage limita-tions). SiriusXM satellite service isalso available in Canada; seewww.siriusxm. ca. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Sirius, XM and all related marksand logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.


4 174


SiriusXM Radio Mode

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXMso you have access to over 140channels of music, information, andentertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate yourSirius Select subscription, you willneed to contact SiriusXM CustomerCare at 1-800-643-2112. Have your12-digit RID (Radio IdentificationNumber)/ESN (Electronic SerialNumber) ready. To retrieve theRID/ESN, turn on the radio, pressthe [RADIO] button, and tune tochannel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will needto be turned on, in Sirius mode, andhave an unobstructed view of the skyin order for the radio to receive theactivation signal.

Seek

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button.• Shortly pressing the button: Select

previous or next channel.• Pressing and holding the button:

Continuously move to previous ornext channel.

• If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within thecurrent category.

Scan

Press the [SCAN] button.• Shortly pressing the button:

Previews each broadcast for 5 sec-onds each.

• Press the [SCAN] button again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency.

• If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within thecurrent category.

Category

Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button.• The display will indicate the catego-

ry menus, highlight the categorythat the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, pressthe [CAT/FOLDER] button to navi-gate category list.

• Press TUNE knob to select thelowest channel in the highlightedcategory.

• If channel is selected by selectingcategory, then the “CATEGORY”icon is displayed at the top of thescreen.


1754


Preset

Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons.• Shortly pressing the button: Plays

the channel saved in the corre-sponding button.

• Pressing and holding the button:Pressing and holding the desiredbutton from [1] ~ [6] will save thecurrent broadcast to the selectedbutton and sound a BEEP.

✽✽ Troubleshooting1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, theantenna or antenna cable is bro-ken or unplugged. Please consultwith your Kia dealership.

2. No SignalIf this message is displayed, itmeans that the antenna is coveredand that the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio signal is not available.Ensure the antenna is uncoveredand has a clear view of the sky.

Tune

• Rotate TUNE knob: Changes thechannel number or scrolls catego-ry list.

• Press TUNE knob: Selects themenu.

Menu: SiriusXM Radio

Press the [MENU] button.

Info (Information): [1] Button

Displays the Artist/Song info of thecurrent song.


4 176


Media Mode

With the Media Mode ButtonPress the [MEDIA] button to changethe mode in the order of CD ➟

USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BTAudio.The folder/file name is displayed onthe screen.

The CD is automatically played whena CD is inserted.The USB music is automaticallyplayed when a USB is connected.

Repeat

While song (file) is playing � [RPT]button.Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, MyMusic mode: RPT on screen.• To repeat one song (press the but-

ton): Repeats the current song.MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT onscreen.• To repeat folder (press the button

twice): Repeats all files within thecurrent folder.

Press the [RPT] button again to turnoff repeat.

■ My Music Mode

■ USB Mode

■ MP3 CD Mode

■ Audio CD Mode


1774


Random

While song (file) is playing � [RDM]button.Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM onscreen.• Random (press the button): Plays

all songs in random order.MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM onscreen.• Folder Random (press the button):

Plays all files within the currentfolder in random order.

iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen.• All Random (press the button):

Plays all files in random order.MP3 CD, USB: ALL RDM on screen.• All Random (press the button

twice): Plays all files in randomorder.

Press the [RDM] button again to turnoff random.

Changing Song/File

While song (file) is playing �[SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] button.• Shortly pressing the button: Plays

the current song from the begin-ning.

If the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] button ispressed again within 2 seconds, theprevious song is played.• Pressing and holding the button:

Rewinds the song.While song (file) is playing �[SEEK/TRACK ∧∧] button.

• Shortly pressing the button: Playsthe next song.

• Pressing and holding the button:Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing �[SCAN] button.• Shortly pressing the button: Scans

all songs from the next song for 10seconds each.

• Press the [SCAN] button again toturn off.

• The SCAN function is not support-ed in iPod® mode.

Folder Search(Only MP3 CD, USB mode)

While file is playing � [CAT/FOLDER ∧∧] button.• Searches the next folder.While file is playing � [CAT/FOLDER ∨∨] button.• Searches the parent folder.If a folder is selected by pressing theTUNE knob, the first file within theselected folder will be played.In iPod® mode, moves to the ParentFolder.

Searching Songs/Files

• Turning TUNE knob: Searches forsongs (files).

• Pressing TUNE knob: Plays select-ed song (file).


4 178


MENU: Audio CD

Press the Audio CD mode [MENU]button to set the Repeat, Random,Information features.

Repeat: [1] Button

Repeat the current song.Press RPT again to turn off.

Random: [2] Button

Randomly play songs within the cur-rent CD.Press RDM again to turn off.

Information: [3] Button

Display information for the currentsong.Press the [MENU] button to turn offinfo display.

MENU: MP3 CD/USB

Press the MP3 CD/USB mode[MENU] button to set the Repeat,Folder Random, Folder Repeat, AllRandom, Information, and Copy fea-tures.

Repeat: [1] Button

Repeat the current song.Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random: [2] Button

Randomly play songs within the cur-rent folder.

Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat: [3] Button

Repeat songs within the current fold-er.Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random: [4] Button

Randomly play all songs within theCD/USB.Press A.RDM again to turn off.


Display information for the currentsong.Press the [MENU] button to turn offinfo display.

Copy: [6] Button

This is used to copy the current songinto My Music. You can play thecopied Music in My Music mode.If another button is pressed whilecopying is in progress, a pop up ask-ing you whether to cancel copying isdisplayed.If another media is connected orinserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)while copying is in progress, copyingis canceled.Music will not be played while copy-ing is in progress.


1794


MENU: iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the [MENU]button to set the Repeat, Random,Information and Search features.

Repeat: [1] Button

Repeat the current song.Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random: [2] Button

Plays all songs within the currentlyplaying category in random order.Press RDM again to turn off.


Displays information for the currentsong.Press the [MENU] button to turn offinfo display.

Search: [4] Button

Displays iPod® category list.While in iPod® category sublists,press the [MENU] button to move upto the parent category.

MENU: AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIAcurrently connected with the AUXterminal.AUX mode will automatically startwhen an external device is connect-ed with the AUX terminal.If an external device is connected,you can also press the [MENU] but-ton to change to AUX mode.AUX mode cannot be started unlessthere is an external device connect-ed to the AUX terminal.

✽✽ NOTICE - Using the AUXFully insert the AUX cable into theAUX terminal for use.


4 180


MENU: My Music

In My Music mode, press the[MENU] button to set the Repeat,Random, Information, Delete, DeleteAll and Delete Selection features.

Repeat: [1] Button

Repeats the currently playing song.Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random: [2] Button

Plays all songs in random order.Press RDM again to turn random off.


Displays information for the currentsong.Press the [MENU] button to turn offinfo display.

Delete: [4] Button

Deletes currently playing file.In the play screen, pressing deletewill delete the currently playing song.Deletes file from list.➀ Select the file you wish to delete

by using the TUNE knob.➁ Press the [MENU] button and

select [Delete] from the menu todelete the selected file.

Delete All: [5] Button

Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection: [6] Button

Songs within My Music are selectedand deleted.

➀ Select the songs you wish todelete from the list.

➁ After selecting, press [MENU] but-ton and select [Delete] from themenu.


1814


✽✽ NOTICE - Using the My Music• Even if memory is available, a

maximum of 6,000 songs can bestored.

• The same song can be copied up to1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked inthe System menu of Setup.

MENU: Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology AudioIf BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology audio will startplaying.Audio may not automatically startplaying in some mobile phones.

• Play/Stop:Press the TUNE knob to play andpause the current song.The title/artist info may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.When it is not supported, no title orartist will be displayed.• Previous/Next songPress [SEEK/TRACK] button to playprevious or next song.The previous song/next song/play/pause functions may not be support-ed in some mobile phones.

WARNING - DistractedDriving

Driving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be used dur-ing operation of the vehicle.


4 182


Phone Mode

Making a call using the Steeringwheel controls


(1) Mutes audio volume.(2) Press the button to change audio

source.FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟

AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio(3) Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(4) Activates voice recognition.(5) Places and transfers calls.• Check call history and making

calls.- Shortly press the [CALL] button

on the steering wheel controls.- The call history list will be dis-

played on the screen.- Press the [CALL] button again to

connect a call to the selectednumber.

• Redialing the most recently callednumber.- Press and hold the [CALL] but-

ton on the steering wheel con-trols.

- The most recently called numberis redialed.

(6) Ends calls or cancels functions.

❈ If call history does not exist, ascreen asking whether to down-load call history is displayed. (Thedownload feature may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones)

Pairing on the Steering wheelcontrols

1. Press the [CALL] button on thesteering wheel controls.

2. Select [OK] to enter the PairPhone screen.

• Vehicle Name: Name of device asshown when searching from yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice

• Passkey: Passkey used to pair thedevice


1834


3. From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select yourcar audio system.

❈ SSP: Secure Simple PairingNon SSP supported device:4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed where the passkey isentered. Enter the passkey “0000”to pair your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device with the caraudio system.

SSP supported device:4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed that has the 6 digitpasskey from any nearby SSPdevice that is found. Check thepasskey on your Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology.

Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android TM

and Blackberry® phones) may offeran option to allow acceptance of allfuture Bluetooth® connection requestsby default. Visit http://www.kia.com/for additional information on pairingyour Bluetooth®-enabled mobilephone, and to view a phone compat-ibility list.

• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are paired but none arecurrently connected, pressing the[CALL] button on the steeringwheel control displays the followingscreen. Select [Pair] to pair a newdevice or select [Connect] to con-nect a previously paired device.

MENU: Phone

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice connected, press the[PHONE] button to display thePhone menu screen.

Favorites: [1] Button

Up to 20 frequently used contactscan be saved for easy access.

Call History: [2] Button

Displays the call history list screen.If you select the [History] but there isno call history data, a prompt is dis-played which asks to download callhistory data.


4 184


Contacts: [3] Button

Displays the Contacts list screen.If you select the [Contacts] but thereis no contacts data stored, a promptis displayed which asks to downloadcontacts data.

Setup: [4] Button

Displays Phone related settings.This feature may not be supported insome mobile phones. For more infor-mation on download support, refer toyour mobile phone’s user manual.

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device connect-ed will display the following screen.To accept the call, press [CALL] but-ton on the steering wheel while thecall is incoming.• Caller: Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller issaved within your contacts.

• Incoming Number: Displays theincoming number.

✽✽ NOTICE• When an incoming call pop-up is

displayed, most Audio and SETUPmode features are disabled. Onlythe call volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not beproperly displayed in some mobilephones.


1854


Favorites

Press the [PHONE] button � Select[Fav].• Saved favorite contact: Connects

call upon selection.• To add favorite: Downloaded con-

tacts can be saved as favorite.• To save Favorite, contacts should

be downloaded.• Contact saved in Favorites will not

be automatically updated if thecontact has been updated in thephone. To update Favorites, deletethe Favorite and create a newFavorite.

Call History

Press the [PHONE] button � Select[History].A list of incoming, outgoing andmissed calls is displayed.• Call history may not be saved in

the call history list in some mobilephones.

• Calls received with hidden caller IDwill not be saved in the call historylist.

• Calling through the call history isnot possible when there is no callhistory stored or a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone is notconnected.

• Up to 50 received, dialed andmissed calls are stored in CallHistory.

• Time of received/dialed calls andcall time information are not storedin Call History.

Contacts

Press the [PHONE] button � Select[Contacts].The list of saved phone book entriesis displayed.

✽✽ NOTICEFind a contact in alphabetical order,press the [MENU] button.


4 186


• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone can be downloaded into thecar contacts. Contacts that havebeen downloaded to the car cannotbe edited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are man-aged separately for each pairedBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-tacts each). Previously down-loaded data is maintained even ifthe Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice has been disconnected.(However, the contacts and callhistory saved to the phone will bedeleted if a paired phone is delet-ed.)

• It is possible to download contactsduring Bluetooth® streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, theicon will be displayed within thestatus bar.

• It is not possible to begin down-loading a contact list when the con-tact download feature has beenturned off within the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device. Inaddition, some devices mayrequire device authorization uponattempting to download contacts. Ifdownloading does not normallyoccur, check the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device set-tings or for notifications on thescreen.

• The contacts download featuremay not be supported in somemobile phones. For more informa-tion of supported Bluetooth®

devices and function support, referto your phone’s user manual.


1874


Voice Recognition Mode

Using Voice Recognition

Shortly press the button on thesteering wheel controls. Say a com-mand.If prompt feedback is in [On], thenthe system will say “Please say acommand after the beep (BEEP)”.• If prompt feedback is in [On] mode,

then the system will only say“(BEEP)”.

• To change Prompt Feedback[On]/[Off], go to [SETUP] button �[System] � [Prompt Feedback].

• For proper recognition, say thecommand after the voice instruc-tion and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices• Use full names vs. short or single

syllable names. (“John Smith” vs.“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.“Home”)

• Avoid using special characters orhyphens. (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

• Avoid using acronyms. (“In Case ofEmergency” vs. “ICE”)

• Spell words completely, no abbre-viations. (“Doctor Goodman” vs.“Dr. Goodman”)

Skipping Prompt MessagesWhile prompt message is being stat-ed � Shortly press the button onthe steering wheel controls.The prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “Beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a command� Shortly press the button on thesteering wheel controls.The command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep tone willsound. After the “Beep”, say thevoice command.

Ending Voice RecognitionWhile Voice Recognition is operating� Press and hold the button onthe steering wheel controls.• While using voice command,

pressing any steering wheel con-trols or a different button will endvoice command.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, say “cancel” or“end” to end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, press and holdthe button on the steeringwheel to end voice command.


4 188


Voice Recognition and PhoneContact Tips:The Kia Voice Recognition Systemmay have difficulty understandingsome accents or uncommon names.When using Voice Recognition toplace a call, speak in a moderatetone, with clear pronunciation.To maximize the use of VoiceRecognition, consider these guide-lines when storing contacts:• Use full names vs. short or single

syllable names. (“John Smith” vs.“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.“Home”)

• Avoid using special characters orhyphens. (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

• Avoid using acronyms. (“In Case ofEmergency” vs. “ICE”)

• Spell words completely, no abbre-viations. (“Doctor Goodman” vs.“Dr. Goodman”)


1894


Illustration on Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the button:

Skipping Voice Recognition



Ending Voice Recognition


while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command afterthe beep. (BEEP)

Please say a...

Please say the contact name you want to call.

Beep~

More HelpHere are some examples of mode commands.You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.You can also say a media source like ‘CD’, ‘USB’, ‘MyMusic’, or ‘iPod®’.Additionally, there are phone commands like‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.You can find more detailed commands in the user'smanual.Please say a command after the beep.



(BEEP)


4 190


Voice Command ListCommon Commands

These commands can be used in most operations.(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command FunctionMore Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used

anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be usedwithin the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith”

Call <Name>on Mobile

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Mobile” in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile

Call <Name>in Office

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Office” in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office

Call <Name>at Home

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Home” in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith” at Home

Call <Name>on Other

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Other” in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith” on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands.After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“CallHistory”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute cor-responding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Command FunctionCall History Displays the Call History screen.

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying thiscommand, say the name of a contact saved in theContacts to automatically connect the call.

Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying thiscommand, you can say the number that you wantto call.

Redial Connects the last dialed call number.

Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognitionand Bluetooth® connections

Radio

• When listening to the radio, displays the nextradio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟

SAT3)• When listening to a different mode, displays the

most recently played radio screen.• When currently listening to the FM radio, main-

tains the current state.• When listening to a different mode, displays the

most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.


1914


Command FunctionFM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in

FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding fre-quency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding fre-quency.

SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains thecurrent state.

• When listening to a different mode, displays themost recently played SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS (Satellite)1~3

Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS Channel0~223

Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.

CD Plays music on the CD.

USB Plays music on the USB device.

iPod® Plays music on the iPod®.

My Music Plays music saved in My Music.

Command FunctionAUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®

device.

Mute Mutes the sound.

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.


4 192


FM/AM Radio Commands

Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.Satellite Radio Commands

Commands that can be used while listening to SatelliteRadio.Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current presentand plays for 10 seconds each.

Command FunctionChannel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.


1934


Audio CD Commands

Commands available during Audio CD operation.MP3 CD/USB Commands

Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.Command Function

Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequentialorder.

Information Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequentialorder.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.


4 194


iPod® Commands

Commands available during iPod® operation.My Music Commands

Commands available during My Music operation.Command Function

Random Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.



Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an addi-tional confirmation process.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the songs within the current cate-

gory.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequentialorder.


1954


Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands

Commands available during Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio streaming from mobile phone opera-tion Command Operation.

Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.


4 196


Setup Mode

With the Display Button

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Display].

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] � Changes [On]selection mode.• During On state, press the [RADIO]

or [MENU] button to display themode change pop up screen.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select thedesired display info from ‘Folder/File’or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

With the Sound Button

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Sound].


1974


Tone

This menu allows you to set theBass, Middle, Treble.Select [Tone].• Return: While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob will restorethe parent menu.

• Bass, Middle, Treble: Selects thesound tone.

• Default: Restores default settings.

Position

This menu allows you to set theFader, Balance.Select [Position].• Return: While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob willrestore the parent menu.

• Fader, Balance: Selects the soundfader and balance.

• Default: Restores default settings.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automaticallycontrol the volume level according tothe speed of the vehicle.Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] �Set [Off/On].

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.Select [Voice Recognition Vol.].


4 198


With the Phone Button

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone].

Pair Phone

The following steps are the same asthose described in the section“Pairing on the Steering wheel con-trols” on the previous page.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyfeatures supported within the vehi-cle are as follows. Some featuresmay not be supported dependingon your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device.- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree

calls- Operations during a call (Switch

to Private, Switch to call waiting,MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History- Downloading Mobile Contacts- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

device auto connection- Bluetooth® Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology devices can be pairedto the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device can be con-nected at a time.

• Other devices cannot be pairedwhile a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree and Bluetooth® audiorelated features are supported.

• Bluetooth® related operations arepossible only within devices thatsupport Handsfree or audio fea-tures, such as a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phoneor a Bluetooth® audio device.

• If a connected Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device becomes dis-connected due to being out ofcommunication range, turning thedevice OFF, or a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology communica-tion error, corresponding Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology devices areautomatically searched and recon-nected.


1994


• If the system becomes unstabledue to communication errorsbetween the car Handsfree and theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice, reset the device by turningoff and back on again. Upon reset-ting Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice, the system will be restored.

• After pairing is complete, a con-tacts download request is sentonce to the mobile phone. Somemobile phones may require confir-mation upon receiving a downloadrequest, ensure your mobile phoneaccepts the connection. Refer toyour phones user’s manual foradditional information regardingphone pairing and connections.

Phone List

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Phone List].1) Connected Phone: Device that is

currently connected.2) Paired Phone: Device that is

paired but not connected. • Connecting a DeviceFrom the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andselect [Connect].


4 200


• Disconnecting a DeviceFrom the paired phone list, select thecurrently connected device andselect [Disconnect].

• Changing PriorityWhat is Priority?It is possible to pair up to fiveBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices with the car audio system.The “Change Priority” feature is usedto set the connection priority ofpaired phones. From the paired phone list, select

the phone you want to switch to thehighest priority, then select [ChangePriority] from the Menu. The selecteddevice will be changed to the high-est priority.Priority icon will be displayed whenthe selected phone is set as a priori-ty phone.


2014


• Deleting a DeviceFrom the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to delete and select[Delete].- When deleting the currently con-

nected device, the device will auto-matically be disconnected to pro-ceed with the deleting process.

- If a paired Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is deleted, thedevice’s call history and contactsdata will also be deleted.

- To re-use a deleted device, youmust pair the device again.

Pairing a New Device

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Pair Phone].Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices can be paired with the audiosystem.For more information, refer to the“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-tion within Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Phone List].This feature is used to view mobilephones that have been paired withthe audio system. Upon selecting apaired phone, the setup menu is dis-played.For more information, refer to the“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyConnection” section within Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology.


4 202


1) Connect/Disconnect Phone:Connect/Disconnects currently selectedphone.

2) Change Priority: Sets currentlyselected phone to highest connec-tion priority.

3) Delete: Deletes the currentlyselected phone.

4) Return: Moves to the previousscreen.

• To learn more about whether yourmobile phone supports contactdownloads, refer to your mobilephone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connect-ed phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone]� Select [Contacts Download].As the contacts are downloadedfrom the mobile phone, a downloadprogress bar is displayed.• Upon downloading phone con-

tacts, the previous correspondingdata is deleted.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operatewhile contacts are being down-loaded.

Outgoing Volume

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Outgoing Volume]Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgo-ing volume level.

• While on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the [SEEK/TRACK]button.


2034


Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Bluetooth SystemOff].Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyis turned off, Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology related features will notbe supported within the audio sys-tem.• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

back on, go to [SETUP] button �[Phone] and select “Yes”.

With the System Button

Press the [SETUP] button � Select[System].

Memory Information

Displays currently used memory andtotal system memory.Select [Memory Information] � [OK].The currently used memory is dis-played on the left side while the totalsystem memory is displayed on theright side.


4 204


Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voicecommand feedback between Normaland Expert modes.Select [Prompt Feedback] � Setthrough TUNE knob.• On: This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailedinstructions during voice commandoperation.

• Off: This mode is for expert usersand omits some information duringvoice command operation. (Whenusing Expert mode, guidanceinstructions can be heard throughthe [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the displayand voice recognition language.Select [Language].The system will reboot after the lan-guage is changed.• Language support by region.

English, Français, Español


2054


iPod® is a registered trademark ofApple Inc. iPod® mobile digitaldevice sold separately. TheBluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks ownedby Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Kia is underlicense. SiriusXM services requirea subscription sold separately, oras a package, by Sirius XM RadioInc. If you decide to continue serv-ice after your trial, the subscrip-tion plan you choose will automat-ically renew thereafter and youwill be charged according to yourchosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxesapply. To cancel you must callSiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. SeeSiriusXM Customer Agreement forcomplete terms at www.sir-iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satelliteand data services are availableonly in the 48 contiguous states,DC and Puerto Rico (with cover-age limitations). SiriusXM satelliteservice is also available inCanada; see www.siriusxm.ca. Allfees and programming subject tochange.

Sirius, XM and all related marksand logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Android™ is atrademark of Google, Inc.BlackBerry is a registered trade-mark of Research In MotionLimited (RIM). All other marks,channel names and logos are theproperty of their respective own-ers. All rights reserved.


4 206


B0H3G0000EU

AUDIO (With Touch Screen)

■ Type B


2074


Feature of Your Audio

Head unit


(1) EJECT• Ejects the disc.

(2) RADIO• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.• Each time the button is pressed,

the mode is changed in the orderof FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟ SAT3.

(3) MEDIA• Changes to CD/USB(iPod®)/AUX/

My Music/Bluetooth® Audio mode.• Each time the button is pressed,

the mode is changed in the orderof CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ MyMusic ➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio.

(4) PHONE• Changes to Phone mode.• When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

(5) POWER/VOL knob• Power knob: Press to turn power

on/off.• Volume knob: Turn left/right to con-

trol volume.

(6) SEEK/TRACK• When pressed briefly

- Radio mode: Plays previous/next frequency.

- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes: Changes the track,song(file).

• When pressed and held- Radio mode: Continuously

changes the frequency. Uponrelease, plays the current fre-quency.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes: Rewinds or fast forwardsthe track or file.

- During a Handsfree call, controlsthe call volume.


4 208


(7) DISP• Turns the monitor display on/off.

(8) MUTE• When the button is pressed, stops

sound and “Audio Mute” is dis-played on LCD.

(9) SCAN• Radio mode: Previews all receiv-

able broadcasts for 5 secondseach.

• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes:Previews each song (file) for 10seconds each.

(10) SETUP• Changes to Setup mode.

(11) TUNE knob• Radio mode: Turn to change

broadcast frequencies.• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)

modes: Turn to search Tracks/channels/files.

(12) CAT/FOLDER• SiriusXM Radio: Category Search.• MP3 CD/USB mode: Search Folder.


2094


✽✽ NOTICE - Using CompactDiscs

• This device has beenmanufactured to be com-patible with softwarebearing the following logo marks.

• Do not clean discs with chemicalsolutions, such as record sprays,antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-uids, benzene, or thinners.

• After using a disc, put the discback in its original case to preventdisc scratches.

• Hold discs by their edges or withinthe center hole to prevent damageto disc surfaces.

• Do not introduce foreign sub-stances into the disc insert/ejectslot. Introducing foreign sub-stances could damage the deviceinterior.

• Do not insert two discs simultane-ously.

• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,differences in disc reading andplaying times may occur depend-ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-duction method and the recordingmethod used.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Clean fingerprints and dust off the

disc surface (coated side) with asoft cloth.

• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discsattached with labels may result indisc slot jams or difficulties in discremoval. Such discs may alsoresult in noise while playing.

• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs maynot properly operate depending onthe disc manufacturer, productionmethod and the recording methodused. If problems persist, tryingusing a different CD as continueduse may result in malfunctions.

• The performance of this productmay differ depending on the CD-RW Drive Software.

• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type CDs may not function in thedevice. DATA discs cannot beplayed. (However, such discs maystill operate but will do so abnor-mally.)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use abnormally shaped

discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped) as such discs could lead tomalfunctions.

• If the disc is straddled on the discslot without removal for 10 sec-onds, the disc will automaticallybe re-inserted into the disc player.

• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with labels)


4 210


✽✽ NOTICE - Using the USBDevices

• Connect the USB device afterturning on the engine. The USBdevice may become damaged if itis already connected when theignition is turned on. The USBdevice may not operate properly ifthe car ignition is turned on or offwith the USB device connected.

• Be careful for static electricitywhen connecting/disconnectingUSB devices.

• Encoded MP3 Players will not berecognized when connected as anexternal device.

• When connecting an external USBdevice, the vehicle's audio systemmay not recognize the USBdepending on what firmware isused by USB device or what filesare on the USB.

• Only products formatted withbyte/sectors under 64Kbyte will berecognized.

• This device recognizes USBdevices formatted in FAT 12/16/32file formats. This device does notrecognize files in NTFS file for-mat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB devices may not be sup-

ported due to compatibility issues.• Avoid contact between the USB

connector and bodily parts or for-eign objects.

• Repeated connecting/disconnect-ing of USB devices within shortperiods of time may result in prod-uct malfunction.

• A strange noise may occur whendisconnecting the USB.

• Make sure to connect/disconnectexternal USB devices with theaudio power turned off.

• The amount of time required torecognize the USB device may dif-fer depending on the type, size orfile formats stored on the USB.Such differences in time are notindications of malfunctions.

• The vehicle audio system only sup-ports USB devices designed toplay music files.

• USB images and videos are notsupported.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use the USB I/F to charge

batteries or USB accessories thatgenerate heat. Doing so may leadto worsened performance or dam-age to the audio system.

• The audio system may not recog-nize the USB device if separatelypurchased USB hubs and exten-sion cables are being used.Connect the USB device directlywith the USB port of the vehicle.

• When using mass storage USBdevices with separate logicaldrives, only files saved to the rootdrive can be played.

• Files may not properly operate ifapplication programs are installedon the USBs.

• The audio system may not operatenormally if MP3 Players, cellularphones, digital cameras, or otherelectronic devices (USB devicesnot recognized as portable diskdrives) are connected with theaudio system.

(Continued)


2114


(Continued)• Charging through the USB may

not work for some mobile devices.• The device may not support nor-

mal operation when using a typi-cal USB memory device (minia-ture, keychain, etc.). For bestresults, use a typical USB devicethat has a metal case.

• The device may not support nor-mal operation when using formatssuch as HDD Type, CF, or SDMemory.

• The device will not support fileslocked by DRM (Digital RightsManagement.)

• USB memory sticks used by con-necting an Adaptor (SD Type orCF Type) may not be properly rec-ognized.

• The device may not operate prop-erly when using USB HDDs orUSBs subject to connection fail-ures caused by vehicle vibrations.(e.g. i-stick type)

(Continued)

(Continued)• Avoid use of USB

memory products thatcan also be used as keychains or mobile phoneaccessories. Use of such productsmay cause damage to the USBjack.

• Connecting an MP3 device orphone through various channels,such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USBmode may result in pop noises orabnormal operation.


4 212


✽✽ NOTICE - Using an iPod®

• iPod® is a registered trademark ofApple Inc.

• In order to use the iPod® withyour vehicle's audio system, youmust use a dedicated iPod® cable.(the cable that is supplied whenpurchasing iPod®/iPhone® prod-ucts)

• If the iPod® is connected to thevehicle while it is playing, a highpitch sound could occur forapproximately 1-2 seconds imme-diately after connecting. If possi-ble, connect the iPod® to the vehi-cle with the iPod® stopped/paused.

• When the vehicle ignition is set toACC or ON, connecting the iPod®

through the iPod® cable willcharge the iPod® through the caraudio system.

• When connecting with the iPod®

cable, make sure to fully insert thejack to prevent communicationinterference.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the EQ features of an exter-

nal device, such as the iPod®, andthe audio system are both active,EQ effects could overlap andcause sound deterioration and dis-tortion. Whenever possible, turnoff the EQ feature within theexternal device when it is connect-ed to the audio system.

• Noise may occur when an iPod® orAUX device is connected. Whensuch devices are not being used,disconnect the device for storage.

• When the iPod® or AUX devicepower is connected to the powerjack, playing the external devicemay result in noise. In such cases,disconnect the power connectionbefore use.

• Skipping or improper operationmay occur depending on the char-acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®

device.(Continued)

(Continued)• If your iPhone® is connected to

both the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, the soundmay not be properly played. Inyour iPhone®, select the Dock con-nector or Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology to change the soundoutput (source).

• iPod® mode cannot be operatedwhen the iPod® cannot be recog-nized due to versions that do notsupport communication protocols.

• For fifth generation iPod® Nanodevices, the iPod® may not be rec-ognized when the battery level islow. Please charge the iPod® foruse.

• The search/play orders shownwithin the iPod® device may differfrom the orders shown within theaudio system.

• If the iPod® malfunctions due toan iPod® device defect, reset theiPod® and try again. (To learnmore, refer to your iPod® manual)

(Continued)


2134


(Continued)• Some iPod® products may not

sync with the System dependingon the version. If the Media isremoved before the Media is rec-ognized, then the system may notproperly restore the previouslyoperated mode. (iPad® charging isnot supported.)

• Use an iPod® cable shorter than 1meter in length such as the oneoriginally supplied with a newiPod®, longer cables may lead tothe audio system not recognizingthe iPod®.

✽✽ NOTICE - Using theBluetooth® WirelessTechnology AudioMode

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode can be used onlywhen a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone has been con-nected.

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode will not be availablewhen connecting mobile phonesthat do not support this feature.

• If a Bluetooth®Wireless TechnologyPhone is being used to play musicand receives an incoming or out-going phone call, then the musicwill stop.

• Moving the Track up/down whileplaying Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio mode mayresult in pop noises with somemobile phones.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologystreaming audio may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When returning to Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Audio modeafter ending a call, the mode maynot automatically restart in somemobile phones.

• Receiving an incoming call ormaking an outgoing call whileplaying Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio may result inaudio interference.


4 214


✽✽ NOTICE - Using theBluetooth® WirelessTechnology CellularPhone

• Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree refers to a device whichallows the user to convenientlymake phone calls with Bluetooth®Wireless Technology mobilephones through the audio system.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyallows devices to be connected in ashort distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wire-less remote controllers, etc. Formore information, visit theBluetooth® Wireless Technologywebsite at www.Bluetooth.com.Before using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features.

• The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.and any use of such marks by Kiais under license. Other trade-marks and trade names are thoseof their respective owners. ABluetooth® enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth®WirelessTechnology.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

features supported within thevehicle are as follows. Some fea-tures may not be supporteddepending on your Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device.- Answering and placingBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree calls

- Menu operation during call(Switch to Private, Switch to callwaiting, Outgoing volume)

- Download Call History- Download Mobile Phone book- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

device auto connection- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Audio• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology related features of theaudio system, refer your phone’sUser’s Manual for phone-sideBluetooth® Wireless Technologyoperations.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The phone must be paired to the

audio system to use Bluetooth®Wireless Technology related fea-tures.

• Pairing and connecting aBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled mobile phone will workonly when the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology option within yourmobile phone has been turned on.(Methods of turning on theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled feature may differdepending on the mobile phone.)

• Do not use a cellular phone or per-form Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology settings (e.g. pairing aphone) while driving.

• Even if the phone supportsBluetooth® Wireless Technology,the phone will not be found duringdevice searches if the phone hasbeen set to hidden state or theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyhas been deactivated. Disable thehidden state or activate theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyprior to searching/connecting withthe car audio system.

(Continued)


2154


(Continued)• You will not be able to use the

hands-free feature when yourphone (in the car) is outside of thecellular service area. (e.g. in a tun-nel, in an underground area, in amountainous area, etc.)

• If the cellular phone signal is pooror the vehicles interior noise is tooloud, it may be difficult to hear theother person’s voice during a call.

• Do not place the phone near orinside metallic objects, otherwisecommunications with Bluetooth®Wireless Technology system or cel-lular service stations can be dis-turbed.

• Placing the audio system within anelectromagnetic environment mayresult in noise interference.

• Some cellular phones or otherdevices may cause interferencenoise or malfunction to the audiosystem. In this case, storing thedevice in a different location mayresolve the condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)• While a phone is connected

through Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology your phone may dis-charge quicker than usual foradditional Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology-related operations.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-tion (IGN/ACC ON), theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone will be automatically con-nected. Even if you are outside, theBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone will be automatically con-nected once you are in the vicinityof the vehicle. If you do not wantto automatically connect yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone, try the following.

1) Turn off the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature in yourmobile phone.

2) Turn off the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature in your caraudio system.

(Continued)

(Continued)- To turn off the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology feature inyour car audio system, go to[SETUP] button � [Phone] and[turn off] the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology feature.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyconnection may become intermit-tently disconnected in somemobile phones. Follow these stepsto try again.

1) Turn the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology function within themobile phone off/on and tryagain.

2) Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3) Completely remove the mobilephone battery, reboot, and thentry again.

4) Reboot the audio system and tryagain.

5) Delete all paired devices, pair andtry again.

• It is possible to pair up to fiveBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices to the car system.

(Continued)


4 216


(Continued)• Phone contact names should be

saved in English or they may notbe displayed correctly.

• The Handsfree call volume andquality may differ depending onthe mobile phone.

• Only one Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device can be connect-ed at a time.

• In some mobile phones, startingthe ignition while talking throughBluetooth® Wireless Technologyenabled handsfree call will resultin the call becoming disconnected.(Switch the call back to yourmobile phone when starting theignition.)

• If the mobile phone is not pairedor connected, it is not possible toenter Phone mode. Once a phoneis paired or connected, the guid-ance screen will be displayed.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not besupported in some mobile phones.To learn more about mobile devicecompatibility, visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

✽✽ NOTICE• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Handsfree is a feature that enablesdrivers to practice safe driving.Connecting the car audio systemwith a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone allows the userto conveniently make calls, receivecalls, and manage the phone book.Before using the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology, carefullyread the contents of this user’smanual.

WARNING• Excessive use or operations

while driving may lead to neg-ligent driving practices and bethe cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the deviceexcessively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for pro-longed periods of time whiledriving is dangerous and maylead to accidents.


2174


✽✽ NOTICE - Using VoiceRecognition

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listedwithin the user’s manual are sup-ported.

• Be aware that during the opera-tion of the voice recognition sys-tem, pressing any button otherthan the button will terminatethe voice recognition mode.

• For optimal voice recognition per-formance, position your headbelow the microphone above thedriver’s seat and maintain properposition when speaking voice com-mands.


are open- When the blower AC/heater is

set to high- When entering and passing

through tunnels- When driving on rugged and


windstorms)(Continued)

(Continued)• Phone related voice commands can

be used only when a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device is con-nected.


• After downloading the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology phone book,it takes some time to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properlyoperate.



4 218


Radio Mode

Radio Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode Display

Displays current operating mode.

(2) Frequency

Displays the current frequency.

(3) Preset

Displays current preset number [1] ~[6].

(4) Preset Display

Displays preset buttons.

(5) A.Store

Automatically saves frequencies withsuperior reception to preset buttons.

With the Radio Mode Button

Pressing the [RADIO] button willchange the operating mode in theorder of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟ SAT3.If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[SETUP] button � [Display], thenpressing the [RADIO] button will dis-play the Radio Mode Pop up screen.Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.


2194


Seek

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button toplay the previous/next frequency.

Tune

Turn the TUNE knob to select thedesired frequency.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the [Preset] to display thebroadcast information for the fre-quency saved to each button.Press the [1] ~ [6] to play the desiredpreset.While listening to a frequency youwant to save as a preset, press andhold one of the [1] ~ [6] to save thecurrent frequency to the selectedpreset.

A.Store(Auto Store)

Press the [A.Store] to automaticallysave receivable frequencies to pre-set buttons.

Scan

Press the [SCAN] button to previewfrequencies with superior receptionfor 5 seconds each.Press and hold the [SCAN] button topreview presets for 5 seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previousfrequency will be restored. WhileScan is operating, pressing the[SCAN] button will cancel scanning.


4 220


SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the SiriusSelect package.You’ll get over 140 chan-nels, including commercial-free music,plus all your favorite sports, exclusivetalk, entertainment, and a selection ofpremium programming. For more infor-mation and a complete list of SiriusXMchannels, visit siriusxm.com in the UnitedStates, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehi-cle has been equipped with a satelliteradio antenna located on the roof ofyour vehicle. The vehicle roof providesthe best location for an unobstructed,open view of the sky, a requirement ofa satellite radio system. Like AM/FM,there are several factors that can affectsatellite radio reception performance:• Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep theantenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterial as far away from the anten-na as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-ings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages,dense tree foliage and thunder-storms can interfere with yourreception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-basedsatellite radio service that broad-casts music, sports, news and enter-tainment programming to radioreceivers, which are available forinstallation in motor vehicles or facto-ry installed, as well as for the home,portable and wireless devices, andthrough an Internet connection on apersonal computer.Vehicles that are equipped with afactory installed SiriusXM SatelliteRadio system include:• Hardware and an introductory trial

subscription term, which begins onthe date of sale or lease of the vehi-cle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access toSiriusXM music channels, andother select channels over theInternet using any computer con-nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-tomers only).

For information on extended sub-scription terms, contact SiriusXM at1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:SiriusXM services require a sub-scription sold separately, or as apackage, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.If you decide to continue serviceafter your trial, the subscriptionplan you choose will automatical-ly renew thereafter and you will becharged according to your chosenpayment method at then-currentrates. Fees and taxes apply. Tocancel you must call SiriusXM at1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXMCustomer Agreement for com-plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.SiriusXM U.S. satellite and dataservices are available only in the48 contiguous states, DC andPuerto Rico (with coverage limita-tions). SiriusXM satellite serviceis also available in Canada; seewww.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-gramming subject to change.Sirius, XM and all related marksand logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.


2214


SiriusXM Radio Mode

Radio Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode Display


(2) Channel Information

Displays the category, channel num-ber, channel name, artist and titleinformation.

(3) Preset

Displays current playing preset number [1] ~ [6].

(4) Preset Display

Displays saved presets.

(5) Info

Displays detailed information aboutthe current broadcast.

Using SiriusXM Satellite RadioYour Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXMso you have access to over 140channels of music, information, andentertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate yourSirius Select subscription, you willneed to contact SiriusXM CustomerCare at 1-800-643-2112. Have your12-digit RID (Radio IdentificationNumber)/ESN (Electronic SerialNumber) ready. To retrieve the RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press the[RADIO] button, and tune to channelzero.Please note that the vehicle will needto be turned on, in Sirius mode, andhave an unobstructed view of the skyin order for the radio to receive theactivation signal.


4 222


Seek

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button toplay the previous/next channel.❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within thecurrent category.

Tune

Turn the TUNE knob to select thedesired channel.

Scan

Press the [SCAN] button to scan allchannels with superior reception for5 seconds each.Once scan is complete, the previous-ly played channel will be restored.During Scan, pressing the [SCAN]button again will cancel the scanoperation and restore the previouslyplayed channel.If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within the cur-rent category.

Searching Categories

Select the category by using the[CAT/FOLDER] button and press theTUNE knob to select.Channels for the selected categoryare played.

✽✽ Troubleshooting1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, theantenna or antenna cable is bro-ken or unplugged. Please consultwith your Kia dealership.

2. No SignalIf this message is displayed, itmeans that the antenna is coveredand that the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio signal is not available.Ensure the antenna is uncoveredand has a clear view of the sky.

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the [Preset] to display thebroadcast information for the chan-nel saved to each button.Press the [1] ~ [6] to play the desiredpreset.While listening to a channel you wantto save as a preset, press and holdone of the [1] ~ [6] to save the currentchannel to the selected preset.


2234


Media Mode

Media Mode Screen

Pressing the [MEDIA] button willchange the operating mode in theorder of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟My Music ➟ BT Audio.If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within[SETUP] button � [Display], thenpressing the [MEDIA] button will dis-play the Media Mode Pop up screen.Turn the TUNE knob to move thefocus. Press the knob to select.The media Mode Pop up screen canbe displayed only when there are twoor more media modes turned on.

Mode Display on the Status Bar

When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,iPod®, USB, or AUX device is con-nected or a CD is inserted, the cor-responding mode icon will be dis-played.

Icon Title

Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyCD

USB(iPod®)

AUX


4 224


MENU: Audio CD

Audio CD Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode


(2) Operation State

From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays thecurrently operating function.

(3) Track Info

Displays information about the cur-rent track.

(4) Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.

(5) Play Time

Displays the current play time.

(6) Info

Shows detailed information aboutthe current track.

(7) Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

(8) Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

(9) List

Moves to the list screen.Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for tracks. Once the desiredtrack is displayed, press the knob toselect and play.


2254


With the Audio CD ModePlaying/Pausing CD Tracks

Once an audio CD is inserted, themode will automatically start andbegin playing.While playing, press the [II] to pauseand press [�] to play.Only genuine audio CDs are sup-ported. Other discs may result inrecognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R,CDs with labels)The artist and title information aredisplayed on the screen if track infor-mation is included within the audioCD.

Changing Tracks

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button tomove to the previous or next track.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton after the track has been playingfor 2 seconds will start the currenttrack from the beginning.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton before the track has been playingfor 1 second will start the previoustrack.

Selecting from the List

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired track.Once you find the desired track,press the TUNE knob to start play-ing.

Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Tracks

While playing, press and hold the[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind orfast-forward the current track.

Scan

Press the [SCAN] button to play thefirst 10 seconds of each file.


4 226


MENU: MP3 CD

MP3 CD Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode


(2) Operation State

From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displaysthe currently operating function.

(3) File Index

Displays the current file number.

(4) File Info

Displays information about the cur-rent file.

(5) Play/Pause


(6) Play Time


(7) Info

Shows detailed information aboutthe current file.When the ‘Folder File’ option is set asthe default display within Displaysetup, the album/artist/file informa-tion are displayed as detailed fileinformation.When the ‘Album Artist Song’ optionis set as the default display, the fold-er name/file name are displayed asdetailed file information.The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such informa-tion is recorded within the MP3 fileID3 tag.


2274


(8) Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in the order ofShuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.• Shuffle Folder: Plays all files within

the current folder in shuffle order.• Shuffle All: Plays all files in shuffle

order.

(9) Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in the order ofRepeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.• Repeat: Repeats the current file.• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files

within the current Folder.

(10) Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.Selecting another feature duringcopying will display a pop-up askingwhether you wish to cancel copying.To cancel, select “Yes”.

(11) List

Moves to the list screen.

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for files. Once the desired fileis displayed, press the knob to selectand play.

With the MP3 CD ModePlaying/Pausing MP3 Files

Once an MP3 disc is inserted, themode will automatically start andbegin playing.While playing, press the [II] to pauseand press [�] to play.If there are numerous files and fold-ers within the disc, reading timecould take more than 10 secondsand the list may not be displayed orsong searches may not operate.Once loading is complete, try again.

Changing Files

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button tomove to the previous or next file.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton after the file has been playing for2 seconds will start the current filefrom the beginning.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton before the file has been playingfor 1 second will start the previousfile.


4 228



Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired file.Once you find the desired file, pressthe TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Files

While playing, press and hold the[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind orfast-forward the current file.

Scan


Searching Folders

Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button toselect and search folders.Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.


2294


MENU: USB

USB Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode


(2) Operation State


(3) File Index

Displays the current file number.

(4) File Info


(5) Play/Pause


(6) Play Time


(7) Info

Displays detailed information for thecurrent file.When the ‘Folder File’ option is set asthe default display within Displaysetup, the album/artist/file informa-tion are displayed as detailed fileinformation.When the ‘Album Artist Song’ optionis set as the default display, the fold-er name/file name are displayed asdetailed file information.The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3 fileID3 tag.


4 230


(8) Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in the order ofShuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.• Shuffle Folder: Plays the files in the

current folder in shuffle order.• Shuffle All: Plays all files in shuffle

order.

(9) Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in the order ofRepeat➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.• Repeat: Repeats the current file.• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files

within the current folder.

(10) Copy

Copies the current file into My Music.Selecting another feature duringcopying will display a pop-up askingwhether you wish to cancel copying.To cancel, select “Yes”.

(11) List

Moves to the list screen.Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for files. Once the desired fileis displayed, press the knob to selectand play.

With the USB ModePlaying/Pausing USB Files

Once a USB is connected, the modewill automatically start and beginplaying a USB file.While playing, press the [II] to pauseand press [�] to play.Loading may require additional timeif there are many files and folderswithin the USB and may result infaulty list display or file search.Normal operations will resume onceloading is complete.The device may not support normaloperation when using a USB memo-ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)USB Memory.


2314


Changing Files



Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired file.Once you find the desired file, pressthe TUNE knob to start playing.



Scan


Searching Folders

Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button toselect and search folders.Once the desired folder is displayed,press the TUNE knob to select.The first file within the selected fold-er will begin playing.


4 232


MENU: iPod®

iPod® Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode


(2) Operation State

From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the cur-rently operating function.

(3) Song Index

Displays the current song/total num-ber of songs.

(4) Song Info

Displays information about the cur-rent song.

(5) Play/Pause


(6) Play Time


(7) Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.Each time the button is pressed, thefeature changes in the order ofShuffle All ➟ Off.• Shuffle All: Plays all songs in shuffle

order.

(8) Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.• Repeat: Repeats the current song

(9) List

Moves to the list screen.Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to select andplay.


2334


With the iPod® ModePlaying/Pausing iPod® Songs

Once an iPod® is connected, themode will automatically start andbegin playing an iPod® song.While playing, press the [II] to pauseand press [�] to play.iPod® products with unsupportedcommunication protocols may notproperly operate in the audio system.

Changing Songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button tomove to the previous or next song.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton after the song has been playingfor 2 seconds will start the currentsong from the beginning.Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨∨] but-ton before the song has been playingfor 1 second will start the previoussong.Slight time differences may existdepending your iPod® product.

Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Songs

While playing, press and hold the[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind orfast-forward the current song.

Searching Categories

Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired category.Once you find the desired category,press the TUNE knob to select andplay.There are eight categories that can besearched, including Playlists, Artists,Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,Audiobooks and Podcasts.

Category Menu

(1) Displays the play screen.(2) Moves to the iPod® root category

screen.(3) Moves to the previous category.If the search mode is accessed whileplaying a song, the most recentlysearched category is displayed.Search steps upon initial connectionmay differ depending on the type ofiPod® device.


4 234


MENU: AUX

AUX Mode Display Controls

Press the [MEDIA] button � Select[AUX].An external device can be connectedto play music.

Connecting an External DeviceExternal audio players (Camcorders,car VCR, etc.) can be played througha dedicated cable.If an external device connector isconnected with the AUX terminal,then AUX mode will automaticallyoperate. Once the connector is dis-connected, the previous mode will berestored.AUX mode can be used only whenan external audio player (camcorder,car VCR, etc.) has been connected.The AUX volume can be controlledseparately from other audio modes.Connecting a connector jack to theAUX terminal without an externaldevice will convert the system toAUX mode, but only output noise.When an external device is not beingused, also remove the connectorjack.When the external device power isconnected to the power jack, playingthe external device may outputnoise. In such cases, disconnect thepower connection before use.Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUXjack upon use.


2354


MENU: My Music

My Music Mode Display Controls

(1) Mode


(2) Operation State


(3) File Index

Displays the current file/total numberof files.

(4) File Info


(5) Play/Pause


(6) Play Time


(7) Info

Displays detailed information for thecurrent file.The title, artist and album info aredisplayed only when such informa-tion is recorded within the MP3 fileID3 tag.

(8) Shuffle

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.

(9) Repeat

Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

(10) Delete

Deletes the current file.

(11) List

Moves to the list screen.Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for files. Once the desired fileis displayed, press the knob to selectand play.


4 236


With the My Music ModePlaying/Pausing My Music Files

While playing, press the [II] to pauseand press [�] to play.If there are no files saved within MyMusic, the [My Music] will be dis-abled.

Changing Files



Turn the TUNE knob left/right tosearch for the desired file.Once you find the desired file, pressthe TUNE knob to start playing.From the List screen, it is possible todelete files you previously saved intoMy Music.

List Menu

(1) Moves to the previous screen.(2) Selects all files.(3) Unselects all selected files.(4) Deletes selected files.After selecting the files you want todelete, press the [Delete] to deletethe selected files.If there is memory available, up to6,000 files can be saved. Identicalfiles cannot be copied more than1,000 times.To check memory information, go to[SETUP] button � [System] �[Memory Information]



Scan



2374


MENU: Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio

Using Bluetooth®Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode

Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio

Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice is connected, the mode willautomatically start.

While playing, press the [�II] topause and press [�II] to play.The play/pause feature may operatedifferently depending on the mobilephone.

Changing Files

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button tomove to the previous or next file.

Setting Connection

If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice has not been connected, pressthe [SETUP] button� [Phone] to dis-play the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology connection screen.It is possible to use the pair phone,connect/disconnect and delete fea-tures from your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone.If music is not yet playing from yourmobile device after converting toBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio mode, pressing the play buttononce may start playing the mode.Check to see that music is playingfrom the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device after convertingto Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio Mode.


4 238


Phone Mode

Making a call using the Steeringwheel controls


(1) Mutes audio volume.(2) Each time this button is pressed,

the mode is changed in the order ofFM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.If the media is not connected or adisc is not inserted, correspon-ding modes will be disabled.

(3) Used to control volume.

(4) When pressed shortly- Radio mode: Searches broad-

cast frequencies saved to pre-sets.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/BT Audio) modes: Changes thetrack, file or chapter.

When pressed and held - Radio mode, automatically

searches broadcast frequenciesand channels.

- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)modes, rewinds or fast forwardthe track or song(file).

- BT Audio mode may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.

(5) When pressed shortly- Starts voice recognition.- When selecting during a voice

prompt, stops the prompt andconverts to voice command wait-ing state.

When pressed and held- Ends voice recognition.

(6) When pressed shortly- When pressed in the phone

screen, displays call historyscreen.

- When pressed in the dial screen,makes a call.

- When pressed in the incomingcall screen, answers the call.

- When pressed during call wait-ing, switches to waiting call (CallWaiting).

When pressed and held - When pressed in the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreewait mode, redials the last call.

- When pressed during a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreecall, switches call back to mobilephone. (Private)

- When pressed while calling onthe mobile phone, switches callback to Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Handsfree. (Operatesonly when Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Handsfree is con-nected)

(7) Ends phone call.


2394


Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

When No Devices have beenPaired

➀ Press the [PHONE] button or the[CALL] button on the steeringwheel controls. The followingscreen is displayed.

➁ Press the [OK] to enter the PairPhone screen.

• Vehicle Name: Name of device asshown when searching from yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice

• Passkey: Passkey used to pair thedevice

➂ From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select yourcar audio system.

❈ SSP: Secure Simple PairingNon SSP supported device:➃ After a few moments, a screen is

displayed where the passkey isentered.Enter the passkey “0000” to pair yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice with the car audio system.

SSP supported device:➃ After a few moments, a screen is

displayed 6 digits passkey.Check the passkey on yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice and confirm.

➄ Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.


4 240


✽✽ NOTICE

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are paired but none are cur-rently connected, pressing the[PHONE] button or the [CALL] but-ton on the steering wheel control dis-plays the following screen. Press the[Pair] to pair a new device or press the[Connect] to connect a previouslypaired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] SetupPress the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone].

Pair Phone

The following steps are the same asthose described in the section “WhenNo Devices have been Paired” on theprevious page.

Paired Phone ListPress the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone] � Select [Pair Phone List].• Connected Phone: Device that is

currently connected.• Paired Phone: Device that is paired

but not connected.

Connecting a Device

From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andpress the [Connect](1).


2414


Disconnecting a Device

From the paired phone list, select thecurrently connected device andpress the [Disconnect](2).

Deleting a Device

From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to delete and pressthe [Delete](3).

✽✽ NOTICE • When deleting the currently con-

nected device, the device will auto-matically be disconnected to proceedwith the deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is deleted, thedevice’s call history and contactsdata will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

Changing Priority

It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology devices with thecar audio system. The “ChangePriority” feature is used to set theconnection priority of paired phones.From the paired phone list, selectthe phone you want to switch to thehighest priority, then press the[Change priority](4) from the Menu.The selected device will be changedto the highest priority.


4 242


Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice connected, press the[PHONE] button to display thePhone menu screen.• Favorites: Up to 20 frequently used

contacts can be saved for easyaccess.

• Call History: Displays the call histo-ry list screen.

• Contacts: Displays the Contactslist screen.

• Dial Number: Displays the dialscreen where numbers can bedialed to make calls.

• Setup: Displays Phone related set-tings.

✽✽ NOTICE • If you press the [Call History] but

there is no call history data, aprompt is displayed which asks todownload call history data.

• If you press the [Contacts] but thereis no contact data stored, a prompt isdisplayed which asks to downloadcontacts data.

• This feature may not be supported insome mobile phones. For more infor-mation on download support, referto your mobile phone user’s manual.

Favorites

• Saved favorite contact: Connectscall upon selection.

• To add favorite: Downloaded con-tacts be saved as favorite.

• Delete All: Deletes all storedfavorite contacts.

✽✽ NOTICE • To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded.• Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contacthas been updated in the phone. Toupdate Favorites, delete the Favoriteand create a new Favorite.


2434


Call History

A list of incoming, outgoing andmissed calls is displayed.Press the [Download] to downloadthe call history.• Call History:

- Displays recent calls (call history).- Connects call upon selection.

• Download: Download Recent CallHistory.

• Call history may not be saved inthe call history list in some mobilephones.

• Calls received with hidden caller IDwill not be saved in the call historylist.

• Calling through the call history isnot possible when there is no callhistory stored or a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone is notconnected.

• Up to 50 received, dialed andmissed calls are stored in CallHistory.

• Time of received/dialed calls andcall time information are not saved.

Contacts

The list of saved phone book entriesis displayed. Press the [Download] todownload the call history.• Contacts List:

- Displays downloaded contactentries.

- Connects call upon selection.• Sort by: Find a contact in alphabet-

ical order.• Download: Download contact entries.


4 244


✽✽ NOTICE• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone can be downloaded into thecar contacts. Contacts that have beendownloaded to the car cannot beedited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managedseparately for each paired Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device (max 5devices x 1,000 contacts each).Previously downloaded data is main-tained even if the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device has been discon-nected. (However, the contacts andcall history saved to the phone will bedeleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contactsduring Bluetooth® streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, theicon will be displayed within the sta-tus bar.

(Continued)

(Continued)• It is not possible to begin download-

ing a contact list when the contactdownload feature has been turnedoff within the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device. In addition, somedevices may require device authori-zation upon attempting to downloadcontacts. If downloading does notnormally occur, check the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology device settingsor the screen state.

• The contacts download feature maynot be supported in some mobilephones. For more information ofsupported Bluetooth® devices andfunction support, refer to yourphone’s user manual.

Calling by Dialing a Number

• Dial Pad: Used to enter phonenumber.

• Call: If a number has been entered,calls the number. If no number hasbeen entered, switches to call his-tory screen.

• End: Deletes the entered phonenumber.

• Delete: Deletes entered numbersone digit at a time.


2454


Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device connect-ed will display the following screen.• Caller: Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller issaved within your contacts.


• Accept: Accepts the incoming call.• Reject: Rejects the incoming call.

✽✽ NOTICE• When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUPmode features are disabled. Only thecall volume will operate.

•The telephone number may not beproperly displayed in some mobilephones.

During a Handsfree Call

• Caller: Displays the other party’sname if the incoming caller issaved within your contacts.


• Call time: Displays the call time.• End: Ends call.• Private: Converts to Private mode.• Out Vol.: Sets call volume as heard

by the other party.• Mute: Turns Mic Mute On/Off.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the mic is muted, the other partywill not be able to hear your voice.


4 246


Voice Recognition Mode

Using Voice Recognition


Shortly press the button on thesteering wheel controls. Say a com-mand.If prompt feedback is in [ON], thenthe system will say “Please say acommand after the beep (BEEP)”.• If prompt feedback is in [ON]

mode, then the system will onlysay “(BEEP)”.

• To change Prompt Feedback[ON]/[OFF], go to [SETUP] button� [System] � [Prompt Feedback].

For proper recognition, say the com-mand after the voice instruction andbeep tone.

✽✽ NOTICEContact List Best Practices1) Do not store single-name entries.

(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim” etc.)Instead, always use full names(including first and last names)for all contacts. (e.g., use “JacobStevenson” instead of “Dad”)

2) Do not use abbreviations. (i.e., use“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”)

3) Do not use acronyms. (i.e., use“County Finance Department”instead of “CFD”)

4) Do not use special characters.(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “aster-isk*”, “ampersand &”)

5) If a name is not recognized fromthe contact list, change it to amore descriptive name. (e.g., use“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “PaJoe”)

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stat-ed � Shortly press the button onthe steering wheel controls.The prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “Beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command� Shortly press the button on thesteering wheel controls.The command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep tone willsound. After the “Beep”, say thevoice command.


2474


Illustration on Using Voice Recognition



Skipping Voice Recognition



Ending Voice Recognition


while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help


Please say a...

Please say the contact name you want to call.

Beep~




(BEEP)


4 248


Voice Command ListCommon Commands

These commands can be used in most operations.(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command FunctionMore Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used

anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be usedwithin the current mode.

Call <Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith”

Call <Name>on Mobile

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Mobile” in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile

Call <Name>in Office

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Office” in Contacts.Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office

Call <Name>at Home

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Home” in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith” at Home

Call <Name>on Other

Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as“Other” in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith” on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands.After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“CallHistory”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute cor-responding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Command FunctionCall History Displays the Call History screen.

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying thiscommand, say the name of a contact saved in theContacts to automatically connect the call.

Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying thiscommand, you can say the number that you wantto call.

Redial Connects the last dialed call number.

Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognitionand Bluetooth® connections

Radio

• When listening to the radio, displays the nextradio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟

SAT3➟FM1)• When listening to a different mode, displays the

most recently played radio screen.• When currently listening to the FM radio, main-

tains the current state.• When listening to a different mode, displays the

most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.


2494


Command FunctionFM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in

FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding fre-quency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding fre-quency.

SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains thecurrent state.

• When listening to a different mode, displays themost recently played SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS (Satellite)1~3

Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS Channel0~223

Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.

CD Plays music on the CD.

USB Plays music on the USB device.

iPod® Plays music on the iPod®.

My Music Plays music saved in My Music.

Command FunctionAUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®

device.

Mute Mutes the sound.

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.


4 250


FM/AM Radio Commands

Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.Satellite Radio Commands

Commands that can be used while listening to SatelliteRadio.Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current presentand plays for 10 seconds each.

Command FunctionChannel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.


2514


Audio CD Commands

Commands available during Audio CD operation.MP3 CD/USB Commands

Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.Command Function

Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current folder.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.



Information Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.

Command FunctionShuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequentialorder.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.


iPod® Commands

Commands available during iPod® operation.My Music Commands

Commands available during My Music operation.Command Function

Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.



Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an addi-tional confirmation process.

Command FunctionShuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current cate-

gory.

Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequentialorder.


2524


Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands

Commands available during Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio streaming from mobile phone opera-tion Command Operation.

Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.


4 253


Setup Mode

Press the [SETUP] button to displaythe Setup screen.You can select and control optionsrelated to [Display], [Sound], [Phone]and [System].

With the Display ButtonPress the [SETUP] button � Select[Display].You can select and control optionsrelated to [Brightness], [Mode Popup] and [Media Display].

Adjusting the Brightness

Use the [Left/Right] to adjust thescreen brightness or set the Brightnesson Automatic, Day or Night mode.Press the [Default] to reset.• Automatic: Adjusts the brightness

automatically.• Day: Always maintains the bright-

ness on high.• Night: Always maintains the bright-

ness on low.

Mode Pop up

This feature is used to display theMode Pop up screen when enteringradio and media modes.When this feature is turned on,pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]button will display the Mode Pop upscreen.

✽✽ NOTICE The media Mode Pop up screen canbe displayed only when two or moremedia modes have been connected.


2544


Media Display

This feature is used to change theinformation displayed within USBand MP3 CD modes.• Folder File: Displays file name and

folder name.• Album Artist Song: Displays album

name/artist name/song name.

With the Sound ButtonPress the [SETUP] button � Select[Sound].You can select and control optionsrelated to [Sound Setting], [SpeedDependent Vol.], [Voice RecognitionVol.] and [Touch Screen Beep].

Sound Setting

Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] toadjust the Fader/Balance settings.Use the [Left/Right] to adjust theBass/Middle/Treble settings.Press the [Default] to reset.


4 255


SDVC (Speed Dependent VolumeControl)

The volume level is controlled auto-matically according to the vehiclespeed. SDVC can be set by selectingfrom On/Off.

Voice Recognition Volume

Use on screen [-], [+] to adjust theVoice Recognition volume.

Touch Screen Beep

This feature is used to turn the touchscreen beep on/off.


2564


With the Phone ButtonPress the [SETUP] button � Select[Phone].You can select and control optionsrelated to [Pair Phone], [PairedPhone List], [Contacts Download],[Outgoing Volume] and [BluetoothSystem Off].

Pairing a New Device

Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices can be paired with the audiosystem.For more information, refer to the“Pairing through Phone Setup” sectionwithin Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

This feature is used to view mobilephones that have been paired withthe audio system. Upon selecting apaired phone, the setup menu is dis-played.For more information, refer to the“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyConnection” section within Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology.(1) Moves to the previous screen.(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone: Connect/

Disconnects currently selectedphone.

(3) Delete: Deletes the currentlyselected phone.

(4) Change priority: Sets currentlyselected phone to highest con-nection priority.


4 257


✽✽ NOTICE - BeforeDownloadingContacts

• Only contacts within connectedphones can be downloaded. Alsocheck to see that your mobilephone supports the download fea-ture.

• To learn more about whether yourmobile phone supports contactdownloads, refer to your mobilephone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connect-ed phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

As the contacts are downloadedfrom the mobile phone, a downloadprogress bar is displayed.• Upon downloading phone con-

tacts, the previous correspondingdata is deleted.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operatewhile contacts are being down-loaded.

Outgoing Volume

Use the [-], [+] to adjust the outgoingvolume level.While on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the [SEEK/TRACK]button.


2584


Turning Bluetooth System Off

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyis turned off, Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology related features will notbe supported within the audio sys-tem.To turn Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology back on, go to [SETUP]button � [Phone] and press “Yes”.

With the System ButtonPress the [SETUP] button � Select[System].You can select and control optionsrelated to [Memory Information],[Prompt Feedback] and [Language].

Memory Information

This feature displays informationrelated to system memory.• Using: Displays capacity currently

in use.• Capacity: Displays total capacity.


4 259


Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to select thedesired prompt feedback option fromON and OFF.• ON: When using voice recognition,

provides detailed guidance prompts.• OFF: When using voice recognition,

omits some guidance prompts.

Language

This feature is used to change thesystem and voice recognition lan-guage.If the language is changed, the sys-tem will restart and apply the select-ed language.


2604


iPod® is a registered trademark ofApple Inc. iPod® mobile digitaldevice sold separately. TheBluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks ownedby Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Kia is underlicense. SiriusXM services requirea subscription sold separately, oras a package, by Sirius XM RadioInc. If you decide to continue serv-ice after your trial, the subscrip-tion plan you choose will automat-ically renew thereafter and youwill be charged according to yourchosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxesapply. To cancel you must callSiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. SeeSiriusXM Customer Agreement forcomplete terms at www.sir-iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satelliteand data services are availableonly in the 48 contiguous states,DC and Puerto Rico (with cover-age limitations). SiriusXM satelliteservice is also available inCanada; see www.siriusxm.ca. Allfees and programming subject tochange.

Sirius, XM and all related marksand logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Android™ is atrademark of Google, Inc.BlackBerry is a registered trade-mark of Research In MotionLimited (RIM). All other marks,channel names and logos are theproperty of their respective own-ers. All rights reserved.


4 261


Declaration of Conformity

FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-dential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.


2624


This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body.This transmitter mustnot be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by theFCC.


4 263



• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6• Illuminated ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-8

• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11• Starting the engine with an ignition key . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

• Starting the engine with a smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Manual Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17


Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23• Dual clutch transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

• Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29


Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)/Forward collision warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

• AEB warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 5-47

• Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in

front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

• To set cruise control speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

• To increase cruise control set speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

• To decrease the cruising speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . 5-58

• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-59

5


• To resume cruising speed at more than

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . 5-60

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-61• DRIVE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-64• LKAS operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

• LKAS malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• LKAS function change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

• Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86• Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-88

• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . 5-89

• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-89

• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

5


5 3


Be sure the exhaust systemdoes not leak.The exhaust system should bechecked whenever the vehicle israised to change the oil or for anyother purpose. If youhear a change in the sound of theexhaust or if you drive over some-thing that strikes the underneath sideof the vehicle, have the exhaust sys-tem checked as soon as possible byan authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Engineexhaust

Do not inhale exhaust fumes orleave your engine running in anenclosed area for a prolongedtime.Exhaust fumes contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless, odorlessgas that can cause uncon-sciousness and death byasphyxiation.

WARNING - Opentrunk/tailgate

Do not drive with the trunk/tail-gate open.Poisonous exhaust gases canenter the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with thetrunk/tailgate open proceed asfollows:1.Close all windows.2.Open side vents.3.Set the air intake control at

"Fresh", the air flow control at"Floor" or "Face" and the fanat the highest speed.

WARNING - Californiaproposition65

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-ety of automobile componentsand parts, including compo-nents found in the interior fur-nishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of compo-nent wear contain or emit chem-icals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.



45

Before entering vehicle• Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights areclean.

• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil,engine coolant, brake fluid, andwasher fluid should be checked on aregular basis, with the exact intervaldepending on the fluid. Furtherdetails are provided in Chapter 7,“Maintenance”.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached.• Buckle your seat belt.• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake andmake sure the brake warning lightgoes off.

For safe operation, be sure you arefamiliar with your vehicle and itsequipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING - Distracteddriving

Focus on the road while driving.The driver's primary responsi-bility is in the safe and legaloperation of the vehicle. Use ofany hand held devices, otherequipment or vehicle systemsthat distract the driver shouldnot be used during vehicleoperation.


5 5


WARNING - Fire riskWhen you intend to park or stopthe vehicle with the engine on,be careful not to depress theaccelerator pedal for a longperiod of time. It may overheatthe engine or exhaust systemand cause a fire.

WARNING - Driving while intoxicated

Do not drive while intoxicated.Drinking and driving is danger-ous. Even a small amount ofalcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgment.Driving while under the influ-ence of drugs is as dangerousas or more dangerous than driv-ing drunk.

WARNING - Loose objectSecurely store items in yourvehicle. When you make a sud-den stop or turn the steeringwheel rapidly, loose objectsmay drop on the floor and itcould interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident.

WARNING - Check surrounding

Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeputting a vehicle into D (Drive)or R (Reverse).



65

Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will illuminate for yourconvenience, provided the ignitionswitch is not in the ON position. Thelight will go off immediately when theignition switch is turned on. It willalso go off after about 30 secondsafter the door is closed.

Ignition switch positionLOCK

The steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. (If equipped)The ignition key can be removed onlyin the LOCK position. When turningthe ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion, push the key inward at the ACCposition and turn the key toward theLOCK position.

The anti-theft steering column lock isnot a substitute for the parking brake.Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift lever isengaged in 1st gear for the manualtransaxle or P (Park) for the auto-matic transaxle, set the parkingbrake fully and shut the engine off.

KEY POSITIONS

OYDDDR3001 OYDDDR3002


5 7


ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked (Ifequipped) and electrical accessoriesare operative.If difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position,turn the key while turning the steer-ing wheel right and left to release thetension.

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This isthe normal running position after theengine is started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON ifthe engine is not running to preventbattery discharge.

STARTTurn the ignition switch to the STARTposition to start the engine. Theengine will crank until you releasethe key; then it returns to the ONposition. The brake warning light canbe checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignitionswitch

Never turn the ignition switch toLOCK or ACC while the vehicleis moving. This would result inloss of directional control andbraking function, which couldcause an accident.

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Never reach for any controlsthrough the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is in motion.The presence of your hand orarm in this area could cause aloss of vehicle control.



85

Illuminated ENGINESTART/STOP button

Whenever the front door is opened,the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwill illuminate for your convenience.The light will go off after about 30seconds after the door is closed.

ENGINE START/STOP buttonpositionOFF

To turn off the engine (START/STOPposition) or vehicle power (ON posi-tion), press the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position. Whenyou press the ENGINESTART/STOP button without the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button willnot change to the OFF position but tothe ACC position.

In an emergency situation while thevehicle is in motion, you are able toturn the engine off and to the ACCposition by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for more than 2seconds or 3 times successivelywithin 3 seconds. If the vehicle is stillmoving, you can restart the enginewithout depressing the brake pedalby pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the N (Neutral) position(if smart key equipped).

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OYDDDR3005

White


5 9


ACC(Accessory)

Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while it is in the OFF positionwithout depressing the brake pedal.The steering wheel unlocks andelectrical accessories are opera-tional.If the ENGINE START/STOP buttonis in the ACC position for more than1 hour, the button is turned off auto-matically to prevent battery dis-charge.

ON

Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while it is in the ACC positionwithout depressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. Do notleave the ENGINE START/STOPbutton in the ON position for a longtime. The battery may discharge,because the engine is not running.

START/RUN

To start the engine, depress thebrake pedal and press the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the P (Park) or the N(Nuetral) position. For your safety,start the engine with the shift lever inthe P (Park) position.If you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button withoutdepressing the brake pedal, theengine will not start and the buttonwill change as follows:OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF

Not illuminated Yellow Green



105

If you leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC or ON posi-tion for a long time, the battery willdischarge.

WARNING - Starting vehicle

Never press the ENGINESTART/STOP button while thevehicle is in motion except in anemergency. This would result inloss of directional control andbraking function, which couldcause an accident.


5 11


Starting the engine with anignition key (if equipped) 1.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift thetransaxle into Neutral. Keep theclutch pedal and brake pedaldepressed while turning the igni-tion switch to the start position.Automatic Transaxle - Place thetransaxle shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3.Turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 seconds),then release the key.

It should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator.4.Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta-tionary.Start driving at moderate enginespeeds. (Steep accelerating anddecelerating should be avoided.)

If the engine stalls while the vehicleis in motion, do not attempt to movethe shift lever to the P (Park) posi-tion. If traffic and road conditions per-mit, you may put the shift lever in theN (Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNING - Properfootwear

Always wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, skiboots, sandals, etc.) may inter-fere with your ability to use thebrake and accelerator pedals.

CAUTION - StarterDo not engage the starter formore than 10 seconds. If theengine stalls or fails to start,wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improperuse of the starter may damageit.



125

Starting the engine with asmart key (if equipped)1.Carry the smart key or leave it

inside the vehicle.2.Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park).4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP

button while depressing the brakepedal.

5.In extremely cold weather (below0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days,let the engine warm up withoutdepressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm,it should be started without depress-ing the accelerator.• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, but is far away from you, theengine may not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is in the ACC position orabove, if any door is opened, thesystem checks for the smart key. Ifthe smart key is not in the vehi-cle,the “ ” or “ ” indicator willblink or the warning "Key not invehicle" will illuminate on the LCDdisplay. And if all doors are closed,the chime will sound for 5 seconds.The indicator or warning will turnoff while the vehicle is moving.Always have the smart key withyou.

The engine will start only when thesmart key is in the vehicle.

KEY

OUT

WARNING - Unintendedvehicle movement

Never leave the smart key in thevehicle with children or vehicleoccupants who are unfamiliarwith the vehicle operation.Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button while the smartkey is in the vehicle may resultin unintended engine activationand/or unintended vehiclemovement.


5 13


• If the battery is weak or the smartkey does not work correctly, youcan start the engine by pressingthe engine start/stop button withthe smart key.

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,you can not start the engine nor-mally. Replace the fuse with a newone. If it is not possible, you canstart the engine by pressing theENGINE START/STOP button for10 seconds while it is in the ACCposition. The engine can start with-out depressing the brake pedal.But for your safety always depressthe brake pedal before starting theengine.

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 sec-onds except when the stop lamp fuseis blown.

OYDDDR3006



145

Manual transaxle operationThe manual transaxle has 6 forwardgears.This shift pattern is imprinted on theshift knob. The transaxle is fully syn-chronized in all forward gears soshifting to either a higher or a lowergear is easily accomplished.Depress the clutch pedal down fullywhile shifting, then release it slowly.If your vehicle is equipped with anignition lock switch, the engine willnot start when starting the enginewithout depressing the clutch pedal.The shift lever must be returned tothe neutral position before shiftinginto R (Reverse). The button (1)located below the shift knob must bepulled upward while moving the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) position.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into R(Reverse).Never operate the engine with thetachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION - DownshiftingDo not downshift more than 2gears or downshift the gearwhen the engine is running athigh speed (5,000 RPM or high-er). Such a downshifting maydamage the engine, clutch andthe transaxle.

OYDDDR2101

The shift lever can be moved without-pressing the button.

The button (1) should be pressed whenmoving the shift lever into reverse.


5 15


• During cold weather, shifting maybe difficult until the transaxle lubri-cant is warmed up. This is normaland not harmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stopand it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse), leave the shift lever atneutral position and release theclutch. Depress the clutch pedaland then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutchThe clutch should be depressed allthe way to the floor before shifting,then released slowly. The clutchpedal should always be fullyreleased while driving. Do not restyour foot on the clutch pedal whiledriving. This can cause unnecessarywear. Do not partially engage theclutch to hold the vehicle on anincline. This causes unnecessarywear. Use the foot brake or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle on anincline. Do not operate the clutchpedal rapidly and repeatedly.

DownshiftingWhen you must slow down in heavytraffic or while driving up steep hills,downshift before the engine starts tolabor. Downshifting reduces thechance of stalling and gives betteracceleration when you need toincrease your speed again. When thevehicle is traveling down steep hills,downshifting helps maintain safespeed and prolongs brake life.

CAUTION - Prematurewear

Do not use the shift lever as ahandrest during driving, as thiscan result in premature wear ofthe transaxle shift forks.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

Before leaving the driver's seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (Park) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Do not usethe P position in place of theparking brake.Always make sure the shiftlever is latched in the P positionand set the parking brake fully.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement can occur if theseprecautions are not followed.



165

Good driving practices• Never take the vehicle out of gear

and coast down a hill. This isextremely hazardous. Always leavethe vehicle in gear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you aredriving down a long hill, shift to alower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow downthe vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to alower gear. This will help avoidover-revving the engine, which cancause damage.

• Slow down when you encountercross winds. This gives you muchbetter control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shiftinto R (Reverse).The transaxle canbe damaged if you do not.

• Exercise extreme caution whendriving on a slippery surface. Beespecially careful when braking,accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt changein vehicle speed can cause thedrive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle to go out of control.

• Always buckle-up! In a collision, anunbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injuredor killed than a properly beltedoccupant.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING - Vehicle handling

Avoid high speeds when cor-nering or turning. High speedcornering and turning increas-es the risk of vehicle rolloverdue to loss of vehicle control.Rollover accidents are extreme-ly violent and unpredictable.


5 17


Automatic transaxle operationThe automatic transaxle has 6 for-ward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selectedautomatically, depending on theposition of the shift lever.

✽✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehicle,if the battery has been disconnected,may be somewhat abrupt. This is anormal condition, and the shiftingsequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the TCM(Transaxle Control Module) orPCM (Powertrain Control Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OYD056058L

+ (UP)

Button

Shift lever

- (DOWN)

To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the button when shifting.



185

For smooth operation, depress thebrake pedal when shifting from N(Neutral) to a forward or reversegear.

When stopped on an upgrade, do nothold the vehicle with engine power.Use the service brake or the parkingbrake.

Transaxle rangesThe indicator light in the instrumentcluster displays the shift lever posi-tion when the ignition switch is in theON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into P (Park). Thisposition locks the transaxle and pre-vents the front wheels from rotating.

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-cle is in motion will cause the drivewheels to lock which will cause youto lose control of the vehicle.

CAUTION - TransaxleTo avoid damage to yourtransaxle, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.The transaxle may bedamaged if you shift into P(Park) while the vehicle is inmotion.

WARNING - AutomaticTransaxle

Before leaving the driver's seat,always make sure the shift leveris engaged in P (Park), set theparking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movement mayoccur if these precautions arenot followed.


5 19


R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are notengaged. The vehicle will roll freelyeven on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or service brakesare applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward drivingposition. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a 6-gearsequence, providing the best fueleconomy and power.

For extra power when passing anoth-er vehicle or climbing grades,depress the accelerator fully, atwhich time the transaxle will auto-matically downshift to the next lowergear. Manual mode

Whether the vehicle is stopped or inmotion, manual mode is selected bypushing the shift lever from the D(Drive) position into the manual gate.To return to D (Drive) range opera-tion, push the shift lever back into themain gate.

In manual mode, moving the shiftlever backwards and forwards willallow you to make gearshifts rapidly.In contrast to a manual transaxle, themanual mode allows gearshifts withthe accelerator pedal depressed.

CAUTION - ShiftingAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R(Reverse) while the vehicle is inmotion, except when “Rockingthe Vehicle” explained in thissection.

OYD056057

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

++++ ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))

manualmode



205

Up (+) : Push the lever forwardonce to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwardsonce to shift down onegear.

• In manual mode, the driver mustexecute upshifts in accordancewith road conditions, taking care tokeep the engine speed below thered zone.

• In manual mode, only the 6 forwardgears can be selected. To reverseor park the vehicle, move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)position as required.

• In manual mode, downshifts aremade automatically when the vehi-cle slows down. When the vehiclestops, 1st gear is automaticallyselected.

• In manual mode, when the enginerpm approaches the red zone shiftpoints are varied to upshift auto-matically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety,the system may not execute cer-tain gearshifts when the shift leveris operated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth drivingon a slippery road. Push the shiftlever to the -(down) side to shiftback to the 1st gear.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is available whenthe shift lever is in the D position orthe sport mode.

OYDDDR2111


5 21


With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter can operate whenthe vehicle speed is more than 6.2mph.Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear and thesystem changes from automaticmode to manual mode.If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2mph, if you depress the acceleratorpedal for more than 7 seconds or ifyou shift the shift lever from D tosports mode and shift it from sportsmode to D again, the system changefrom manual mode to automaticmode.

With the shift lever in the sports mode

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear.

If you pull the [+] and [-] paddleshifters at the same time, you can'tshift the gear.

Shift lock system (if equipped)For your safety, the automatictransaxle has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transaxleout of P (Park) unless the brakepedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle from P (Park)into R (Reverse):1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.2.Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.3.Move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with theshift lever in the P (Park) position, achattering noise near the shift levermay be heard. This is a normal con-dition.

Shift-lock override(with smart key system)

If the shift lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) position into the R(Reverse) position with the brakepedal depressed, continue depress-ing the brake, then do the following:1. Carefully remove the cap covering

the shift-lock access hole (1).2. Insert screwdriver into the access

hold and press down on thescrewdriver.

3. Move the shift lever.4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized Kia dealer immediately.

WARNING - Shifting frompark

Always fully depress the brakepedal before and while shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehicle.

OYD056060L



225

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

Good driving practices• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any otherposition with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P(Park) when the vehicle is inmotion.

• Slow down before shifting to alower gear. Otherwise, the lowergear may not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Donot depend on placing thetransaxle in P (Park) to keep thevehicle from moving.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing theaccelerator pedal.

Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to D(Drive). Select the appropriate geardepending on load weight and steep-ness of the grade, and release theparking brake. Depress the accelera-tor gradually while releasing theservice brakes.


5 23


Dual clutch transmission oper-ation The dual clutch transmission hasseven forward speeds and onereverse speed.The individual speeds are selectedautomatically in the D (Drive) posi-tion.

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (IF EQUIPPED)

OYD056058L

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

---- ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the lock release button when shifting.

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.



245

• The Dual Clutch Transmissiongives the driving feel of a manualtransmission, yet provides theease of a fully automatic transmis-sion. Unlike a traditional automatictransmission, the gear shifting canbe felt (and heard) on the dualclutch transmission- Think of it as an automatically

shifting manual transmission.- Shift into Drive range and get fully

automatic shifting, similar to a con-ventional automatic transmission.

• Dual clutch transmission adoptsdry-type dual clutch, which is dif-ferent from the torque converter ofan automatic transmission, andshows better acceleration perform-ance during driving. But, initiallaunch from a stop might be littlebit slower than with an AutomaticTransmission.

• The dry-type clutch transfers torqueand provides a direct driving feelingwhich may feel different from a con-ventional automatic transmissionwith a torque converter.This may bemore noticeable when starting froma stop or low vehicle speed.

• When rapidly accelerating at lowvehicle speed, engine could rev athigher rpm than with a comparableAutomatic Transmission.

• For smooth launch uphill, pressdown the accelerator pedalsmoothly depending on the currentconditions.

• If you release your foot from theaccelerator pedal at a low vehiclespeed, you may feel strong enginebrake, which is similar to a manualtransmission.

• When driving downhill, you mayuse Sports Mode and press thepaddle shifters to downshift to alower gear in order to control yourspeed without using the brakepedal excessively.

• When you turn the engine on andoff, you may hear clicking soundsas the system goes through a selftest. This is a normal sound for theDual Clutch Transmission.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death:• ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle forpeople, especially children,before shifting a vehicle intoD (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’sseat, always make sure theshift lever is in the P (Park)position, then set the parkingbrake, and place the ignitionswitch in the LOCK/OFF posi-tion. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occurif these precautions are notfollowed.

• Do not use engine braking(shifting from a high gear tolower gear) rapidly on slip-pery roads. The vehicle mayslip causing an accident.


5 25


• To hold the vehicle on a hill use thefoot brake or the parking brake. Ifthe vehicle is held by applying theaccelerator pedal on a hill theclutch and transmission will beoverheated resulting in damage.At this time, a warning message(“Steep grade! Press brake pedal”)will appear on the LCD display andyou may feel a vibration.

• If the clutch becomes overheatedby excessive use of the clutch tohold on a hill, you may notice ashuddering feeling and a blinkingdisplay on the instrument cluster.When this occurs, the clutch is dis-abled until the clutch cools to nor-mal temperatures. If this occurs,pull over to a safe location, shiftinto P (Park) and apply the footbrake with the engine for a certaintime until the warning on the LCDscreen disappears.

• If the LCD warning is active, thefoot brake must be applied.

• Ignoring the warnings can lead todamage to the transmission.

• If the display continues to blink, foryour safety, we recommend thatyou contact an authorized Kiadealer.

• Under certain conditions such asrepeated launch on steep grades,the clutch in the transmission couldoverheat.When the clutch is overheated, thesafe protection mode engages. Ifthe safe protection mode engages,the gear position indicator on thecluster blinks with a chime sound.At this time, a warning message(“Trans Hot! Park with engine on”),(“Trans Cooling. Remain parked for00 min.”), (“Trans cooled. Resumedriving”) will appear on the LCDdisplay and driving may not besmooth.If you ignore this warning, the driv-ing condition may become worse.To return the normal driving condi-tion, stop the vehicle and apply thefoot brake for a few minutes beforedriving off.

• Gear shifts may be more notice-able than a conventional automatictransmission. This is a normalcharacteristic of this type of dualclutch transmission.

• An overheated Dual clutch trans-mission may change the gear shift-ing characteristics, and will illumi-nate a warning message on theLCD display if the kickdown mech-anism is excessively used.

• Do not use the kickdown mecha-nism to return to normal driving.Also, temporarily stop the vehicleat a safe location, when the warn-ing message illuminates on theLCD display.

• During the first 1,000miles(1,500km), you may feel that thevehicle may not be smooth whenaccelerating at low speed. Duringthis break-in period, the shift quali-ty and performance of your newvehicle is continuously optimized.



265

• Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into D (Drive) or R(Reverse).

• Do not put the shift lever in N(Neutral) while driving.

The indicator in the instrument clus-ter displays the shift lever positionwhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into P (Park).To shift from P (Park), you mustdepress firmly on the brake pedaland make sure your foot is off theaccelerator pedal.The shift lever must be in P (Park)before turning the engine off.

CAUTION- Holding the Vehicle Using

Accelerator PedalDo not attempt to hold yourvehicle on a hill by applying theaccelerator pedal. This cancause your clutch and transmis-sion to be damaged as a resultof overheating.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion maycause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,always make sure the shiftlever is in P (Park), apply theparking brake, and turn theengine off.

• Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.


5 27


R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are notengaged.Use N (Neutral) if you need to restarta stalled engine, or if it is necessaryto stop with the engine ON. Shift intoP (Park) if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason.Always depress the brake pedalwhen you are shifting from N(Neutral) to another gear.

WARNINGDo not shift into gear unlessyour foot is firmly on the brakepedal. Shifting into gear whenthe engine is running at highspeed can cause the vehicle tomove very rapidly. You couldlose control of the vehicle andhit people or objects.

WARNINGDo not drive with the shift leverin N (Neutral).The engine brake will not workand may lead to an accident.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransmission if you shift into R(Reverse) while the vehicle is inmotion.



285

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.The transmission will automaticallyshift through a seven-gearsequence, providing the best fueleconomy and power.For extra power when passing anoth-er vehicle or driving uphill depressthe accelerator pedal further untilyou feel the transmission downshiftto a lower gear.

Manual mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary orin motion, manual mode is selectedby pushing the shift lever from the D(Drive) position into the manual gate.To return to D (Drive) range opera-tion, push the shift lever back into themain gate.In manual mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow youto select the desired range of gears forthe current driving conditions.+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICE• Only the seven forward gears can

be selected. To reverse or park thevehicle, move the shift lever to theR (Reverse) or P (Park) position asrequired.

• Downshifts are made automatical-ly when the vehicle slows down.When the vehicle stops, 1st gear isautomatically selected.

• When the engine rpm approachesthe red zone the transmission willupshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to +(Up) or - (Down) position, the trans-mission may not make the request-ed gear change if the next gear isoutside of the allowable engine rpmrange. The driver must executeupshifts in accordance with roadconditions, taking care to keep theengine rpms below the red zone.

OYD056057

manualmode

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

---- ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))


5 29


Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is available whenthe shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-tion or the manual mode.

With the shift lever in the D posi-tion The paddle shifter will operate whenthe vehicle speed is more than10km/h.Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear and thesystem changes from automaticmode to manual mode.When the vehicle speed is lowerthan 10km/h, if you depress theaccelerator pedal for more than 5seconds or if you shift the shift leverfrom D (Drive) to manual mode andshift it from manual mode to D(Drive) again, the system changesfrom manual mode to automaticmode.

With the shift lever in the manualmodePull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you pull the [+] and [-] paddleshifters at the same time, you cannotshift the gear.

OYDDDR2111



305

Shift lock system For your safety, the Dual clutch trans-mission has a shift lock system whichprevents shifting the transaxle from P(Park) into R (Reverse) unless thebrake pedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle from P (Park)into R (Reverse):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.3. Move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chat-tering noise & vibration near the shiftlever may be heard. This is a normalcondition.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) position into R(Reverse) position with the brakepedal depressed, continue depress-ing the brake, then do the following:

1. Place the ignition switch in theLOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-

ering the shift-lock release accesshole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-driver) into the access hole andpress down on the tool.

5. Move the shift lever.6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock

override access hole then installthe cap.

7. We recommend that the systembe inspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

WARNINGAlways fully depress the brakepedal before and while shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent movement of the vehiclewhich could injure persons inor around the car.

OYD056060L


5 31


Good driving practices• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any otherposition with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completelystopped before you attempt to shiftinto R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leavethe car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you aredriving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When youdo this, engine braking will helpslow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to alower gear. Otherwise, the lowergear may not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Donot depend on placing thetransaxle in P (Park) to keep thecar from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution whendriving on a slippery surface. Beespecially careful when braking,accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt changein vehicle speed can cause thedrive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing theaccelerator pedal.

✽✽ NOTICE - KickdownMechanism

Use the kickdown mechanism formaximum acceleration. Depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pres-sure point. The dual clutch trans-mission will shift to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to D(Drive). Select the appropriate geardepending on load weight and steep-ness of the grade, and release theparking brake. Depress the accelera-tor gradually while releasing theservice brakes.



325

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assistedbrakes that adjust automaticallythrough normal usage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of astalled engine or some other reason,you can still stop your vehicle byapplying greater force to the brakepedal than you normally would. Thestopping distance, however, will belonger.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partiallydepleted each time the brake pedalis applied. Do not pump the brakepedal when the power assist hasbeen interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only whennecessary to maintain steering con-trol on slippery surfaces.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’sability to safely slow down; the vehi-cle may also pull to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Applying thebrakes lightly will indicate whetherthey have been affected in this way.

To dry the brakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe forwardspeed until brake performancereturns to normal.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate whilethe vehicle is in motion, you canmake an emergency stop with theparking brake. The stopping dis-tance, however, will be much greaterthan normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Parking brakeAvoid applying the parkingbrake to stop the vehicle while itis moving except in an emer-gency situation. Applying theparking brake while the vehicleis moving at normal speeds cancause a sudden loss of controlof the vehicle. If you must usethe parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution inapplying the brake.

WARNING - Steep hillbraking

Avoid continuous application ofthe brakes when descending along or steep hill by shifting to alower gear. Continuous brakeapplication will cause thebrakes to overheat and couldresult in a temporary loss ofbraking performance.

CAUTION - Brake pedalDo not drive with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormally high braketemperatures which can causeexcessive brake lining and padwear.


5 33


Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn andnew pads are required, you will heara high-pitched warning sound fromyour front brakes or rear brakes (ifequipped). You may hear this soundcome and go or it may occur when-ever you depress the brake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

Always replace the front or rearbrake pads as pairs.

Parking brake Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and then withoutpressing the release button in, pullthe parking brake lever up as far aspossible. In addition it is recommend-ed that when parking the vehicle ona gradient, the shift lever should bepositioned in the appropriate lowgear for manual transaxle vehicles orin the P (Park) position for automatictransaxle vehicles.

CAUTION - Replace brakepads

Do not continue to drive withworn brake pads. Continuing todrive with worn brake pads candamage the braking system andresult in costly brake repairs.

WARNING - Brake wearDo not ignore high pitched wearsounds from your brakes. If youignore this audible warning, youwill eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

OYD056037L



345

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and pull up theparking brake lever slightly.Secondly, press the release button(1) and lower the parking brake lever(2) while holding the button.

CAUTION - Parking brakeDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessivebrake pad (or lining) and brakerotor wear.

OYD056038L

WARNING - Parking brakeuse

• Never allow a passenger totouch the parking brake. If theparking brake is releasedunintentionally, serious injurymay occur.

• All vehicles should alwayshave the parking brake fullyengaged when parking toavoid inadvertent movementof the vehicle which can injureoccupants or pedestrians.


5 35


Check the brake warning light byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). This light will illumi-nate when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in theSTART or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running, theremay be a malfunction in the brakesystem. Immediate attention is nec-essary.

If at all possible, stop driving thevehicle immediately. If that is not pos-sible, use extreme caution whileoperating the vehicle and only con-tinue to drive the vehicle until youcan reach a safe location or repairshop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or dangerousdriving maneuvers. Even thoughvehicle control is improved duringemergency braking, always maintaina safe distance between you andobjects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced duringextreme road conditions.The vehicle should be driven atreduced speeds in the following cir-cumstances:• When driving on rough, gravel or

snow-covered roads• When driving with tire chains

installed• When driving on roads where the

road surface is pitted or has differ-ent surface heights.

Driving in these conditions increasesthe stopping distance for your vehi-cle.

W-75



365

The ABS continuously senses thespeed of the wheels. If the wheelsare going to lock, the ABS systemrepeatedly modulates the hydraulicbrake pressure to the wheels.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum ben-efit from your ABS in an emergencysituation, do not attempt to modulateyour brake pressure and do not try topump your brakes. Press your brakepedal as hard as possible or as hardas the situation allows the ABS tocontrol the force being delivered tothe brakes.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehi-cle begins to move after the engine isstarted. These conditions are normaland indicate that the anti-lock brakesystem is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-tem, your vehicle still requires suf-ficient stopping distance. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannotprevent accidents resulting fromexcessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brakesystem may result in a longer stop-ping distance than for vehiclesequipped with a conventionalbrake system.

The ABS warning light will stay on forapproximately 3 seconds after theignition switch is ON. During thattime, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off ifeverything is normal. If the light stayson, you may have a problem withyour ABS but your regular brakes willwork normally. Contact an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible.

W-78


5 37


• When you drive on a road withpoor traction, such as an icy road,and operated your brakes continu-ously, the ABS will be active con-tinuously and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull your vehi-cle over to a safe place and stopthe engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then your ABSis normal. Otherwise, you mayhave a problem with the ABS.Contact an authorized Kia dealeras soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, theengine may not run as smoothly andthe ABS warning light may turn onat the same time. This happensbecause of the low battery voltage. Itdoes not mean your ABS has mal-functioned.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic stability control(ESC)

The Electronic Stability control(ESC) system is designed to stabi-lize the vehicle during corneringmaneuvers. ESC checks where youare steering and where the vehicle isactually going. ESC applies thebrakes on individual wheels andintervenes with the engine manage-ment system to stabilize the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) willnot prevent accidents. Excessivespeed in turns, abrupt maneuversand hydroplaning on wet surfacescan still result in serious accidents.Only a safe and attentive driver canprevent accidents by avoidingmaneuvers that cause the vehicle tolose traction. Even with ESCinstalled, always follow all the normalprecautions for driving - includingdriving at safe speeds for the condi-tions.The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is an electronic sys-tem designed to help the driver main-tain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute forsafe driving practices. Factors includ-ing speed, road conditions and driv-er steering input can all affectwhether ESC will be effective in pre-venting a loss of control. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

OYDDDR2107



385

When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ESC is active.

✽✽ NOTICEFor maximum protection, alwayswear your seat belt. No system, nomatter how advanced, can compen-sate for all driver error and/or driv-ing conditions. Always drive respon-sibly.

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFFindicator lights illuminatefor approximately 3 sec-onds, then ESC is turnedon.

• Press the ESC OFF but-ton for at least half a sec-ond after turning the igni-tion ON to turn ESC off.(ESC OFF indicator willilluminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESCOFF button (ESC OFFindicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tick-ing sound. This is the ESCperforming an automaticsystem self-check anddoes not indicate a prob-lem.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-tion, ESC indicator lightblinks.• When the Electronic

Stability Control is operat-ing properly, you can feel aslight pulsation in the vehi-cle. This is only the effectof brake control and indi-cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of themud or slippery road,pressing the acceleratorpedal may not cause theengine rpm (revolutionsper minute) to increase.

-


5 39


ESC operation offESC OFF state

This car has 2 kinds of ESCoff states.If the engine stops whenESC is off, ESC remains off.Upon restarting the engine,the ESC will automaticallyturn on again.

• ESC off state 1To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESCOFF indicator light (ESCOFF ) illuminates). At thisstate, the engine controlfunction does not operate. Itmeans the traction controlfunction does not operate.Brake control function onlyoperates.

• ESC off state 2To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF ) for more than 3seconds. ESC OFF indicatorlight (ESC OFF ) illuminatesand ESC OFF warning chimewill sound. At this state, theengine control function andbrake control function do notoperate. It means the car sta-bility control function does notoperate any more.

Indicator light

When the ignition switch is turnedON, the indicator light illuminates,then goes off if ESC system is oper-ating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks when-ever ESC is operating.The ESC indicator light blinks when-ever ESC is operating or illuminateswhen ESC fails to operate.The ESC OFF indicator light comeson when the ESC is turned off withthe button.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light



405

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the ESC system tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same size asyour original tires.

ESC OFF usageWhen driving

• It’s a good idea to keep the ESCturned on for daily driving whenev-er possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

Never press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating (ESC indica-tor light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may slip out ofcontrol.

WARNING - OperatingESC

Never press the ESC OFF but-ton while ESC is operating.If the ESC is turned off whileESC is operating, the vehiclemay go out of control.

WARNING - Electronic sta-bility control

Drive carefully even thoughyour vehicle has ElectronicStability Control. It can onlyassist you in maintaining con-trol under certain circum-stances.


5 41


Hill-start assist control (HAC)Hill start Assist Control is a comfortfunction. The main intent is to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling back-wards while driving uphill on aninclined surface. HAC holds the brak-ing pressure builtup by driver duringstopping procedure for 2 secondsafter releasing brake pedal.During the pressure-hold period, thedriver has enough time to press theaccelerator pedal to drive off.The braking pressure is reduced assoon as the system detects the dri-ver’s intention to drive off.

• The HAC does not operate whenthe transaxle shift lever is in the P(Park) or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even thoughthe ESP is off but it does not acti-vate when the ESP has malfunc-tioned.

Vehicle stability management(VSM)This system provides furtherenhancements to vehicle stabilityand steering responses when a vehi-cle is driving on a slippery road or avehicle detected changes in coeffi-cient of friction between right wheelsand left wheels when braking.

VSM operationWhen the VSM is in operation, ESCindicator light ( ) blinks.When the vehicle stability manage-ment is operating properly, you canfeel a slight pulsation in the vehicleand/or abnormal steering responses(EPS). This is only the effect of brakeand EPS control and indicates noth-ing unusual.

WARNING - MaintainingBrake Pressure on Incline

HAC does not replace the needto apply brakes while stopped onan incline. While stopped, makesure you maintain brake pres-sure sufficient to prevent yourvehicle from rolling backwardand causing an accident. Don’trelease the brake pedal until youare ready to accelerate forward.



425

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank roads such as gra-dient or incline

• Driving rearward• ESC OFF indicator light ( )

remains on the instrumentcluster

• EPS indicator light remains on theinstrument cluster

VSM operation offIf you press the ESC OFF button toturn off the ESC, the VSM will alsocancel and the ESC OFF indicatorlight ( ) illuminates.To turn on the VSM, press the buttonagain. The ESC OFF indicator lightgoes out.

Malfunction indicatorThe VSM can be deactivated even ifyou don’t cancel the VSM operationby pressing the ESC OFF button. Itindicates that a malfunction hasbeen detected somewhere in theElectric Power Steering system orVSM system. If the ESC indicatorlight ( ) or EPS warning light

remains on, take your vehi-cle to an authorized Kia dealer andhave the system checked.• The VSM is designed to function

above approximately 9 mph (15km/h) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to functionabove approximately 18 mph (30km/h) when a vehicle is braking ona split-mu road. The split-mu roadis made of surfaces which have dif-ferent friction forces.

• The Vehicle Stability Managementsystem is not a substitute for safedriving practices but a supplemen-tary function only. It is the respon-sibility of the driver to always checkthe speed and the distance to thevehicle ahead. Always hold thesteering wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to activateaccording to the driver’s intention,even with installed VSM. Alwaysfollow all the normal precautionsfor driving at safe speeds for theconditions – including driving ininclement weather and on a slip-pery road.


5 43


Good braking practices• Check to be sure the parking brake

is not engaged and that the park-ing brake indicator light is outbefore driving away.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the vehicle is washed. Wetbrakes can be dangerous! Yourvehicle will not stop as quickly if thebrakes are wet. Wet brakes maycause the vehicle to pull to oneside.To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking actionreturns to normal, taking care tokeep the vehicle under control atall times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soonas it is safe to do so and call anauthorized Kia dealer for assis-tance.

• Don't coast down hills with thevehicle out of gear.This is extreme-ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle ingear at all times, use the brakes toslow down, then shift to a lowergear so that engine braking willhelp you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.Resting your foot on the brakepedal while driving can be danger-ous because the brakes mightoverheat and lose their effective-ness. It also increases the wear ofthe brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-ing, apply the brakes gently andkeep the vehicle pointed straightahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for itto be safe to do so, pull off the roadand stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, don't let yourvehicle creep forward. To avoidcreeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when thevehicle is stopped.

WARNING - Tire/Wheelsize

When replacing tires andwheels, make sure they are thesame size as the original tiresand wheels installed. Drivingwith varying tire or wheel sizesmay affect the vehicle's han-dling.



445

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brakeand place the shift lever in P (auto-matic transaxle) or in first orreverse gear (manual transaxle). Ifyour vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels into the curb tohelp keep the vehicle from rolling. Ifyour vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb to help keep the vehicle fromrolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions tokeep the vehicle from rolling, blockthe wheels.

• Under some conditions your park-ing brake can freeze in theengaged position. This is most like-ly to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or ifthe brakes are wet. If there is a riskthat the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while youput the shift lever in P (automatictransaxle) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and block therear wheels so the vehicle cannotroll. Then release the parkingbrake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on theupgrade with the acceleratorpedal.This can cause the transaxleto overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.


5 45


The AEB system is to reduce or toavoid accident risk. It recognizes thedistance from the vehicle ahead orthe pedestrian through the sensors(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec-essary, warns the driver of accidentrisk with the warning message or thewarning alarms.

✽✽ NOTICETake the following precautions whenusing the Autonomous EmergencyBraking (AEB):• This system is only a supplemental

system and it is not intended to,nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of thedriver. The sensing range andobjects detectable by the sensorsare limited. Pay attention to theroad conditions at all times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-dance with the road conditions orwhile cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to preventunexpected and sudden situationsfrom occurring. AEB does not stopthe vehicle completely and doesnot avoid collisions.

System setting and activationSystem settingThe driver can activate the AEB byplacing the ignition switch to the ONposition and by selecting 'UserSettings', 'Driving Assist', and'Autonomous Braking System'. TheAEB deactivates, when the drivercancels the system setting.

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)/ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)(IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) Limitations The AEB system is a supple-mental system and is not a sub-stitute for safe driving prac-tices. It is the responsibility ofthe driver to always check thespeed and distance to the vehi-cle ahead to ensure it is safetyto use the AEB system.



465

The warning light illumi-nates on the LCD display,when you cancel the AEBsystem. The driver can

monitor the AEB ON/OFF status onthe LCD display. When the warninglight remains ON with the AEB acti-vated, we recommend you to havethe system checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

The driver can select the initial warn-ing activation time in the UserSettings in the instrument clusterLCD display. The options for the ini-tial Forward Collision Warninginclude the following:

• EARLY - When this condition isselected, the initialForward Collision Warningis activated earlier thannormal. This setting maxi-mizes the amount of dis-tance between the vehicleor pedestrian ahead beforethe initial warning occurs.

• NORMAL - When this condition isselected, the initialForward CollisionWarning is activated nor-mally. This setting allowsfor a nominal amount ofdistance between thevehicle or pedestrianahead before the initialwarning occurs.

• LATE - When this condition isselected, the initial ForwardCollision Warning is activat-ed later than normal. Thissetting reduces the amountof distance between thevehicle or pedestrian aheadbefore the initial warningoccurs.

Prerequisite for activationThe AEB will activate activated whenthe AEB is selected on the LCD dis-play, and when the following prereq-uisites are satisfied:- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is activated.- The driving speed is over 6 mph.

(The AEB only works within a cer-tain range of vehicle speeds)

- When the AEB recognizes a vehi-cle or the pedestrian in front. (TheAEB may not recognize everyobstacle or provide warnings andbraking in every situation, so donot rely on the AEB to stop thevehicle in instances where the driv-er sees an obstacle and has theability to apply the brakes)


5 47


• The AEB automatically activateswhen you turn the vehicle on.The driver can deactivate the AEBby canceling the in the system set-ting on the LCD display.

• The AEB automatically deactivateswhen canceling the ESC.When theESC is canceled, the AEB cannotbe activated on the LCD display.

AEB warning message andsystem controlThe AEB produces warning mes-sages, warning alarms, and emer-gency braking based on the level ofrisk of a frontal collision, such aswhen a vehicle ahead suddenlybrakes, when there is no following dis-tance from the vehicle in front, orwhen it detects a collision with apedestrian is imminent.

Forward Warning (1st warning)

The warning message appears onthe LCD display with the warningalarms.

WARNING Set or cancel AEB with control-ling switches on steering wheelafter stopping the vehicle in thesafe place for your safety.

OYDM056090



485

Collision Warning (2nd warning)

• The warning message appears onthe LCD display with the warningalarms.

• The AEB applies the brakes withincertain limit to reduce the impactfrom a collision.

Emergency braking (3rd warning)

• The warning message appears onthe LCD display with the warningalarms.

• The AEB controls the brakes with-in certain limit to release shockfrom the collision.The AEB controls the maximumbrakes just before the collision.

Brake operation• In an urgent situation, the braking

system enters into the ready statusfor prompt reaction against the dri-ver’s depressing the brake pedal.

• The AEB provides additional brak-ing power for optimum braking per-formance, when the driverdepresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-ly deactivated, when the driversharply depresses the brake pedal,or when the driver abruptly turnsthe steering wheel.

• The braking control is automatical-ly canceled, when risk factors dis-appear.

The driver should always exercisecaution when operating the vehicle,even though there is no warningmessage or warning alarm.

OYDM056091 OYDM056092


5 49


✽✽ NOTICEThe AEB operates in accordancewith the risk levels, such as the dis-tance from the vehicle/passer-by infront, the speed of the vehicle/pass-er-by in front, and the driver's vehi-cle operation.

Sensor to detect the distancefrom the vehicle in front (front radar)

The sensor is to maintain a certaindistance from the vehicle in front.However, the smudged sensor lenswith foreign substances, such assnow and rain, adversely affects thesensing performance. It may eventemporarily cancel the AEB. Alwayskeep the sensor lens clean.

Warning message and warninglight

When the sensor is covered or thesensor lens is dirty with foreign sub-stances, such as snow or rain, theAEB operation may temporarily stop.In this case, a warning message(“Auto Emergency Braking disabledtemporarily”) will appear to notify thedriver.

This is not a malfunction with theAEB. To operate the AEB again,remove the foreign substances.

WARNING The AEB cannot avoid all colli-sions. The AEB might not com-pletely stop the vehicle beforecollision, due to ambient weath-er and road conditions. Thedriver has the responsibility todrive safely and control thevehicle.

OYDM046400



505

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not install any accessories, such

as a license plate bracket orbumper sticker near the sensorarea. Do not replace the bumperby yourself. Doing so may adverse-ly affect the sensing performance.

• Always keep the sensor/bumperarea clean.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash thevehicle. Also, do not spray highlypressurized water on the sensorinstalled on the bumper.

• Be careful not to apply unneces-sary force on the frontal sensorarea. When the sensor moves outof the correct position due toexternal force, the system may notoperate correctly even without thewarning light or message. In thiscase, we recommend you to havethe vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Use only the genuine Kia sensorcover. Do not arbitrarily applypaint on the sensor cover.

System malfunction• When the AEB is not working prop-

erly, the AEB warning light ( ) willilluminate and the warning mes-sage (“Check AEB system”) willappear for a few seconds. After themessage disappears, the masterwarning light ( ) will illuminate. Inthis case, we recommend you tohave the vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• The AEB warning message mayappear along with the illuminationof the ESC warning light.

WARNING The AEB is only a supplementalsystem for the driver’s conven-ience.The driver still maintainsresponsibility to control thevehicle. Do not solely dependon the AEB system. Rather,maintain a safe braking dis-tance, and, if necessary,depress the brake pedal tolower the driving speed.


5 51


• The AEB may unnecessarily pro-duce warning messages and warn-ing alarms. Due to the sensing lim-itation, the AEB may not producewarning messages or warningalarm at all.

• When there is a malfunction withthe AEB, the braking control doesnot operate upon detecting a colli-sion risk even with other brakingsystems normally operating.

• The AEB operates only for thevehicle / pedestrian in front, whiledriving forward. It does not operatefor any animals or vehicles in theopposite direction.

• The AEB can not recognize cross-traffic or parked vehicles present-ing a side-profile.

Limitation of the systemThe AEB is an assistant system for adriver in a certain risky driving condi-tion and it does not take everyresponsibility for all risks from drivingcondition.The AEB monitors the driving situa-tions through the radar and the cam-era sensor. For any vehicle activityoccurring outside the sensor range,the AEB may not function. The drivershould exercise caution in the follow-ing situations, as the AEB operationmay be limited:

Recognizing vehicles- The radar or the camera is con-

taminated with foreign substances.- It heavily rains or snows.- There is electromagnetic interfer-

ence.- Something in the path of travel

deflects the radar waves.- The vehicle in front has a narrow

body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)- The driver’s view is degraded by

driving towards sunlight, reflectedlight, or darkness.

- The camera cannot see the fullprofile of the vehicle in front.

- The vehicle in front is a specialvehicle, such as a heavily-loadedtruck or a trailer.



525

The vehicle in front does not turnON the rear lights, does not haverear lights, has asymmetric rearlights, or has rear lights out of angle.

- The outside brightness is greatlychanged, such as entering/exitingthe tunnel.

- The vehicle driving is unstable.- The radar/camera sensor recogni-

tion is limited.

- Driving on a curveThe AEB performance decreaseswhile driving on a curve. The AEBmay not recognize the vehicle in fronteven in the same lane. It may unnec-essarily produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm, or itmay not produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm at all.While driving on a curve, exercisecaution, and, if necessary, depressthe brake pedal.

While driving on a curve, the AEBmay recognize the vehicle in front inthe next lane. Exercise caution, and, ifnecessary, depress the brake pedal.Or, depress the accelerator pedal tomaintain the driving speed. Always,take a look around the vehicle foryour safety.

OJF055026OJF055025


5 53


- Driving on a slopeThe AEB performance decreaseswhile driving upward or downward ona slope, not recognizing the vehiclein front in the same lane. It mayunnecessarily produce the warningmessage and the warning alarm, or itmay not produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm at all.When the AEB suddenly recognizesthe vehicle in front while passingover a slope, you may experiencesharp deceleration.Always keep your eyes forward whiledriving upward or downward on aslope, and, if necessary, depress thebrake pedal.

- Changing lanes Even though the vehicle in the nextlane enters into your lane, it may notbe recognized by the AEB, until itenters the AEB sensing range.Especially when the vehicle in thenext lane abruptly enters into yourlane, it is more likely not be recog-nized. Always be attentive to drivingconditions.

When the stopped vehicle in frontgets out of the lane, it may not berecognized by your AEB. Always beattentive to driving conditions.

OJF055027 OJF055029OJF055028



545

- Recognizing the vehicle When the vehicle in front has heavyloading extended rearward, or whenthe vehicle in front has higher groundclearance, it may induce a haz-ardous situation.

Recognizing pedestrians- The pedestrian is not fully captured

by the camera sensor, or thepedestrian does not walk in theupright position.

- The pedestrian moves very fast.- The pedestrian abruptly appears in

front.- The pedestrian wears clothes sim-

ilar in color to the background.- Conditions outside are too bright or

too dark.- The vehicle drives at night or in the

darkness.- There is an item similar in shape a

person’s body structure.- The pedestrian is small.- The pedestrian has impaired

mobility.- The pedestrian blends in with their

surroundings.- Sensor recognition is limited by

rain, snow, fog, etc.- There is a group of pedestrians.

✽✽ NOTICEThe system may temporarily canceldue to the strong electric waves.

OJF055030

WARNING - Testing theAEB

The AEB does not operate incertain situations. Thus, nevertest-operate the AEB against aperson or an object. It maycause a severe injury or evendeath.

WARNING - AEB andTowing

Cancel the AEB in the UserSettings on the LCD display,before towing another vehicle.While towing, the brake applica-tion may adversely affect yourvehicle safety.


5 55


• Pay great caution to the vehicle infront, when it has heavy loadingextended rearward, or when it hashigher ground clearance.

• The sensor only detects pedestri-an, not carts, bicycles, motorcy-cles, luggage bags, or strollers.



565

The cruise control system allows youto program the vehicle to maintain aconstant speed without depressingthe accelerator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40km/h).If the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster illuminated) the cruisecontrol can be switched on acciden-tally. Keep the cruise control systemoff (CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not in use,to avoid inadvertently setting aspeed.Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.Do not use the cruise control whendriving in heavy or varying traffic, oron slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-ered) or winding roads or over 6%up-hill or down-hill roads.

✽✽ NOTICE• During normal cruise control

operation, when the SET switch isactivated or reactivated afterapplying the brakes, the cruisecontrol will energize after approx-imately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

• To activate cruise control, depressthe brake pedal at least once afterturning the ignition switch to theON position or starting the engine.This is to check if the brake switchwhich is important part to cancelcruise control is in normal condi-tion.

Cruise control switch

CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-tem on or off.

CANCEL: Cancels cruise controloperation.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruisecontrol speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-trol speed.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Misuse ofCruise Control

Do not use cruise control if thetraffic situation does not allowyou to drive safely at a constantspeed and with sufficient dis-tance to the vehicle in front.

OYDDDR3027


5 57


To set cruise control speed:

1.Press the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument cluster will illumi-nate.

2.Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 20 mph(30 km/h).

✽✽ NOTICE - Manual transaxleFor manual transaxle vehicles, youshould depress the brake pedal atleast once to set the cruise controlafter starting the engine.

3.Move the lever down (to SET-), andrelease it at the desired speed. TheSET indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate.Release the accelerator pedal atthe same time. The desired speedwill automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle mayslow down or speed up slightly whilegoing uphill or downhill.

OYDEDR3022

OYDDDR3023

YDM USA 5.QXP 2016-05-02 14:03 Page 57


585

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever up (to RES+) and

hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the lever at the speed youwant.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) andrelease it immediately.The cruising speed will increase by1 mph (or 2km/h) each time youmove the lever up (to RES+) in thismanner.

To decrease the cruisingspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

hold it. Your vehicle will graduallyslow down. Release the lever at thespeed you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) andrelease it immediately.The cruising speed will decreaseby 1 mph (2 km/h) each time youmove the lever down (to SET-) inthis manner.

To temporarily accelerate withthe cruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

OYDDDR3023OYDDDR3024


5 59


To cancel cruise control, doone of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.• Depress the clutch pedal with a

manual transaxle.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-

matic transaxle.• Press the CANCEL button.• Decrease the vehicle speed lower

than the memory speed by 9 mph(15 km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan approximately 25 mph (40km/h).

Each of these actions will cancelcruise control operation (the SETindicator light in the instrument clus-ter will go off), but it will not turn thesystem off. If you wish to resumecruise control operation, move up thelever (to RES+) located on yoursteering wheel.You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed atmore than approximately 25mph (40 km/h):

If any method other than theCRUISE button was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speedwill automatically resume when youmove the lever up (to RES+).It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped belowapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

OYDDDR3025

OYDDDR3024



605

✽✽ NOTICEAlways check the road conditionswhen you move the lever up (toRES+) to resume the speed.

To turn cruise control off, doone of the following:

• Press the CRUISE button (theCRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruisecontrol operation. If you want toresume cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To setcruise control speed” on the previouspage.

OYDDDR3022


5 61


DRIVE mode

The drive mode may be selectedaccording to the driver’s preferenceor road condition.

The mode changes whenever theDRIVE MODE button is pressed.

❈ When normal mode is selected, itis not displayed on the cluster.

ECO mode (Active ECO)Active ECO helps improvefuel efficiency by control-ling certain engine andtransaxle system operat-ing parameters. Fuel effi-ciency depends on thedriver's driving habit androad condition.• When the DRIVE MODE

button is pressed andthe ECO mode is select-ed, the ECO indicator(green) will illuminate toshow that the ActiveECO is operating.

• When the Active ECO isactivated, it does notturn off even though theengine is restartedagain. To turn off thesystem, press theDRIVE MODE buttonagain.

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM

NORMAL

SPORT ECO

OYD056039L

ECO



625

When Active ECO is activated:• The acceleration may slightly be

reduced even though you depressthe accelerator fully.

• The air conditioner performancemay be limited

• The shift pattern of the automatictransaxle may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normalconditions when the Active EcoSystem is activated to improve fuelefficiency.

Limitation of Active ECO opera-tion:If the following conditions occur whileActive ECO is operating, the systemoperation is limited even thoughthere is no change in the ECO indi-cator.• When the coolant temperature is

low:The system will be limited untilengine performance becomes nor-mal.

• When driving up a hill:The system will be limited to gainpower when driving uphill becausethe engine torque is restricted.

• When using manual mode:The system will be limited accord-ing to the shift location.

• When the accelerator pedal isdeeply depressed for a few sec-onds:The system will be limited, judgingthat the driver wants to speed up.

SPORT modeSPORT mode focuses ondynamic driving by auto-matically adjusting thesteering wheel, engineand transaxle system.• When the DRIVE MODE

button is pressed andthe SPORT mode isselected, the SPORTindicator (yellow) will illu-minate.

• When the SPORT modeis activated, and theengine start/stop buttonis turned off and on it willchange to NORMALmode. To turn on theSPORT mode pressDRIVE MODE buttonagain.

SPORT


5 63


• If the system is activat-ed:- While holding vehicle

speed, it maintains thegear and RPM for sometime even though theaccelerator pedal is notdepressed.

- Up-shifting is delayed.

✽✽ NOTICEIn Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-ciency may decrease.



645

The Lane Keeping Assist Systemdetects lane markers on the road,and assists the driver’s steering tohelp keep the vehicle between lanes.

When the system detects the vehiclestraying from its lane, it alerts thedriver with a visual and audible warn-ing, while applying a slight counter-steering torque, trying to prevent thevehicle from moving out of its lane.

• The steering wheel is not continu-ously controlled so if the vehiclespeed is very fast when leaving alane the vehicle may not be con-trolled by the system.

• It is the responsibility of the driverto drive safely.

• Do not steer the steering wheelsuddenly when the steering wheelis being assisted by the system.

• LKAS prevents the driver frommoving out of the lane unintention-ally by assisting the driver's steer-ing. However, the driver should notsolely rely on the system butalways pay attention on the steer-ing wheel to stay in the lane.

• Always check the road conditionand surroundings and be cautiouswhen the system cancels, does notoperate or malfunctions.

• Do not place any accessories,stickers or tint the windshield nearthe rearview mirror.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)

OYDM056083

OYDM056082

WARNING - LKASLimitations

The LKAS is a supplementalsystem and should not be solelyrelied upon by the driver. Do notattempt sudden steering maneu-vers while the LKAS is activated.If the vehicle is driven at highspeeds, the LKAS may notadjust the steering wheel. It isthe driver's responsibility toalways pay attention to the roadand maintain control over thesteering wheel while driving.


5 65


• The system detects lane markersand controls the steering wheel bya camera, therefore, if the lanemarkers are hard to detect, thesystem may not work properly.Please refer to "Driver's Attention".

• Do not remove any LKAS parts orapply impact.

• Do not place objects on the dash-board that reflects light such asmirrors, white paper, etc. The sys-tem may malfunction if the sunlightis reflected.

• Loud audio sounds may interferewith the passenger from hearingwarning chimes.

• Always have your hands on thesteering wheel while the LKAS sys-tem is activated. If you continue todrive with your hands off the steeringwheel after the "Hand on" warning,the system will not control steeringautomatically. When system doesnot control steering automatically, ifyou hold steering wheel, system willcontrol steering automatically

• If you drive very fast, the vehiclemay stray out of the lane. Always becautious when using the system.

LKAS operation

• To turn on the LKAS, push the but-ton with the ignition switch in theON position.

• The LKAS indicator (green) will illu-minate.

• To turn off the system, press thebutton again.The indicator turns off.

• LKAS indicator- green : LKAS- white : LDWS or System Ready- yellow : FAIL

OYDM056081N



665

LKAS activation

• The LKAS screen will appear onthe LCD display if the system isactivated.

• When both lanes are detected andall the conditions to activate theLKAS are satisfied, the steeringwheel will be controlled (greensteering wheel indicator will illumi-nate).

• If the system detects a lane, thecolor changes from black to white.

• If the system detects the left lane,the left lane color will change fromblack to white.

• If the system detects the right lane,the right lane color will changefrom black to white.

• Both lanes must be detected forthe system to fully activate.

• If only one of the lane is detected,the system will warn (warning beepand blinking yellow lane) the driverwhen the driver crosses the detect-ed lane.

OYDM056084

WARNING The Lane Keeping AssistSystem is a supplemental sys-tem to prevent the driver fromleaving the lane. However, thedriver should not solely rely onthe system but always check theroad conditions when driving.


5 67


Warning

• If you cross a lane, the lane youcross will blink (yellow) and symbolwill blink green on LCD with anaudible warning during max 3 sec-onds.

• If the steering wheel appears, thesystem will control the vehicle’ssteering to prevent the vehicle fromcrossing the lane.

• If all the conditions to activateLKAS are not satisfied, the systemwill convert to LDWS and warn thedriver only when the driver crossesthe lane markers.

• If the driver takes one’s hands offthe steering wheel while the LKASis activated, the system will warnthe driver after several secondswith a visual and audible warning.

✽✽ NOTICEThe warning message may appearlate according to road conditions.Therefore, always have your handson the steering wheel while driving.

OQLE045243

OYDM056088/OYDM056087

■ Left lane ■ Right lane

OYDM056086/OYDM056085

■ Left lane ■ Right lane



685

If the driver still does not have one’shand on the steering wheel after sev-eral seconds, LKAS does not acti-vate.While LKAS deactivation, if the driv-er have one’s hand on the steeringwheel, LKAS activate again.

✽✽ NOTICE• The driver is responsible for accu-

rate steering.• Turn off the system and drive the

vehicle personally in below situa-tions.- In bad weather- In bad road condition- When the steering wheel needs to

be controlled by the driver fre-quently.

✽✽ NOTICE• Even though the steering is assist-

ed by the system, the driver maycontrol the steering.

• The steering wheel may feel heav-ier when the steering wheel isassisted by the system than when itis not.

The system will be cancelled when:

• Vehicle speed is below 35 mph (56km/h) and over 110 mph (177 km/h).

• Only one lane is detected.• Always turn on the turn signal to

change lanes. If you change laneswithout the turn signal on, thesteering wheel might be controlled.

• The hazard warning light is on.• The width of the lane is below 2.6 m

and over 4.5 m.• ESC(Electronic Stability Control)

and VSM(Vehicle stability manage-ment) are activated.

• When the system is on or afterchanging a lane, drive in the mid-dle of the lane. If not, the systemwill not provide the steering assistfunction.

• The steering will not be assistedwhen you drive fast on a sharpcurve.

• The steering will not be assistedwhen you change lanes fast.

• The steering will not be assistedwhen you brake suddenly.


5 69


DRIVER'S ATTENTIONThe driver must be cautious in thebelow situations for the system maynot assist the driver and may notwork properly.• The lane is not visible due to snow,

rain, stain, a puddle or many otherthings.

• The brightness of the outsidechanges suddenly such as passingthrough a tunnel.

• Not turning on the headlight orthe light is weak even at night or ina tunnel.

• Difficult to distinguish the color ofthe lane marker from the road.

• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.• Light reflects from the water on the

road such as sunlight, streetlight orthe light of oncoming vehicles.

• The lens or windshield is stainedwith foreign matter.

• The sensor cannot detect the lanebecause of fog, heavy rain orheavy snow.

• The surrounding of the inside rearview mirror temperature is highdue to direct light.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The lane is very wide or narrow.• The lane marker is damaged or

indistinct.• The shadow is on the lane marker

by a median strip.• There is a mark similar to a lane

marker.• There is a boundary structure.• The distance from vehicle ahead is

very short or the vehicle aheaddrives hiding the lane marker.

• The vehicle shakes heavily.• The lane number increases or

decreases or the lane marker arecrossing complicatedly.

• Placing something on the dash-board.

• Driving with the sun in front ofyou.

• Driving in areas under construction.• The lane marker is more than two.• The lane marker in a tunnel is hard

to distinguish due to dust or grease.• The lane marker is hard to distin-

guish after raining at night.• The lane marker is hard to distin-

guish due to dust.(Continued)

(Continued)• MDPS (motor driven power steer-

ing) is not operational.• Some objects are attached in steer-

ing wheel.• The windshield is fogged by

humid air in the vehicle.• The distance from the vehicle

ahead is very short or the vehicleahead drives covering the lane line.

• The lane line is merged or divided.• Driving through a toll plaza or toll

gate.



705

LKAS malfunction

• If there is a problem with the sys-tem a message will appear. If theproblem continues the LKAS failindicator will illuminate.

LKAS fail indicator

The LKAS fail indicator (yellow) willilluminate with an audible warning ifthe LKAS is not working properly. Werecommend that you contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

When there is a problem with the sys-tem do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turningthe engine off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in theON position.

• Check if the system is affected bythe weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter onthe camera lens

If the problem is not solved, we rec-ommend that the system be checkedby an authorized Kia dealer.

OYDM056089 OYDM056089


5 71


LKAS function change The driver can change LKAS to LaneDeparture Warning System (LDWS)or change the LKAS mode betweenStandard LKA and Active LKA byselecting 'User Settings', 'DrivingAssist', and ‘Lane Keeping AssistSystem’ on the LCD display. The sys-tem is automatically set to StandardLKA.

Lane Departure Warning (LDWS)• The system can be converted to

LKA to LDW at the User settingmode.

• Refer to User setting in section 4.• LDWS alerts the driver with a visu-

al and audible warning when thesystem detects the vehicle strayingfrom its lane.

• If the LDWS is operating the indi-cator green/white will illuminate.

• The steering wheel will not be con-trolled.

Standard LKA• LKAS only starts intervention when

the vehicle is predicted to cross theline.

• It's useful to a driver who dislikesfrequent intervention by LKAS

• LDW is generated when the vehi-cle is about to cross the line.

Active LKA• LKAS operates for a vehicle to

keep the region of lane centermore efficiently.

• The steering assistance is activat-ed more frequently and earlier thanstandard LKA.

• LDW is generated when the vehi-cle is about to cross the line.



725

The Blind Spot Detection System(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alertthe driver.It senses toward the rear sides of thevehicle and provides and early warn-ing to the driver.

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)The warning range depends onyour vehicle speed. However, ifyour vehicle is about 6 mph (10km/h) faster than the other vehi-cle, the system will not warn you.

(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)When a vehicle approaches youat high speed, the system willwarn you.

(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)When your vehicle moves rear-ward, and the sensor detects anapproaching vehicle in the left orright side, the system will warnyou.

BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - BSDLimitations

• The Blind Spot DetectionSystem (BSD) is a supplemen-tal system. Do not solely relyon the system and always payattention to drive safely.

• The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicleand is not a substitute for prop-er and safe lane changing pro-cedures. Always drive safelyand use caution when chang-ing lanes.OUM054176L


5 73


BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist)Operating conditions

The indicator on the switch will illumi-nate when the Blind Spot DetectionSystem (BSD) switch is pressed withthe Engine Start/Stop Button ON.If vehicle speed exceeds 18.6 mph (30 km/h), the system will activate.If you press the switch again, theswitch indicator and system will beturned off.If the vehicle is turned off, the systemwill remember the last settings uponrestart.

When the system is not used turn thesystem off by turning off the switch.When the system is turned on thewarning light will illuminate for 3 sec-onds on the outside rearview mirror.

Warning typeThe system will activate when:1. The system is on.2. Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph

(30 km/h).3. Other vehicles are detected in the

rear side.

WARNINGThe Blind Spot DetectionSystem with Lane ChangeAssist and Rear Cross TrafficAlert is not a substitute forproper and safe lane changingprocedures. Always drive safelyand use caution when changinglanes. The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicle.

OYD056040L



745

If a vehicle is detected within theboundary of the system, a warninglight will illuminate on the outsiderearview mirror.If the detected vehicle is not indetecting range, the warning will turnoff.

The second stage alarm will activatewhen:1.The first stage alert is on2.The turn signal is on to change a

lane

When the second stage alert is acti-vated, a warning light will blink on theoutside rearview mirror and an alarmwill sound.If you move the turn signal switch tothe original position, the secondstage alert will be deactivated.

- The second stage alarm may bedeactivated.

• To activate the alarm:Go to the User Settings Mode →Sound and select "BSD" on theLCD display.

• To deactivate the alarm:Go to the User Settings Mode →Sound and deselect "BSD" on theLCD display.

✽✽ NOTICEThe alarm function helps alert thedriver. Deactivate this function onlywhen it is necessary

OUM054029

2nd stage

OUM054028

1st stage


5 75


Detecting sensor

The sensors are located inside of therear bumper.Always keep the rear bumper cleanfor the system to work properly.

Warning messageThe message (“Blind Spot Detectiondisabled. Radar blocked”) will appearto notify the driver if there are foreignsubstances on the surface or insidethe rear bumper or it is hot near therear bumper. The light on the switchand the system will turn off automat-ically.Remove the foreign substance onthe rear bumper.After the foreign substance isremoved, if you drive for approxi-mately 10 minutes, the system willwork normally.If the system does not work normallyeven though the foreign substance isremoved, take your vehicle to anauthorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

If the system does not work properly,a warning message (“Check BSDSystem”) will appear and the light onthe switch will turn off. The systemwill turn off automatically.

Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

OYDM056065



765

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

When your vehicle moves backwardsfrom a parking position, the sensordetects approaching vehicles to theleft or right side direction and givesinformation to the driver.

Operating conditions• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) in "User Settings" under"Driving Assist" on the instrumentcluster. The system will turn on andstandby to activate.

• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-tem off.

• If the vehicle is turned off, the RCTAsystem will remember the last set-tings upon restart. Always turn theRCTA system off when not in use.

• The system operates when thevehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10km/h) with the shift lever in R(Reverse).

• The RCTA (Rear Cross TrafficAlert) detecting range is 1.6 feet ~65 feet based on the side direction.If the approaching vehicle speed is 2.5 mph (4 km/h) ~ 22 mph (36km/h) within sensing range, it isdetected. However, the systemsensing range can vary based onconditions. Always pay attention toyour surroundings.

Warning type

OYD056047L

OJF055105L

OJF055196L

OJF055106L


5 77


• If the vehicle detected by sensorsapproaches your vehicle, the warn-ing chime will sound and the warn-ing light will blink on the outsiderearview mirror.

• If the detected object is not in yourway, move the vehicle away fromthe detected object slowly; and thewarning will cancel once the objecthas been safely cleared.

• The system may not operate prop-erly due to other factors or circum-stances. Always pay attention toyour surroundings.

❈ If your vehicle's left or right sidebumper is blinded by a barrier orvehicles, the system sensing abili-ty may be deteriorated.

✽✽ NOTICE• The system may not work proper-

ly if the bumper has been replacedor if repair work has been donenear the sensor.

• The detection area differs accord-ing to the road's width. If the roadis narrow the system may detectother vehicles in the next lane.

• If the road is very wide the systemmay not detect other vehicles.

• The system may turn off due tostrong electromagnetic interfer-ence.

Limitations conditionDriver's AttentionThe driver must be cautious in thebelow situations for the system maynot assist the driver and may notwork properly.

- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.- The surrounding of the sensor cover

is dirty with rain, snow, mud, etc.- The rear bumper near the sensor is

covered or obstructed with foreignmatter such as a sticker, bumperguard, bicycle racks, etc.

- The rear bumper is damaged or thesensor is out of place.

- The height of the vehicle has signif-icantly changed such as when thetrunk is loaded with heavy objects,abnormal tire pressure etc.

- Due to bad weather such as heavyrain or snow.

WARNINGThe Blind Spot DetectionSystem with Lane ChangeAssist and Rear Cross TrafficAlert is not a substitute forproper and safe lane changingprocedures. Always drive safelyand use caution when changinglanes. The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicle.



785

- A fixed object is near such as aguardrail, etc.

- A substantial amount of metallicobjects such as a constructionarea.

- A large vehicle is nearby such as abus or truck.

- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.- A flat trailer is near.- If two vehicles near each other

accelerate together.- When another vehicle passes by at

a high rate of speed.- When changing lanes.- When going down or up a steep

road where the height of the lane isdifferent.

- When another vehicle drives veryclose the back bumper/trunk.

- When a trailer or carrier is installed.

- When the temperature of rearbumper is high.

- When bike racks, etc. cover thesensor.

- When reversing from a parkingspace with pillars or metal struc-tures.

- When you are reversing and if thedetected vehicle is simultaneouslyreversing.

- If there are small objects like shop-ping carts and baby carriages.

- If there is a vehicle with decreasedride height (lowered).

- When the vehicle is close to anoth-er vehicle.

Outside rearview mirror may notalert the driver when:- The outside rearview mirror hous-

ing is very dirty.- The window is very dirty.- The windows are tinted very dark.- When driving through a narrow

road with many trees or bushes.


5 79



ful interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-




805

Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, whereyou drive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects howmany miles (kilometers) you can getfrom a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operateyour vehicle as economically as pos-sible, use the following driving sug-gestions to help save money in bothfuel and repairs:• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a

moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shiftsand maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stop-lights. Try to adjust your speed tothe traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily.Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from other vehicles so youcan avoid unnecessary braking.This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. Thefaster you drive, the more fuel yourvehicle uses. Driving at a moderatespeed, especially on the highway,is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption andalso increase wear on these com-ponents. In addition, driving withyour foot resting on the brake pedalmay cause the brakes to overheat,which reduces their effectivenessand may lead to more serious con-sequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pres-sure. Incorrect inflation, either toomuch or too little, results in unnec-essary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels arealigned correctly. Improper align-ment can result from hitting curbsor driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causesfaster tire wear and may also resultin other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condi-tion. For better fuel economy andreduced maintenance costs, main-tain your vehicle in accordancewith the maintenance schedule insection 7. If you drive your vehiclein severe conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required (see sec-tion 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-mum service, your vehicle shouldbe kept clean and free of corrosivematerials. It is especially importantthat mud, dirt, ice, etc. not beallowed to accumulate on theunderside of the vehicle. This extraweight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute tocorrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-sary weight in your vehicle. Weightreduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longerthan necessary. If you are waiting(and not in traffic), turn off yourengine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION


5 81


• Remember, your vehicle does notrequire extended warm-up. Afterthe engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 secondsprior to placing the vehicle in gear.In very cold weather, however, giveyour engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in avery high gear resulting in enginebucking. If this happens, shift to alower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit.This can be avoided by shifting atthe recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system isoperated by engine power so yourfuel economy is reduced when youuse it.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is reduced by cross-winds and headwinds. To help off-set some of this loss, slow downwhen driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operatingcondition is important both for econ-omy and safety. Therefore, have anauthorized Kia dealer performscheduled inspections and mainte-nance.

WARNING - Engine offduringmotion

Never turn the engine off tocoast down hills or anytime thevehicle is in motion. The powersteering and power brakes willnot function properly withoutthe engine running. In addition,turning off the ignition whiledriving could engage the steer-ing wheel lock resulting in lossof vehicle steering. Keep theengine on and downshift to anappropriate gear for enginebraking effect.



825

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditionsare encountered such as water,snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-ards, follow these suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking.• Avoid sudden braking or steering.• When braking with non-ABS

brakes pump the brake pedal witha light up-and-down motion untilthe vehicle is stopped.

Do not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,

use second gear. Accelerate slow-ly to avoid spinning the drivewheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under thedrive wheels to provide tractionwhen stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicleto free it from snow, sand, or mud,first turn the steering wheel right andleft to clear the area around yourfront wheels. Then, shift back andforth between 1st (First) and R(Reverse) in vehicles equipped witha manual transaxle or R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatictransaxle. Do not race the engine,and spin the wheels as little as pos-sible. If you are still stuck after a fewtries, have the vehicle pulled out by atow vehicle to avoid engine overheat-ing and possible damage to thetransaxle.The ESC system should be turnedOFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - DownshiftingDo not downshift with an auto-matic transaxle while driving onslippery surfaces. The suddenchange in tire speed couldcause the tires to skid andresult in an accident.

CAUTION - Vehicle rocking

Prolonged rocking may causeengine overheating, transaxledamage or failure, and tire dam-age.


5 83


Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing incorners, especially when roads arewet. Ideally, corners should alwaysbe taken under gentle acceleration. Ifyou follow these suggestions, tirewear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight,here are some important tips toremember:• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-cles, as it may be more difficult tosee at night, especially in areaswhere there may not be any streetlights.

OBH058035L OMC035004

WARNING - Sudden vehicle movement

Do not attempt to rock the vehi-cle if people or objects are near-by. The vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backwards asit becomes unstuck.

CAUTION - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, espe-cially at speeds more than 35mph (56 km/h). Spinning thewheels at high speeds when thevehicle is stationary couldcause a tire to overheat whichcould result in tire damage.



845

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce theglare from other driver's head-lights.

• Keep your headlights clean andproperly aimed on vehicles notequipped with the automatic head-light aiming feature. Dirty orimproperly aimed headlights willmake it much more difficult to seeat night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-lights of oncoming vehicles. Youcould be temporarily blinded, and itwill take several seconds for youreyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re notprepared for the slick pavement.Here are a few things to considerwhen driving in the rain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder

to see and will increase the dis-tance needed to stop your vehicle,so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wipingequipment in good shape. Replaceyour windshield wiper blades whenthey show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condi-tion, making a quick stop on wetpavement can cause a skid andpossibly lead to an accident. Besure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make iteasier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-dles can affect your brakes. If youmust go through puddles, try todrive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal brakingoperation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is nohigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. Drive through any water slowly.Allow adequate stopping distancebecause brake performance may beaffected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them sev-eral times while the vehicle is movingslowly.

1JBB3303


5 85


Driving off-roadDrive carefully off-road because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar withthe off-road conditions where youare going to drive before you begindriving.

Highway drivingTires Adjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pres-sures will result in overheating andpossible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tireswhich may result in reduced tractionor tire failure.Never exceed the maximum tireinflation pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engineoilHigh speed travel consumes morefuel than urban motoring. Do not for-get to check both the engine coolantand engine oil.

Drive beltA loose or damaged drive belt mayoverheat the engine.

WARNING - Tire treadAlways check the tire treadbefore driving your vehicle.Worn-out tires can result in lossof vehicle control. Worn-outtires should be replaced assoon as possible. For furtherinformation and tread limits,refer to "Tires and wheels" insection 7.

WARNING - Under/OverInflated Tires

Always check the tires for prop-er inflation before driving.Underinflated or overinflatedtires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, and sud-den tire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and even death.



865

Severe weather conditions in thewinter result in greater wear andother problems. To minimize theproblems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

Snowy or Icy conditionsTo drive your vehicle in deep snow, itmay be necessary to use snow tiresor to install tire chains on your tires.If snow tires are needed, it is neces-sary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipmenttires. Failure to do so may adverselyaffect the safety and handling of yourcar. Furthermore, speeding, rapidacceleration, sudden brake applica-tions, and sharp turns are potentiallyvery hazardous practices.During deceleration, use enginebraking to the fullest extent. Suddenbrake applications on snowy or icyroads may cause skids. You need tokeep sufficient distance between thevehicle in operation in front and yourvehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.It should be noted that installing tirechains on the tire will provide greaterdriving force, but will not prevent sideskids.Tire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before installing tirechains.

Snow tiresIf you mount snow tires on your vehi-cle, make sure they are radial tires ofthe same size and load range as theoriginal tires. Mount snow tires on allfour wheels to balance your vehicle’shandling in all weather conditions.Keep in mind that the traction provid-ed by snow tires on dry roads maynot be as high as your vehicle's orig-inal equipment tires.You should drivecautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.Do not install studded tires withoutfirst checking local, state and munic-ipal regulations for possible restric-tions against their use.

WINTER DRIVING

1JBB3305

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalentin size and type to the vehicle'sstandard tires. Otherwise, thesafety and handling of your vehi-cle may be adversely affected.


5 87


Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires arethinner, they can be damaged bymounting some types of snow chainson them. Therefore, the use of snowtires is recommended instead ofsnow chains. Do not mount tirechains on vehicles equipped withaluminum wheels; snow chains maycause damage to the wheels. If snowchains must be used, use wire-typechains with a thickness of less than0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to yourvehicle caused by improper snowchain use is not covered by yourvehicle manufacturers warranty.Install tire chains only on the fronttires.

The snow chain connecting hooksmay be damaged from contactingvehicle components causing thesnow chains to come loose from thetire. Make sure the snow chains areSAE class “S” certified.Always check chain installation forproper mounting after drivingapproximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to1 km) to ensure safe mounting.Retighten or remount the chains ifthey are loose.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer's instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop and tightenthem. If they still make contact, slowdown until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin drivingon cleared roads.When mounting snow chains, parkthe vehicle on level ground awayfrom traffic. Turn on the vehicleHazard Warning flashers and place atriangular emergency warning devicebehind the vehicle if available.

CAUTION - Snow chains• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type foryour tires. Incorrect snowchains can cause damage tothe vehicle body and suspen-sion and may not be coveredby your vehicle manufacturer'swarranty.

• Tire Chains for use on snowand ice may not be installed onP225/40R18 All Season tires.Use of chains with that tire sizewill damage your vehicle.

OED050200



885

• The use of chains may adverselyaffect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)or the chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,holes, sharp turns, and other roadhazards, which may cause thevehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheelbraking.

Use high quality ethylene gly-col coolantYour vehicle is delivered with highquality ethylene glycol coolant in thecooling system. It is the only type ofcoolant that should be used becauseit helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the waterpump and prevents freezing. Be sureto replace or replenish your coolantin accordance with the maintenanceschedule in section 7. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assurethat its freezing point is sufficient forthe temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

Check battery and cablesWinter puts additional burdens onthe battery system. Visually inspectthe battery and cables as describedin section 7. The level of charge inyour battery can be checked by anauthorized Kia dealer or a servicestation.

Change to "winter weight" oilif necessaryIn some climates it is recommendedthat a lower viscosity "winter weight"oil be used during cold weather. Seesection 8 for recommendations. Ifyou aren't sure what weight oil youshould use, consult an authorizedKia dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni-tion systemInspect your spark plugs asdescribed in section 7 and replacethem if necessary. Also check allignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn ordamaged in any way.

CAUTION - Snow chains• Chains that are the wrong size

or improperly installed candamage your vehicle's brakelines, suspension, body andwheels.

• Stop driving and retighten thechains any time you hear themhitting the vehicle.


5 89


To keep locks from freezingTo keep the locks from freezing,squirt an approved de-icer fluid orglycerine into the key opening. If alock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to removethe ice. If the lock is frozen internally,you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heat-ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in systemTo keep the water in the windowwasher system from freezing, add anapproved window washer anti-freezesolution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window wash-er anti-freeze is available from anauthorized Kia dealer and most autoparts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freezeas these may damage the paint fin-ish.

Don't let your parking brakefreezeUnder some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engagedposition. This is most likely to hap-pen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet.If there is a risk the parking brakemay freeze, apply it only temporarilywhile you put the shift lever in P(automatic transaxle) or in first orreverse gear (manual transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the vehiclecannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

Don't let ice and snow accu-mulate underneathUnder some conditions, snow andice can build up under the fendersand interfere with the steering. Whendriving in severe winter conditionswhere this may happen, you shouldperiodically check underneath thecar to be sure the movement of thefront wheels and the steering com-ponents is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of theweather you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some ofthe items you may want to carryinclude tire chains, tow straps orchains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,coveralls, a blanket, etc.

TRAILER TOWINGWe do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.



905

The label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OYDM066018

OYDM066019

OYDNEM4012

OYDNEM4010N

OYDM066020

OYDM066021

OYDNEM4012C

OYDNEM4010A

Tire and loading information label


5 91


Vehicle capacity weight:849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:We do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps For Determining CorrectLoad Limit -1.Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-ard.

2.Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-sengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehi-cle.



925

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 805 lbs

161 lbs (73 kg) × 5(365 kg)

CAvailable Cargo and 44 lbs

Luggage weight (20 kg)

A B C

Example 3

C190F02JM




B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5(340 kg)



A B C

Example 2

C190F01JM




B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2(136 kg)



Example 1

A B C

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.


5 93


Certification label

The certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pil-lar.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle andvehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings canaffect your vehicle’s handlingand braking ability.



945

✽✽ NOTICEOverloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be cov-ered by your warranty. Do not over-load your vehicle.

WARNING - Over loading

Do not overload your vehicle.Overloading your vehicle cancause heat buildup in your vehi-cle's tires and possible tire fail-ure, increased stopping dis-tances and poor vehicle han-dling--all of which may result ina crash.

WARNING - Loose cargoDo not travel with unsecuredblunt objects in the passengercompartment of your vehicle(e.g. suit cases or unsecuredchild seats). These items maystrike occupant during a sud-den stop or crash.


5 95


This section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the compliancelabel:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the compliance label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the certification labellocated on the driver’s door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT



Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4• If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly. . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-7• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. . 6-11

If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . 6-12• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-13

• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

6



26

ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher servesas a warning to other drivers to exer-cise extreme caution whenapproaching, overtaking, or passingyour vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-gency repairs are being made orwhen the vehicle is stopped near theedge of a roadway.Depress the flasher switch with theignition switch in any position. Theflasher switch is located in the centerconsole switch panel. All turn signallights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-ates whether your vehicle is run-ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work whenthe hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when usingthe hazard warning flasher whilethe vehicle is being towed.

OYDEEM2001CN


6 3


In an emergency situation while thevehicle is in motion, you are able toturn the engine off and to the ACCposition by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for more than 2seconds or 3 times successivelywithin 3 seconds. If the vehicle is stillmoving, you can restart the enginewithout depressing the brake pedalby pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the N (Neutral) position(if smart key equipped).

If the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossingIf the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push thevehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire whiledrivingIf a tire goes flat while you are driv-ing:1.Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slowdown while driving straight ahead.Do not apply the brakes immedi-ately or attempt to pull off the roadas this may cause a loss of control.When the vehicle has slowed downto such a speed that it is safe to doso, brake carefully and pull off theroad. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on a firm levelground. If you are on a dividedhighway, do not park in the medianarea between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turnon your emergency hazard flash-ers, set the parking brake and putthe transaxle in P (Automatictransaxle / Dual Clutch Transaxle)or reverse (manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out onthe side of the vehicle that is awayfrom traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, followthe instruction provided later in thissection.

If engine stalls while driving1.Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.3.Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact anauthorized Kia dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING



46

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STARTIf the engine doesn't turn overor turns over slowly1.If your vehicle has an Automatic

transaxle/ Dual Clutch Transaxle,be sure the shift lever is in N(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-gency brake is set.

2.Check the battery connections tobe sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operatethe starter, the battery is dis-charged.

4.Check the starter connections tobe sure they are securely tight-ened.

5.Do not push or pull the vehicle tostart it. See instructions for "Jumpstarting".

If engine turns over normallybut does not start1.Check fuel level.2.With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connec-tors at the ignition coil and sparkplugs. Reconnect any that may bedisconnected or loose.

3.Check the fuel line in the enginecompartment.

4.If the engine still does not start, callan authorized Kia dealer or seekother qualified assistance.

WARNING - Push/pull start

Do not push or pull the vehicleto start it. Push or pull startingmay cause the catalytic con-verter to overload and create afire hazard.


6 5


EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical orderand disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous ifdone incorrectly. Therefore, to avoidharm to yourself or damage to yourvehicle or battery, follow these jumpstarting procedures. If in doubt, westrongly recommend that you have acompetent technician or towing serv-ice jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION - 12 volt battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-tem. You can damage a 12-voltstarting motor, ignition system,and other electrical partsbeyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - BatteryKeep all flames or sparks awayfrom the battery. The batteryproduces hydrogen gas whichwill explode if exposed to flameor sparks.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery asthis may cause the battery torupture or explode.

WARNING - Frozen batteries

Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolytelevel is low as the battery mayrupture or explode.

WARNING - Sulfuricacid risk

When jump starting your vehi-cle be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on thevehicle. Automobile batteriescontain sulfuric acid. This ispoisonous and highly corro-sive.

1VQA4001

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)



66

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATSIf your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, you will experience aloss of power, or hear loud pinging orknocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1.Pull off the road and stop as soonas it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P(Automatic transaxle/ Dual ClutchTransaxle) or neutral (manualtransaxle) and set the parkingbrake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3.If engine coolant is running outunder the vehicle or steam is com-ing out from underneath the hood,stop the engine. Do not open thehood until the coolant has stoppedrunning or the steaming hasstopped. If there is no visible lossof engine coolant and no steam,leave the engine running andcheck to be sure the engine cool-ing fan is operating. If the fan is notrunning, turn the engine off.

4.Check to see if the water pumpdrive belt is missing. If it is notmissing, check to see that it istight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leak-ing from the radiator, hoses orunder the vehicle. (If the air condi-tioning had been in use, it is nor-mal for cold water to be drainingfrom it when you stop).

5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-ken or engine coolant leaks, stopthe engine immediately and callthe nearest authorized Kia dealerfor assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the enginetemperature has returned to nor-mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,carefully add coolant to the reser-voir to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keepingalert for further signs of overheat-ing. If overheating happens again,call an authorized Kia dealer forassistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling systemand this should be checked as soonas possible by an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - Under thehood

While the engine is running,keep hair, hands and clothingaway from moving parts suchas the fan and drive belts.

WARNING - Radiatorcap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot.This canallow coolant to be blown out ofthe opening and cause seriousburns.


6 7


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper-ating properly.The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minuteand then remain continuously illumi-nated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. Whenthe malfunction indicator is illuminat-ed, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, includ-ing the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehi-cle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

OYDDEM2002



86

If the TPMS indicator does not illumi-nate for 3 seconds when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position orengine is running, or if it comes onafter blinking for approximately oneminute, take your car to your nearestauthorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

Low tire pressuretelltale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicator is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated.If the telltale illuminates, immediatelyreduce your speed, avoid hard cor-nering and anticipate increased stop-ping distances. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible.Inflate the tires to the proper pres-sure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pil-lar outer panel. If you cannot reach aservice station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace thelow pressure tire with the spare tire.Then the Low Tire Pressure telltalemay flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuouslyilluminated after restarting and about20 minutes of continuous drivingbefore you have the low pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.

In winter or cold weather, the low tirepressure telltale may be illuminated ifthe tire pressure was adjusted to therecommended tire inflation pressurein warm weather. It does not meanyour TPMS is malfunctioningbecause the decreased temperatureleads to a proportional lowering oftire pressure.When you drive your vehicle from awarm area to a cold area or from acold area to a warm area, or the out-side temperature is greatly higher orlower, you should check the tire infla-tion pressure and adjust the tires tothe recommended tire inflation pres-sure.


6 9


TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator willilluminate after it blinks for approxi-mately one minute when there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If the system isable to correctly detect an underinflation warning at the same time assystem failure then it will illuminatethe TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible to determine the cause ofthe problem.The TPMS malfunction indicator maybe illuminated if the vehicle is movingaround electric power supply cablesor radio transmitters such as atpolice stations, government and pub-lic offices, broadcasting stations, mil-itary installations, airports, or trans-mitting towers, etc. This can interferewith normal operation of the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

The TPMS malfunction indicator mayilluminate if snow chains or someseparately purchased devices suchas notebook computers, mobilecharger, remote starter, navigationetc. are used in the vehicle. This caninterfere with normal operation of theTire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Do not drive on low pressuretires. Significantly low tire pres-sure can cause the tires to over-heat and fail making the vehicleunstable resulting in increasedbraking distances and a loss ofvehicle control.



106

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure will come on. Have the flattire repaired by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible or replacethe flat tire with the spare tire.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedKia dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressuretire with the spare tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will blink or remainon until the low pressure tire isrepaired and placed on the vehicle.After you replace the low pressuretire with the TPMS spare tire, theLow Tire Pressure telltale may blinkor illuminate after a few minutesbecause the TPMS sensor mountedon the spare wheel is not initiated.Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-ed to the recommended pressureand installed on the vehicle or theTPMS sensor mounted on thereplaced spare wheel is initiated byan authorized Kia dealer, the TPMSmalfunction indicator and the low tirepressure telltale will extinguish withina few minutes of driving.If the indicator is not extinguishedafter a few minutes of driving, pleasevisit an authorized Kia dealer.

If an original mounted tire is replacedwith the spare tire, the TPMS sensoron the replaced spare wheel shouldbe initiated and the TPMS sensor onthe original mounted wheel shouldbe deactivated. If the TPMS sensoron the original mounted wheel locat-ed in the spare tire carrier still acti-vates, the tire pressure monitoringsystem may not operate properly.Have the tire with TPMS serviced orreplaced by an authorized Kia deal-er.

CAUTION - Repair AgentsNever use a puncture-repairingagent not approved by Kia torepair and/or inflate a low pres-sure tire. The tire sealant notapproved by Kia may damagethe tire pressure sensor.


6 11


You may not be able to identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tire pressuregauge to measure the tire's inflationpressure. Please note that a tire thatis hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than atire that is cold.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3hour period.Allow the tire to cool before measur-ing the inflation pressure. Always besure the tire is cold before inflating tothe recommended pressure.The TPMS cannot alert you to severeand sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors such as nails or roaddebris.If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakes gradu-ally and with light force, and slowlymove to a safe position off the road.

✽✽ NOTICETampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) compo-nents may void the warranty forthat portion of the vehicle.

This device complies with Part15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2.This device must accept any inter-




126

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

For safe operation, carefully readand follow the instructions in thismanual before use.(1) Compressor(2) Sealant bottleThe Tire Mobility Kit is a temporaryfix to the tire and the tire should beinspected by an authorized Kia deal-er as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEThe Tire Mobility Kit sealing com-pound in the bottle is to be used forone tire only. See your Kia dealer-ship for additional replacementsealant bottles.

Have your tire repaired as soon aspossible. The tire may loose air pres-sure at any time after inflating withthe Tire Mobility Kit.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you staymobile even after experiencing a tirepuncture.The system of compressor and seal-ing compound effectively and com-fortably seals most punctures in apassenger car tire caused by nailsor similar objects and reinflates thetire.After you ensured that the tire isproperly sealed you can drive cau-tiously on the tire (up to 120 miles(200 km)) at a max. speed of 50 mph(80 km/h) in order to reach a servicestation or tire dealer to have the tirerepaired or replaced.

OEL069019

OYDNEM2013

WARNING - Tire wallDo not use the Tire Mobility Kitto repair punctures in the tirewalls. This can result in an acci-dent due to tire failure.


6 13


It is possible that some tires, espe-cially with larger punctures or dam-age to the sidewall, cannot be sealedcompletely.Air pressure loss in the tire mayadversely affect tire performance.For this reason, you should avoidabrupt steering or other drivingmaneuvers, especially if the vehicleis heavily loaded or if a trailer is inuse.The Tire Mobility Kit is not designedor intended as a permanent tirerepair method and is to be used forone tire only.This instruction shows you step bystep procedure to temporarily sealthe puncture.Read the section "Notes on the safeuse of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of theTire Mobility Kit• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with theTire Mobility Kit away from movingtraffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you're on fairlylevel ground, always set your park-ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit forsealing/inflation passenger cartires. Only punctured areas locatedwithin the tread region of the tirecan be sealed using the tire mobil-ity kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kitfor your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may notbe effective for tire damage largerthan approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).Please contact the nearest Kiadealership if the tire cannot bemade roadworthy with the TireMobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if atire is severely damaged by drivingrun flat or with insufficient air pres-sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objectssuch as nails or screws that havepenetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leavethe engine running. Otherwiseoperating the compressor mayeventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kitunattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-ning for more than 10 min. at a timeor it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit ifthe ambient temperature is below -22°F (-30°C).



146

0. Speed restriction label1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle5. Compressor6. On/off switch7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure8. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

9. Hose to connect compressor andsealant bottle or compressor andwheel

Connectors, cable and connectionhose are stored in the compressorhousing.

Strictly follow the specifiedsequence, otherwise the sealantmay escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OEL069020

WARNING - Expiredsealant

Do not use the Tire sealant afterexpiration date noted on thesealant bottle.This can increasethe risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant• Keep out of reach of children.• Avoid contact with eyes.• Do not swallow.


6 15


Using the Tire Mobility Kit1.Detach the speed restriction label

(0) from the sealant bottle (1), andplace it in a highly visible placeinside the vehicle such as on thesteering wheel to remind the drivernot to drive too fast.

2.Screw connection hose (9) ontothe connector of the sealant bottle.

3.Ensure that button (8) on the com-pressor is not pressed.

4.Unscrew the valve cap from thevalve of the defective wheel andscrew filling hose (2) of the sealantbottle onto the valve.

5.Insert the sealant bottle into thehousing of the compressor (4)sothat the bottle is upright.

✽✽ NOTICEIf a foreign object is seen that haspunctured the tire, do not remove itbefore using Tire Mobility Kit.

6.Ensure that the compressor isswitched off, position 0.

7.Connect between compressor andthe vehicle power outlet using thecable and connectors.

8.With the engine start/stop buttonposition on or ignition switch posi-tion on, switch on the compressorand let it run for approximately 5~7minutes to fill the sealant up toproper pressure. (refer to the Tireand Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-tion pressure of the tire after fillingis unimportant and will bechecked/corrected later.Be careful not to overinflate the tireand stay away from the tire whenfilling it.

9.Switch off the compressor.10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector andfrom the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-age location in the vehicle.

OEL069019

WARNING - Carbonmonoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run-ning in a poorly ventilated areafor extended periods of time.Carbon monoxide poisoningand suffocation can occur.

WARNING - Tire pressure Do not attempt to drive yourvehicle if the tire pressure isbelow 29 PSI(200kpa). Thiscould result in an accident dueto sudden tire failure.



166

Distributing the sealant11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or, about10min) to evenly distribute thesealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph(80 km/h). If possible, do not fallbelow a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).While driving, if you experience anyunusual vibration, ride disturbance ornoise, reduce your speed and drivewith caution until you can safely pulloff of the side of the road.Call for road side service or towing.When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,the tire pressure sensors and wheelmay be stained by sealant.Therefore, remove the tire pressuresensors and wheel stained bysealant and we recommend thatinspect at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the tire inflationpressure1.After driving approximately 4 ~ 6

miles (7 ~ 10 km or about 10 min),stop at a safe location.

2.Connect connection hose (9) of thecompressor directly to the tirevalve.

3.Plug the compressor power cordinto the vehicle power outlet.

4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure tothe recomended tire inflation.With the ignition switch on, pro-ceed as follows.- To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compressor,position I. To check the currentinflation pressure setting, brieflyswitch off the compressor.

✽✽ NOTICEThe pressure gauge may show high-er than actual reading when thecompressor is running. To get anaccurate tire reading, the compres-sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres-sure: Press the button 8 on thecompressor.


6 17


Technical DataSystem voltage : DC 12 VWorking voltage : DC 10 - 15 VAmperage rating : max. 15 ASuitable for use at temperatures :

-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)Max. working pressure :

87 psi (6 bar)Size Compressor : 6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.

(168 x 150 x 68 mm)Sealant bottle : 4.1 x ø 3.3 in.

(104 x ø 85 mm)Compressor weight :

2.31 lbs (1.05 kg)Sealant volume :

18.3 cu. in. (300 ml)Sealant warranty :

5 years (sealant.)

CAUTION - Tire pressuresensor

When you use the Tire MobilityKit including sealant notapproved by Kia, the tire pres-sure sensors may be damagedby sealant. The sealant on thetire pressure sensor and wheelshould be removed when youreplace the tire with a new oneand inspect the tire pressuresensors at an authorized dealer.



186

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (IF EQUIPPED)Jack and tools

The spare tire, jack, jack handle andwheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe luggage compartment.Remove the luggage under tray outof the way to reach the equipment.(1) Jack handle(2) Jack(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

Always move the vehicle completelyoff the road and onto the shoulderbefore trying to change a tire. Thejack should be used on firm levelground. If you cannot find a firm levelplace off the road, call a towing serv-ice company for assistance.Be sure to use the correct front andrear jacking positions on the vehicle;never use the bumpers or any otherpart of the vehicle for jack support.

Do not allow anyone to remain in thevehicle while it is on the jack.Make sure any children present arein a secure place away from the roadand from the vehicle to be raised withthe jack.

WARNING - Tire JackDo not place any portion of yourbody under a vehicle that is onlysupported by a jack since thevehicle can easily roll off thejack. Use vehicle support stands.

WARNING - Changingtires

Never attempt vehicle repairs inthe traffic lanes of a public roador highway.

OTF060002

WARNING -Running vehi-cle on jack

Do not start or run the engine ofthe vehicle while the vehicle ison the jack as this may causethe vehicle to fall off the jack.


6 19


Removing and storing thespare tire

Turn the tire hold-down wing boltcounterclockwise.Store the tire in the reverse order ofremoval.To prevent the spare tire and toolsfrom “rattling” while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

Changing tires

1.Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake firmly.

2.Shift the shift lever into R(Reverse) for manual transaxle orP (Park) for Automatic transaxle/Dual Clutch Transaxle.

3.Activate the hazard warning flash-ers.

4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5.Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

OED066033

ONF068004

1JBA6504



206

6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-clockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7.Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jack atthe designated locations under theframe. The jacking positions areplates welded to the frame with twotabs and a raised dot to index withthe jack.

OYDDEM2004

WARNING - Changing atire

• To prevent vehicle movementwhile changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully,and always block the wheeldiagonally opposite the wheelbeing changed.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.

OYDM066001

OYDM066002


6 21


8.Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 1 in (30 mm). Beforeremoving the wheel lug nuts, makesure the vehicle is stable and thatthere is no chance for movementor slippage.

9.Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide thewheel off the studs and lay it flat soit cannot roll away. To put the wheelon the hub, pick up the spare tire,line up the holes with the studs andslide the wheel onto them. If this isdifficult, tip the wheel slightly andget the top hole in the wheel linedup with the top stud.Then jiggle thewheel back and forth until thewheel can be slid over the otherstuds.

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible injury. Before put-ting the wheel into place, be surethat there is nothing on the hub orwheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)that prevents the wheel from fittingsolidly against the hub.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicle inthe correct jack position; neveruse any other part of the vehiclefor jack support.

OYDDEM2005



226

10. To install the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on thestuds and tighten them fingertight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it iscompletely seated, then tightenthe nuts as much as possiblewith your fingers again.

11. Lower the vehicle to the groundby turning the wheel nut wrenchcounterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everynut following the numerical sequenceshown in the image until they are tight.Then double-check each nut for tight-ness. After changing the wheels, havean authorized Kia dealer tighten thewheel nuts to their proper torque assoon as possible.Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65~79 lb.ft (9~11 kg.m)

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting the tire pressure. If the capis not replaced, air may leak from thetire. If you lose a valve cap, buyanother and install it as soon as pos-sible.After you have changed wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

WARNING - Installing awheel

Make sure the wheel makesgood contact with the hub wheninstalled. If the contact of themounting surface between thewheel and hub is not good, thewheel nuts could come looseand cause the loss of a wheel.Loss of a wheel may result inloss of control of the vehicle. OTF060007


6 23


Note that most lug nuts do not havemetric threads. Be sure to useextreme care in checking for threadstyle before installing aftermarket lugnuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installing thespare tire. Adjust it to the specifiedpressure, if necessary. Refer to“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

Important - use of compact sparetire (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.You should drive carefully when thecompact spare is in use. The com-pact spare should be replaced by theproper conventional tire and rim atthe first opportunity.The operation of this vehicle is notrecommended with more than onecompact spare tire in use at thesame time.

CAUTION - Replacinglug nuts

Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nuts thatwere removed are reinstalled -or, if replaced, that nuts withmetric threads and the samechamfer configuration are used.Your vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud willnot secure the wheel to the hubproperly and will damage thestud so that it must be replaced.

WARNING - Wheel studsDo not drive your vehicle withdamaged wheel studs. If thestuds are damaged, they maylose their ability to retain thewheel. This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collision.



246

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).Check the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should you

exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higherspeed could damage the tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly enoughfor the road conditions to avoid allhazards. Any road hazard, such as apothole or debris, could seriouslydamage the compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-pact spare tire. Because of thesmaller size, a tire chain will not fitproperly. This could damage thevehicle and result in loss of thechain.

• The compact spare tire should notbe installed on the front axle if thevehicle must be driven in snow oron ice.

WARNING - Spare tireDo not operate your vehicle onthis compact spare at speedsover 50 mph (80 km/h). Thecompact spare tire is for emer-gency use only. The original tireshould be repaired or replacedas soon as possible to avoidfailure of the spare.


6 25


• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.



266

Jack label 1. Model Name2. Maximum allowable load3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.6. The designated locations under

the frame7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be verticalunder the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicleswith manual transmission or movethe shift lever to the P position onvehicles with Automatic transaxle/Dual Clutch Transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firmlevel ground.

10. Jack manufacturer11. Production date12. Representative company and

address

OHYK064001

OHYK064005

OHYK064002

• Type A■ Example

• Type B

• Type C

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Formore detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.


6 27


TOWINGTowing service

If emergency towing is necessary,we recommend having it done by anauthorized Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow-truck service. Proper liftingand towing procedures are neces-sary to prevent damage to the vehi-cle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground(without dollies) and the front wheelsoff the ground.If any of the loaded wheels or sus-pension components are damagedor the vehicle is being towed with thefront wheels on the ground, use atowing dolly under the front wheels.When being towed by a commercialtow truck and wheel dollies are notused, the front of the vehicle shouldalways be lifted, not the rear.

CAUTION - Towing• Do not tow the vehicle back-

wards with the front wheels onthe ground as this may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-typeequipment. Use wheel lift orflatbed equipment.

OMC045012

A

B

dolly

HXD02

HXD03

WARNING - Side andcurtain air bag

If your vehicle is equipped withside and curtain air bag, set theignition switch to LOCK or ACCposition when the vehicle isbeing towed. The side and cur-tain air bag may deploy whenthe ignition is ON, and therollover sensor detects the situ-ation as a rollover.



286

When towing your vehicle in anemergency without wheel dollies :1.Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.2.Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3.Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (front) (if equipped)

1.Remove the towing hook from thetool case.

2.Remove the hole cover pressingthe lower part of the cover on thefront bumper.

3.Install the towing hook by turning itclockwise into the hole until it isfully secured.

4.Remove the towing hook andinstall the cover after use.

Emergency towing

CAUTION - Towing gear position

Always place the transaxle shiftlever in N (Neutral) when towingyour vehicle. Failure to place thetransaxle shift lever in N(Neutral) may cause internaldamage to the transaxle.

OYDM066003

OYDM066004

OYDM066014

• Front

• Rear (4 Door)

OYD066013

• Rear (5 Door)


6 29


If towing is necessary, we recom-mend you have it done by anauthorized Kia dealer or a com-mercial tow truck service.If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may betemporarily towed using a cable orchain secured to the emergency tow-ing hook under the front (or rear) ofthe vehicle. Use extreme cautionwhen towing the vehicle. A drivermust be in the vehicle to steer it andoperate the brakes.Towing in this manner may be doneonly on hard-surfaced roads for ashort distance and at low speeds.Also, the wheels, axles, power train,steering and brakes must all be ingood condition.• Do not use the towing hooks to pull

a vehicle out of mud, sand or otherconditions from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier thanthe vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other fre-quently.

• Attach a towing strap to the towinghook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle otherthan the tow hooks for towing maydamage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towingvehicles. Securely fasten the cableor chain to the towing hook provid-ed.

• Before emergency towing, checkthat the hook is not broken or dam-aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply itsteadily with even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, donot pull from the side or at a verti-cal angle. Always pull straightahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 16feet (5 m) long. Attach a white orred cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)wide) in the middle of the strap foreasy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towingstrap is not loosened during tow-ing.

OYF062017



306

Emergency towing precautions• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so

the steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking brake.• Press the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you willhave reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will berequired because the power steer-ing system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill,the brakes may overheat and brakeperformance will be reduced. Stopoften and let the brakes cool off.

If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can betowed only from the front. Be surethat the transmission is in neutral. Besure the steering is unlocked by plac-ing the ignition switch in the ACCposition. A driver must be in thetowed vehicle to operate the steeringand brakes.

CAUTION - Automatictransaxle/ Dual ClutchTransaxle

• To avoid serious damage tothe Automatic transaxle/ DualClutch Transaxle, limit thevehicle speed to 15 km/h (10mph) and drive less than 1.5km (1 mile) when towing.

• Before towing, check for anAutomatic transaxle/ DualClutch Transaxle fluid leakunder your vehicle. If theAutomatic transaxle/ DualClutch Transaxle fluid is leak-ing, a flatbed equipment ortowing dolly must be used.


Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9• Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

• Maintenance under severe usage conditions . . . . . . 7-24

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-26• Engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Fuel filter (for gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Vapor hose and fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

• Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Air cleaner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Manual transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Valve clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

• Brake hoses and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

• Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

• Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

• Exhaust pipe and muffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Suspension mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Dual clutch transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Drive shafts and boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35• Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

7


Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47

• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

• Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

• Low aspect ratio tire(if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

• Engine compartment fuse panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

• Engine room (Battery terminal cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77• Front lights replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77

• Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . 7-81

• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-81

• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

• License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

• Interior lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89

Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97• 1. Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

• 2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 7-97

• 3. Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100

7

YDM USA 7.QXP 2016-05-02 14:04 Page 2

7 3

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OYDM076017/OYDM076078

■■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 MPI Engine

❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 GDI Engine

1. Engine oil dipstick

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Radiator cap

5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Positive battery terminal

9. Negative battery terminal

10. Fuse box

* : if equipped


Maintenance

47

OJFA075002

■■ Gasoline Gamma 1.6T-GDI Engine

❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir


7 5

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost careto prevent damage to your vehicleand injury to yourself whenever per-forming any maintenance or inspec-tion procedures.Should you have any doubts con-cerning the inspection or servicing ofyour vehicle, we strongly recom-mend that you have an authorizedKia dealer perform this work.An authorized Kia dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kiaparts to service your vehicle proper-ly. For expert advice and quality serv-ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-cient servicing may result in opera-tional problems with your vehicle thatcould lead to vehicle damage, anaccident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsi-bility. You should retain documents thatshow proper maintenance has beenperformed on your vehicle in accor-dance with the scheduled mainte-nance service charts shown on thefollowing pages. You need this infor-mation to establish your compliancewith the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle war-ranties.Detailed warranty information isprovided in your Warranty &Consumer Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required asa result of improper maintenance ora lack of required maintenance arenot covered.We recommend you have your vehi-cle maintained and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer. An authorizedKia dealer meets Kia’s high servicequality standards and receives tech-nical support from Kia in order to pro-vide you with a high level of servicesatisfaction.

Maintenance


Maintenance

67

Owner maintenance precau-tions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section,several procedures can be done onlyby an authorized Kia dealer with spe-cial tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage. For details, readthe separate Warranty & ConsumerInformation manual provided withthe vehicle. If you're unsure aboutany servicing or maintenance proce-dure, have it done by an authorizedKia dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

Do not wear jewelry or looseclothing while working underthe hood of your vehicle withthe engine running. These canbecome entangled in movingparts, if you must run theengine while working under thehood, make certain that youremove all jewelry (especiallyrings, bracelets, watches, andnecklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar looseclothing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.


7 7

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checksand inspections that should be per-formed by the owner or an author-ized Kia dealer at the frequenciesindicated to help ensure safe,dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your deal-er as soon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checksare generally not covered by war-ranties and you may be charged forlabor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check the coolant level in coolant

reservoir.• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell ofexhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steer-ing effort or looseness in the steer-ing wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantlyturns slightly or “pulls” to one sidewhen traveling on smooth, levelroad.

• When stopping, listen and checkfor unusual sounds, pulling to oneside, increased brake pedal travelor “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in theoperation of your transaxle occurs,check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the airconditioning system during or afteruse is normal).

WARNING - Hot coolantBe careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hotcoolant and steam may blowout under pressure.


Maintenance

87

At least monthly:• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turnsignals and hazard warning flash-ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check the radiator, heater and air

conditioning hoses for leaks ordamage.

• Check the windshield washerspray and wiper operation. Cleanthe wiper blades with clean clothdampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.• Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :• Clean the body and door drain

holes.• Lubricate the door hinges and

check the hood hinges.• Lubricate the door and hood locks

and latches.• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system.• Check the power steering fluid

level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean the battery and terminals.• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.


7 9

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the vehicle is usuallyoperated where none of the followingconditions apply. If any of the followingconditions apply, follow theMaintenance Under Severe UsageConditions.• Repeated driving short distance of

less than 8 km (5 miles) in normaltemperature or less than 16 km(10miles) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or lowspeed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,unpaved, graveled or salt-spreadroads

• Driving in areas using salt or othercorrosive materials or in very coldweather

• Driving in heavy dust condition• Driving in heavy traffic area• Driving on uphill, downhill, or

mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper,or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, othercommercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 106mi/h (170km/h)• Frequently driving in stop-and-go

condition

If your vehicle is operated under theabove conditions, you shouldinspect, replace or refill more fre-quently than the following NormalMaintenance Schedule. After 120months or 150,000 miles continue tofollow the prescribed maintenanceintervals.


Maintenance

107

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, thefrequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.*1 : Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hardstarting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kiadealer for details.

*2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from yourauthorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

*4 : Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles (10,000km) or 6 months

*5 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.


7 11

Maintenance

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4

- MPI/GDI Engine: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

❑ Add fuel additive *2

(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean orreplace.

*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 6,500 miles (10,000 km)or 6 months


❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4




NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)




Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4







❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm balljoint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace air cleaner filter❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4







7 13

Maintenance





❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4

- MPI/GDI Engine: : Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months






❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4





Maintenance

147




- MPI/GDI Engine: : Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months


(Every 7,500miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)




❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72

months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *5

(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

(Continued)


7 15

Maintenance









(Continued)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4







Maintenance

167







(Every 7,500 miles (12,000km) or 12 months)




❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72


joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4


(Continued)

(Continued)






7 17

Maintenance




joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose


(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace air cleaner filter

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4

- MPI/GDI Engine: Every 7,500miles (12,000 km) or 12 months


(Every7,500miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)





Maintenance

187













❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72

months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball


- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - MPI/GDI Engine❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4





7 19

Maintenance


❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4



(Every7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)




Maintenance

207




joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *5

(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)



❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months afterevery 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)






7 21

Maintenance












❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 60,000 miles (96,000k m) or 72

months after every 15,000 miles (24,000km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball



(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4



(Every7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)


Maintenance

227











❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72


joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose

- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)❑ Rotate tires (Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

(Continued)


7 23

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Continued)



❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)






Maintenance

247

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONSThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Referto the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (MPI/GDI) REVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM)

OR 6 MONTHSA, B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, J, K

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (Turbo GDI) REVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM)

OR 6 MONTHSA, B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, J, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) A, C, E, F,G, H, I, J

(Continued)


7 25

Maintenance

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)

in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-ing temperature

B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-tances

C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or invery cold weather

E-Driving in heavy dust condition

F -Driving in heavy traffic areaG-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDITION

FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERSAND ROTORS

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR DISC BRAKE/PADS, PARKINGBRAKE

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPERARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS IEVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6

MONTHSC, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOREVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E


Maintenance

267

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSEngine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. If the caris being driven in severe conditions,more frequent oil and filter changesare required.

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oilsaturation and replace if necessary.Drive belts should be checked peri-odically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

Fuel filterA clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven,damage the emission system andcause multiple issues such as hardstarting. If an excessive amount offoreign matter accumulates in thefuel tank, the filter may requirereplacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run theengine for several minutes, andcheck for leaks at the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Fuel filter (for gasoline)Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped alifetime fuel filter that integrated withthe fuel tank. Regular maintenanceor replacement is not needed butdepends on fuel quality. If there aresome important safety matters likefuel flow restriction, surging, loss ofpower, hard starting problem etc, fuelfilter inspection or replace is needed.The fuel filter be Inspected orreplaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses andconnections for leakage and dam-age. Have an authorized Kia dealerreplace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler capThe vapor hose and fuel filler capshould be inspected at those inter-vals specified in the maintenanceschedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.


7 27

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhosesInspect the surface of hoses for evi-dence of heat and/or mechanicaldamage. Hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterio-ration. Particular attention should bepaid to examine those hose surfacesnearest to high heat sources, suchas the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assurethat the hoses do not come in con-tact with any heat source, sharpedges or moving component whichmight cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are pres-ent. Hoses should be replacedimmediately if there is any evidenceof deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filterA Genuine Kia air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugsMake sure to install new spark plugsof the correct heat range.

Cooling systemCheck cooling system components,such as radiator, coolant reservoir,hoses and connections for leakageand damage. Replace any damagedparts.

CoolantThe coolant should be changed atthe intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)Inspect the manual transaxle fluidaccording to the maintenance sched-ule.

Valve clearance (if equipped)Inspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if neces-sary. An authorized Kia dealershould perform the operation.


Maintenance

287

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)Automatic transaxle fluid should notbe checked under normal usageconditions.But in severe conditions, the fluidshould be changed at an authorizedKia dealer in accordance to thescheduled maintenance at the begin-ning of this chapter.

✽✽ NOTICEAutomatic transaxle fluid color isbasically red. As the vehicle is driven, the auto-matic transaxle fluid will begin tolook darker.It is normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replacethe fluid based upon the changedcolor.

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration andany leakage. Replace any deteriorat-ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch fluidCheck brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween “MIN” and “MAX” marks onthe side of the reservoir. Use onlyhydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brakeInspect the parking brake systemincluding the parking brake pedaland cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipersand rotorsCheck the pads for excessive wear,discs for run out and wear, andcalipers for fluid leakage.


7 29

Maintenance

Exhaust pipe and mufflerVisually inspect the exhaust pipes,muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-rioration, or damage. Start theengine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-nections or replace parts as neces-sary.

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connectionsfor looseness or damage. Retightento the specified torque.

Dual clutch transmission FluidInspect the dual clutch transmissionfluid according to the maintenanceschedule.

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engineoff, check for excessive free-play inthe steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or dam-age. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts.

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots andclamps for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines andconnections for leakage and dam-age.


Maintenance

307

ENGINE OILChecking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on levelground.

2. Start the engine and allow it toreach normal operating tempera-ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for afew minutes (about 5 minutes) forthe oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,and reinsert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andcheck the level. The level shouldbe between F and L.

WARNING - Radiatorhose

Be very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION - Replaceengine oil

Do not overfill with engine oil.Engine damage may result.

OYD076013L


7 31

Maintenance

If it is near or at L, add enough oil tobring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oilfrom being spilled on engine com-ponents.

Use only the specified engine oil.(Refer to “Recommended lubricantsand capacities” in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil andfilterHave engine oil and filter changed byan authorized Kia dealer accordingto the Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this chapter.

WARNING - Californiaproposition 65

Engine oil contains chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer, birth defectsand reproductive harm. Usedengine oil may cause irritationor cancer of the skin if left incontact with the skin for pro-longed periods of time. Alwaysprotect your skin by washingyour hands thoroughly withsoap and warm water as soonas possible after handling usedoil.

OYDM076084


Maintenance

327

ENGINE COOLANTThe high-pressure cooling systemhas a reservoir filled with year-roundantifreeze coolant. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, atthe beginning of the winter season,and before traveling to a colder cli-mate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connectionsof all cooling system hoses andheater hoses. Replace any swollenor deteriorated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F (MAX) and L (MIN) markson the side of the coolant reservoirwhen the engine is cool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant or distilled (deion-ized) water to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bringthe level to F (MAX), but do not over-fill. If frequent coolant addition isrequired, see an authorized Kia deal-er for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant• When adding coolant, use only

deionized water or soft water foryour vehicle and never mix hardwater in the coolant filled at the fac-tory. An improper coolant mixturecan result in serious malfunction orengine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-minum engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycolwith phosphate based coolant toprevent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the spec-ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or lessthan 35% antifreeze, which wouldreduce the effectiveness of thesolution.

WARNING - Cooling fanUse caution whenworking near theblade of the coolingfan. The electricmotor (cooling fan) is

controlled by engine coolanttemperature, refrigerant pres-sure and vehicle speed. It maysometimes operate even whenthe engine is not running.

OYDEMC2055


7 33

Maintenance

CAUTION - Removingradiator cap

Never attempt toremove the radiatorcap while the engineis operating or hot.Doing so might leadto cooling system andengine damage.

For mixture percentage, refer to thefollowing table.

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure.

OYD076028L


Maintenance

347

Turn the engine off and wait until itcools down. Use care when remov-ing the radiator cap. Wrap a thicktowel around it, and turn it counter-clockwise slowly to the first stop.Step back while the pressure isreleased from the cooling system.When you are sure all the pressurehas been released, press down onthe cap, using a thick towel, and con-tinue turning counterclockwise toremove it.

Changing the coolantHave the coolant changed by anauthorized Kia dealer according tothe Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this section.


7 35

Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID Checking the brake/clutch*fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir capand adding brake/clutch* fluid, cleanthe area around the reservoir capthoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*fluid contamination.

* if equipped

If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level. The level will fall withaccumulated mileage. This is a nor-mal condition associated with thewear of the brake linings and/orclutch disc (if equipped). If the fluidlevel is excessively low, have thebrake/clutch* system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch*fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-cants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

In the event the brake/clutch* systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.When changing and addingbrake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.Do not let it come in contact withyour eyes. If brake/clutch* fluidshould come in contact with youreyes, immediately flush them with alarge quantity of fresh tap water.Have your eyes examined by a doc-tor as soon as possible.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has beenexposed to open air for an extendedtime should never be used as itsquality cannot be guaranteed. Itshould be disposed of properly.

CAUTION - Brake/clutchfluid

Do not allow brake/clutch* fluidto contact the vehicle's bodypaint, as paint damage willresult.

CAUTION - Proper fluidOnly use brake/clutch fluid inbrake/clutch system. Smallamounts of improper fluids(such as engine oil) can causedamage to the brake/clutch sys-tem.

OYD076024L


Maintenance

367

WASHER FLUIDChecking the washer fluidlevel

Check the fluid level in the washerfluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-sary. Plain water may be used ifwasher fluid is not available.However, use washer solvent withantifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parkingbrake by counting the number of“clicks’’ heard while fully applying itfrom the released position. Also, theparking brake alone should securelyhold the vehicle on a fairly steepgrade. If the stroke is more or lessthan specified, have the parkingbrake adjusted by an authorized Kiadealer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 44lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

WARNING - Windshieldfluid

Do not drink the windshieldwasher fluid. The windshieldwasher fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and maycause loss of vehicle control.

WARNING - Flammablefluid

Do not allow the washer fluid tocome in contact with openflames or sparks.The windshieldwasher fluid reservoir is flamma-ble under certain circumstances.This can result in a fire.

OMD070007

OYDDDR2105

PARKING BRAKE


7 37

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary,and should not be washed.You can clean the filter when inspect-ing the air cleaner element.Clean the filter by using compressedair.

1. Loosen the air cleaner coverattaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.3. Replace the air cleaner filter.4. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

OMD070011 OMD070012

OMD070010


Maintenance

387

Replace the filter according to theMaintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is operated in extreme-ly dusty or sandy areas, replace theelement more often than the usualrecommended intervals. (Refer to“Maintenance under severe usageconditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION - Air filter maintenance

• Do not drive with the air clean-er removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust ordirt does not enter the airintake, or damage may result.

• Use a Kia genuine part. Use ofnongenuine part could dam-age the air flow sensor.


7 39

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)Filter inspectionThe climate control air filter shouldbe replaced according to theMaintenance Schedule. If the vehicleis operated in severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for along period, it should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier.When you replace the climate controlair filter, replace it performing the fol-lowing procedure, and be careful toavoid damaging other components.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and pull thesupport strap (1).

2. With the glove box open, removethe stoppers on both sides.

OYDDMC2005

OYDDMC2006


Maintenance

407

3. Remove the climate control air fil-ter case by pulling out both sidesof the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air fil-ter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse orderof disassembly.

When replacing the climate controlair filter install it properly. Otherwise,the system may produce noise andthe effectiveness of the filter may bereduced.

OMG079027OYDDMC2007


7 41

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES Blade inspection

Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-shield or the wiper blades with for-eign matter can reduce the effective-ness of the windshield wipers.Common sources of contaminationare insects, tree sap, and hot waxtreatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are notwiping properly, clean both the win-dow and the blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent, and rinsethoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer cleanadequately, the blades may be wornor cracked, and require replacement.To prevent damage to the wiper armsor other components, do not attemptto move the wipers manually.The use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

1JBA5122CAUTION - Wiper blades

To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.


Maintenance

427

Front windshield wiper blade

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn thewiper blade assembly to exposethe plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip (1) and slidethe blade assembly downward (2).

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

1LDA5023

CAUTION - Wiper armsDo not allow the wiper arm tofall against the windshield,since it may chip or crack thewindshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OHM078059


7 43

Maintenance

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Thenpull down the blade assembly andremove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly inthe reverse order of removal.

OHM078060 OHG070043


Maintenance

447

BATTERYFor best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mount-ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated withpetroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte fromthe battery immediately with asolution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to beused for an extended time, discon-nect the battery cables.

WARNING - Risk of explosion

Keep lit cigarettes andall other flames orsparks away from thebattery.The battery containshydrogen -- a highlycombustible gas whichwill explode if it comesin contact with a flame orspark.

WARNING - Sulfuric acidin batteries

Keep batteries out of thereach of childrenbecause batteries con-tain highly corrosiveSULFURIC ACID andelectrolytes. Do notallow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.Wear eye protectionwhen charging or work-ing near a battery.Always provide ventila-tion when working in anenclosed space.

OYDDMC2008


7 45

Maintenance

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention.If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feelpain or burning sensation,get medical attention imme-diately.An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful to theenvironment and humanhealth. Dispose the batteryaccording to your local law(s)or regulation.The battery contains lead. Donot dispose of it after use.Please return the battery toan authorized Kia dealer tobe recycled.

When the vehicle remains unused fora long time while tempertures arelow, disconnect the battery and keepit indasrs.

WARNING - Recharging battery

Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

WARNING - Risk of elec-trocution

Never touch the electrical igni-tion system while the vehicle isrunning. This system workswith high voltage which can"zap" you.

WARNING - California proposition 65

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer, birthdefects and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer.Wash hands after handling.


Maintenance

467

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-ple, the headlights or interior lightswere left on while the vehicle wasnot in use), recharge it by slowcharging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load whilethe vehicle is being used, rechargeit at 20-30A for two hours.

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed from

the vehicle and placed in an areawith good ventilation.

• Watch the battery during charging,and stop or reduce the chargingrate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or if thetemperature of the electrolyte ofany cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.• Before performing maintenance or

recharging the battery, turn off allaccessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must beremoved first and installed lastwhen the battery is disconnected.

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the bat-tery has been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Auto down window (See chapter 4)• Sunroof (See chapter 4)• Trip computer (See chapter 4)• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)• Clock (See chapter 4)• Audio (See chapter 4)


7 47

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less thanone mile (1.6 km).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.For recommended inflation pressurerefer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the driver’s side centerpillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Inflate your tires consistent withthe instructions provided in thismanual. Severe underinflation(10 psi (70 kPa) or more) canlead to severe heat build-up,causing blowouts, tread separa-tion and other tire failures thatcan result in the loss of vehiclecontrol.This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.

OMD060012N


Maintenance

487

• Underinflation also results inexcessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheeldeformation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greater pos-sibility of damage from road haz-ards.

• Warm tires normally exceed rec-ommended cold tire pressures by 4to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do notrelease air from warm tires toadjust the pressure or the tires willbe underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve cap,dirt or moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage. Ifa valve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

Always observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the tires

are cold. (After vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours orhasn't been driven more than onemile (1.6 km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle. Becareful not to overload a vehicleluggage rack if your vehicle isequipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gauge to checktire pressure. You can not tell if yourtires are properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol and potential injury.


7 49

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gauge. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

• Inspect your tires frequently forproper inflation as well as wear anddamage. Always use a tire pres-sure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehicle con-trol, and sudden tire failure leadingto accidents, injuries, and evendeath. The recommended cold tirepressure for your vehicle can befound in this manual and on the tirelabel located on the driver's sidecenter pillar.

• Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Kia recommendsthat you check the spare everytime you check the pressure of theother tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter8.


Maintenance

507

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have an direc-tional tread pattern only from front torear and not from right to left.Do not use the compact spare tire fortire rotation.

Wheel alignment and tire bal-ance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING - Mixing tiretypes

Do not mix bias ply and radialply tires under any circum-stances.This may cause unusu-al handling characteristics.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

CAUTION - Wheel weightImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.


7 51

Maintenance

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. Tire size canaffect wheel speed. When replacingtires, all 4 tires must use the samesize originally supplied with the vehi-cle. Using tires of a different size cancause the ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem) and ESC (ElectronicStability Control) (if equipped) towork irregularly.

✽✽ NOTICEWe recommend replacing tires withthe same make and model originallysupplied with the vehicle; not doingso may affect driving performance.

Compact spare tire replacement A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator


Maintenance

527

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.A wheel that is not the correct sizemay adversely affect wheel andbearing life, braking and stoppingabilities, handling characteristics,ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-ance, snow chain clearance,speedometer and odometer calibra-tion, headlight aim and bumperheight.

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. Slow down whenever thereis rain, snow or ice on the road, toreduce the possibility of losing con-trol of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

CAUTION - WheelWheels that do not meet Kia'sspecifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to thevehicle or unusual handling andpoor vehicle control.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7


7 53

Maintenance

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P205/55R16 89H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengervehicles or light trucks; however,not all tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).16 - Rim diameter in inches.

89 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger vehicles. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)T 118 mph (190 km/h)H 130 mph (210 km/h)V 149 mph (240 km/h)Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol


Maintenance

547

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date,(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2016.

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

WARNING - Tire ageReplace tires within the recom-mended time frame. Failure toreplace tires as recommendedcan result in sudden tire failure,which could lead to a loss ofcontrol and an accident.


7 55

Maintenance

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width.For example:TREADWEAR 440 TRACTION A TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regardlessof the remaining tread, we recom-mend that tires be replaced afterapproximately six (6) years of nor-mal service. Heat caused by hot cli-mates or frequent high loading con-ditions can accelerate the agingprocess.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.


Maintenance

567

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the labora-tory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire terminology and definitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransaxle, power seats, and air con-ditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.


7 57

Maintenance

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-ed by its manufacturer as primarilyintended for use on lightweight trucksor multipurpose passenger vehicles.Load ratings: The maximum loadthat a tire is rated to carry for a giveninflation pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 150pounds (68 kg).Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallelcords.

Pneumatic tire: A mechanicaldevice made of rubber, chemicals,fabric and steel or other materials,that, when mounted on an automo-tive wheel, provides the traction andcontains the gas or fluid that sustainsthe load.Production options weight: Thecombined weight of installed regularproduction options weighing over 5lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standarditems which they replace, not previ-ously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavyduty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,heavy duty battery, and special trim.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seated.


Maintenance

587

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wear bars,"that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire dueto curb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.If you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.


7 59

Maintenance

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your vehicle is equippedwith snow tires.

Tire chainsTire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels.Be sure that the chains are installedin accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.• When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

• If you hear noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels.In unavoidable circumstances, usea wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59inches (15 mm) to prevent damageto the chain’s connection.

Radial-ply tiresRadial-ply tires provide improvedtread life, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radi-al-ply tires used on this vehicle areof belted construction and are select-ed to complement the ride and han-dling characteristics of your vehicle.Radial-ply tires have the same loadcarrying capacity as bias-ply or biasbelted tires of the same size and usethe same recommended inflationpressure. Mixing of radial-ply tireswith bias-ply or bias belted tires isnot recommended. Any combina-tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or biasbelted tires when used on the samevehicle will seriously deterioratevehicle handling. The best rule to fol-low is: identical radial-ply tires shouldalways be used as a set of four.


Maintenance

607

Longer wearing tires can be moresusceptible to irregular tread wear. Itis very important to follow the tirerotation interval shown in this sectionto achieve the tread life potential ofthese tires. Cuts and punctures inradial-ply tires are repairable only inthe tread area, because of sidewallflexing. Consult your tire dealer forradial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire(if equipped)Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspectratio is lower than 50, are providedfor sporty looks.Because the low aspect ratio tiresare optimized for handling and brak-ing, it may be more uncomfortable toride in and there is more noise com-pare with normal tires.

✽✽ NOTICE• It is not easy to recognize the tire

damage with your own eyes. But ifthere is the slightest hint of tiredamage, even though you cannotsee the tire damage with your owneyes have the tire checked orreplaced because the tire damagemay cause air leakage from thetire.

• If the tire is damaged by drivingon a rough road, off road, pothole,manhole, or curb stone, it will notbe covered by the warranty.

• You can find out the tire informa-tion on the tire sidewall.

CAUTIONBecause the sidewall of the lowaspect ratio tire is shorter thanthe normal, the wheel and tire ofthe low aspect ratio tire is easi-er to be damaged. So, follow theinstructions below.- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiouslybecause tires and wheels maybe damaged. And after driving,inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,speed bump, manhole, or curbstone, drive slowly so that thetires and wheels are not dam-aged.

- If the tire is impacted, we rec-ommend that you inspect thetire condition or contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire,inspect the tire condition andpressure every 3,000km.


7 61

Maintenance

FUSESA vehicle's electrical system is protect-ed from electrical overload damage byfuses.This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, onelocated in the driver's side panel bol-ster, others in the engine compart-ment near the battery.If any of your vehicle's lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, checkthe appropriate circuit fuse. If a fusehas blown, the element inside the fusewill be melted.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver's side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with oneof the same rating.Before replacing a blown fuse, moveto safe place, turn off the engine andall electric devices, and disconnect thenegative battery cable.If the replacement fuse blows, thisindicates an electrical problem. Avoidusing the system involved and we rec-ommend that you consult an author-ized Kia dealer.Four kinds of fuses are used: bladetype for lower amperage rating, car-tridge type, battery fuse terminal andmulti fuse type for higher amperageratings.

Do not arbitrarily modify or add-onelectric wiring to the vehicle.

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire or aluminumfoil instead of the proper fuse -even as a temporary repair. Itmay cause extensive wiringdamage and a possible fire.

CAUTION - Fuse replace-ment

Do not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to removefuses because it may cause ashort circuit and damage thesystem.

OXM073122

Normal

Normal

■ Blade type

■ Cartridge type

■ Multi fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

Normal Blown


Maintenance

627

✽✽ NOTICEThe actual fuse/relay panel labelmay differ depending on equip-ment/options.

Instrument panel fuse replace-ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

CAUTION - Fuse replace-ment

Do not input any other objectsexcept fuses or relays intofuse/relay terminals such as adriver or wiring. It may causecontact failure and system mal-function.

OYDDMC2009

WARNING - Electrical Fire• Always ensure replacements

fuses and relays are securelyfastened when installed.Failure to do so can result in avehicle fire.

• We recommend that you do notremove fuses, relays and termi-nals that are fastened withbolts or nuts. If they are notcompletely re-installed, suchlooseness may cause electricalarcing and a possible fire. Iffuses, relays and terminals fas-tened with bolts or nuts needreplacement, consult with anauthorized Kia dealer.


7 63

Maintenance

3. Pull the suspected fuse straightout. Use the removal tool providedin the engine compartment fusepanel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedKia dealer.If you do not have a spare, use afuse of the same rating from a circuityou may not need for operating thevehicle, such as the cigarette lighterfuse.

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and thefuses are OK, check the fuse panelin the engine compartment. If a fuseis blown, it must be replaced.

Fuse switch

Your vehicle is equipped with a fuseswitch to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without beingoperated for prolonged periods.Use the following procedures beforeparking the vehicle for prolongedperiods.1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail

lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover

and move the fuse switch up to theOFF position.

OYDDMC2040

OYDDMC2010


Maintenance

647

✽✽ NOTICE• If the fuse switch is in the OFF

position, the warning chime,audio, clock and interior lamps,etc., will not operate. Some itemsmust be reset after replacement.Refer to “Battery” in this chapter.

• Even when the fuse switch is in theOFF position, the battery can stillbe discharged by operation of theheadlights or other electricaldevices.

Engine compartment fusereplacement

1.Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2.Remove the fuse panel cover bypressing the tab and pulling thecover up.When the blade type fuse is dis-connected, remove it by using theclip designed for changing fuseslocated in the engine room fusebox. Upon removal, securely insertreserve fuse of equal quantity.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown. To remove or insertthe fuse, use the fuse puller in theengine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips. If it fits loosely, consultan authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Fuse panelcovers

After checking the fuse panel inthe engine compartment,securely install the fuse panelcover. If not, electrical failuresmay occur from water contact.

OYDDMC2011


7 65

Maintenance

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Turn off the engine.2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.4. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.5. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Remove the fuse panel in the

engine compartment.2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

OMD070022OMD070021

CAUTIONVisually inspect the battery capto ensure it is securely closed. Ifthe battery cap is not securelyclosed, moisture may enter thesystem and damage the electri-cal components.


Maintenance

667

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, youcan find the fuse/relay label describingfuse/relay name and capacity.

✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions inthis manual may be applicable toyour vehicle. It is accurate at thetime of printing. When you inspectthe fuse panel in your vehicle, referto the fuse panel label.

✽✽ NOTICEThe actual fuse/relay panel labelmay differ depending on equip-ment/options.

OYDNMC5014

OYDDMC2012


7 67

Maintenance

Engine compartment fusepanel


OYDM076074

OYDDMC2013


Maintenance

687

Engine room (Battery terminal cover)


OYDM076075

OYDNMC2059


7 69

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch

SPARE 4 25A -

P/WDW RH 25A Smart Junction Block (Power Window RH Relay), Passenger Safety Power Window Module

TRUNK 10A Smart Junction Box (Trunk Relay)

P/WDW LH 25A Smart Junction Block (Power Window LH Relay), Driver Safety Power Window Module

DR LOCK 20A Smart Junction Block (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay), ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)

SPARE 3 20A -

POWER OUTLET 1 20A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Cigarette Lighter)

S/HEATER RR 20A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH

MODULE 8 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module

SPARE 2 7.5A -

MODULE 9 15A Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Handle

MODULE 1 10ASmart Key Control Module, BCM, Digital Clock, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power OutsideMirror Switch

A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay, GSL PTC Heater Relay)

MODULE 5 7.5ADriver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, RearSeat Warmer LH/RH, Sunroof

HTD MIRR 10A ECM/PCM, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

INTERIOR LAMP 7.5ATrunk Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp

MODULE 6 7.5A Key Solenoid

PDM 2 7.5A [With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module

SUNROOF 20A Sunroof


Maintenance

707

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected

MODULE 2 10A

Electro Chromic Mirror, Multipurpose Check Connector, A/C Control Module, Driver CCS Switch,Driver/Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, DriverIMS Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, ATM Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Rear PowerWindow Switch LH/RH, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Audio, Dynamic Bending Light Module, ConsoleSwitch LH/RH

HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Heater

IG 1 20A W/O Smart Key : E/R Junction Block (Fuse - TCU1, ECU 3, ABS 3)

WIPER FRT 25A Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (Wiper Relay), Multifunction Switch (Wiper)

MULTIMEDIA 2 7.5A -

MEMORY 7.5ADriver IMS Module, BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, InstrumentCluster, Data Link Connector, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror,

MODULE 7 10A ICM Relay Box (Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay, Folding Relay, Unfolding Relay)

PDM 3 7.5A [With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module

MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit

MODULE 3 7.5A Instrument Cluster

START 7.5A[With Burglar Alarm & W/O Smart Key & W/O IMMO.] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)[W/O Burglar Alarm or With Smart Key or With IMMO.] Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch

MULTIMEDIA 1 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module

PDM 1 20A Smart Key Control Module

POWER OUTLET FRT 20A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Power Outlet)

A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

MODULE 4 10ACrash Pad Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Digital Clock, BCM, Blind SpotDetection Radar LH/RH, MDPS Unit, AEB Module,Sport Mode Switch, AEB Radar

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Weight Classification Module


7 71

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel


MULTI FUSE

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit

B+1 60A Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 1 (4CH), Fuse - MODULE6, MODULE7, MODULE9,P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH, TRUNK)

ABS 1 40A ESC Module

C/FAN 40A C/Fan Relay

RR HTD 40A RR HTD Relay

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

GSL PTC HEATER 60A GSL PTC Heater Relay

B+2 60A Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 3 (4CH), ARISU-LT IPS 4 (4CH), IPS 5 (2CH), Fuse -PDM 1, P/SEAT DRV BRAKE SWITCH, S/HEATER RR)

FUSE

B/UP LAMP 10A A/T,DCT : Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear CombinationLamp (In) LH/RH M/T : Back-Up Lamp Switch

TCU 1 15A A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, DCT : Transaxle Range Switch, TCM


ECU 3 10A ECM/PCM, Vacuum Pump

A/CON SWITCH 10A A/C Control Module, Blower Motor, Blower Relay, ECM/PCM, Blower Resistor

WIPER FRT 10A ECM/PCM, Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (Wiper FRT Relay)

B+3 50A Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse - PDM 2, DR LOCK, SUNROOF)

ECU 6 40A EMS Block (Engine Control Relay, Fuse - ECU 4, A/CON, F/PUMP)

GSL PTC HEATER 50A GSL PTC HEATER RELAY

DEICER 15A ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)

STOP LAMP 10A Stop Signal Electronic Module


Maintenance

727


FUSE

S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module

HORN 15A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)

ECU 5 15A ECM/PCM

IG 2 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, Start 1 Relay, With Smart Key : PDM 4 (IG2) Relay, Start 1Relay


IG 1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key : PDM 3 (IG1) Relay, PDM 2 (ACC) Relay

WIPER RR 15A Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor, ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Ignition Switch,PDM 4 (IG2) Relay

TCU 3 40A TCM

TCU 2 20A TCM

TCU 4 40A TCM


7 73

Maintenance

Fuse & Relay Box( NU 2.0L MPI/ NU 2.0 GDI)

Relay NO. Relay Name TypeE41 RR HTD RELAY PLUG MICRO

E42 WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO

E43 GSL PTC RELAY PLUG MICRO

E44 PDM 2 (ACC) RELAY PLUG MICRO

E45 START 1 RELAY PLUG MICRO

E46 PDM 3 (IG1) RELAY PLUG MICRO

E47 C/FAN RELAY PLUG MINI

E48 HORN RELAY PLUG MICRO


E50 BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO

E52 C/FAN 2 RELAY PLUG MICRO

Junction Block (GAMMA 1.6L T-GDI)

Relay NO. Relay Name TypeE41 RR HTD RELAY PLUG MICRO

E42 WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO

E43 GSL PTC RELAY PLUG MICRO

E44 PDM 2 (ACC) RELAY PLUG MICRO

E45 START 1 RELAY PLUG MICRO


E47 C/FAN RELAY PLUG MINI

E48 HORN RELAY PLUG MICRO


E50 BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO

E52 C/FAN 2 RELAY PLUG MICRO


Maintenance

747

EMS Block (NU 2.0L MPI)

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected F/PUMP 20A F/Pump Relay

ECU 4 15A PCM

A/CON 15A A/CON COMP Relay

INJECTOR 10A EMS Block (F/Pump Relay)

SPARE 10A -

IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, EMS Block (F/PUMP Relay)

ECU 1 20A ECM/PCM

SENSOR 2 10A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CONCOMP Relay) Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)

SENSOR 1 10A Oil Control Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust), Oil Control Valve #3 (Signal), ElectronicThermostat

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 15A -

SPARE 20A -

Relay Name TypeENGINE CONTROL RELAY PCB

A/CON COMP RELAY PLUG MICRO

F/PUMP RELAY PLUG MICRO


7 75

Maintenance

EMS Block (NU 2.0L GDI)


ECU 4 15A PCM/ECM



ECU 2 10A PCM/ECM

IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser

ECU 1 20A PCM/ECM

SENSOR 2 10A

Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CONCOMP Relay)Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)Oil ControlValve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 15A -

SPARE 20A -


A/CON COMP RELAY PCB

F/PUMP RELAY PCB


Maintenance

767

EMS Block GAMMA 1.6L T-GDI


ECU 4 15A PCM/ECM



ECU 2 10A PCM/ECM

IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser

ECU 1 20A PCM/ECM

SENSOR 2 10A

Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CONCOMP Relay)Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)Oil ControlValve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 15A -

SPARE 20A -


A/CON COMP RELAY PCB

F/PUMP RELAY PCB


7 77

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

If you don’t have necessary tools, thecorrect bulbs and the expertise, con-sult an authorized Kia dealer. Inmany cases, it is difficult to replacevehicle light bulbs because otherparts of the vehicle must be removedbefore you can get to the bulb. This isespecially true if you have to removethe headlight assembly to get to thebulb(s). Removing/installing theheadlight assembly can result indamage to the vehicle.

Front lights replacement

(1) Headlight (High)(2) Headlight (Low)(3) Front turn signal light(4) Front fog light*(5) Front position light*(6) Side marker

* : if equipped

WARNING - LightsPrior to working on the light,firmly apply the parking brake,ensure that the ignition switchis turned to the “LOCK” positionand turn off the lights to avoidburning your fingers or receiv-ing an electric shock.

CAUTION - Light replacement

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the samewattage rating. Otherwise, itmay cause damage to the fuseor electric wiring system.

OYDM076048


Maintenance

787

Headlight bulb Always handle them carefully, andavoid scratches and abrasions. If thebulbs are lit, avoid contact with liq-uids. Never touch the glass with barehands. Residual oil may cause thebulb to overheat and burst when lit. Abulb should be operated only wheninstalled in a headlight.If a bulb becomes damaged orcracked, replace it immediately andcarefully dispose of it.Wear eye protection when changinga bulb. Allow the bulb to cool downbefore handling it.

Headlight (bulb type)

1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the hood.3. Remove the headlight bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.4. Disconnect the headlight bulb

socket-connector.5. Remove the bulb from the head-

light assembly.6. Install a new headlight bulb.7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-

connector.8. Install the headlight bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

OHD076046

WARNING - Halogenbulbs

Handle halogen bulbs with care.Halogen bulbs contain pressur-ized gas that will produce flyingpieces of glass if broken.

OYD076010L

Low HIgh


7 79

Maintenance

If the headlight aiming adjustment isnecessary after the headlightassembly is reinstalled, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

Front side marker/Front turn sig-nal light

1. Open the hood.2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.3. Loosen the retaining bolts and

remove the headlamp assemblyfrom the body of the vehicle. If youcan reach to the bulb withoutremoving the headlamp assembly,you don’t need to do step 3.

4. Disconnect the power connector(s) from the back of the headlamp assembly.

Front side marker

5. Remove the socket from theassembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

6. Pull the bulb out of the socket.7. Insert a new bulb.8. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

9. Reinstall the headlamp assembly,bumper to the body of the vehicle.

OYDDMC2043

OYDM076073


Maintenance

807

Front turn signal light


6. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.

7. Insert a new bulb by inserting itinto the socket and rotating it untilit locks into place.

8. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

Front fog light (if equipped)

1. Turn off the engine.2. Remove the under cover by rotat-

ing the screws.3. Reach your hand into the back of

the front bumper.4. Disconnect the power connector.

OYD076085L OYD076012L

OYDM076083

■ 4 Door, 5 Door

■ 5 Door Turbo


7 81

Maintenance

5.Remove the bulb-socket from thehousing by turning the socketcounter clockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe housing.

6.Install the new bulb-socket into thehousing by aligning the tabs on thesocket with the slots in the hous-ing.Push the socket into the housingand turn the socket clockwise.

7.Connect the power connector.8.Reinstall the front under cover.

Outside Mirrors with TurnSignal Indicators (if equipped)

If the light (LED) does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer

Rear combination lamp bulbreplacement

(1) Tail and Stop and Side marker lamp(2) Tail and Side marker lamp(3) Tail lamp(4) Stop lamp(5) Back up lamp(6) Rear turn signal lamp

OYDDMC2017

OYDM076079

OYDM076080

• 4 DoorType A

• 4 DoorType B


Maintenance

827

(1) Stop and tail lamp(2) Tail lamp(3) Back-up lamp(4) Rear turn signal lamp(5) Tail stop lamp or stop lamp (LED)If the light (LED) does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer

Outside lamp

• 4 Door1. Open the trunk lid.2. Remove the service cover by

pulling out the service cover.

• 5 Door1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the tailgate.3. Loosen the light assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-driver.

4. Remove the rear combination lightassembly from the body of thevehicle.

OYDDMC2029

• 4 Door

OYDDMC3064

• 5 Door

OYDDMC3075

OYDDMC3063

• 5 DoorType A

• 5 DoorType B


7 83

Maintenance




8. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into the assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

9. Reinstall the light assembly to thebody of the vehicle.

Stop/Tail lamp and turn signallamp

OYDDMC3068

• 5 Door

OYDDMC2030

OYDDMC2031

• 4 DoorType A

• 4 DoorType B


Maintenance

847





5. Install the service cover by puttingit into the service hole.

Stop and tail light (LED type)

If the light does not operate, we rec-ommend that the system be checkedby an authorized Kia dealer.

Inside lamp

• 4 Door1. Open the trunk.2. Loosen the retaining screw of the

trunk lid cover and then removethe cover.

OYDDMC3068

OYDDMC3067

• 5 DoorType A

• 5 DoorType B OYDDMC2021

OYDDMC2022CN

• 4 Door


7 85

Maintenance

3. Disconnect the connector andthen remove the nuts by turningthe nuts counter clockwise.

• 4 DoorBack up lamp

1. Take the lamp assembly out.2. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket.5. Install the light assembly to the

trunk.6. Reinstall the nuts and connector

and then the trunk lid cover bypushing in the screw.

• 5 Door1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the tailgate.3. Remove the service cover.

OYDDMC2023

OYDDMC3065

OYDDMC3070

• 5 Door


Maintenance

867





8. Install the service cover by puttingit into the service hole.

Stop/tail light (LED type)

If the light does not operate, we rec-ommend that the system be checkedby an authorized Kia dealer.

High mounted stop lampreplacement

• 4 Door1. Open the trunk.2. Remove the socket by turning it

counterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots.




OYD046058

OYDDMC2025

• 4 Door


7 87

Maintenance

• 5 Door1. Open the tailgate.2. Gently remove the center cover of

the rear tailgate trim.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Loosen the retaining nuts andremove the spoiler.

5. Remove the high mounted stoplamp assembly (A) after looseningthe nuts and washer nozzle (B).

6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly inthe reverse order of removal.

OYDDMC3072

OYDDMC3074

• 5 Door

OYDDMC3073 OYDDMC3071

B

A


Maintenance

887

License plate lamp bulbreplacement

1. Remove the cover by pressing itas direction of the arrows.

2. Remove the socket by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the bulb assembly

securely with the retaining screws.

OYDDMC2032

Vanity mirror lamp

Front map lamp

OVG079040Glove box lamp

OYDEMC2065

OJF075144LLuggage lamp (if equipped)• 4 Door

Room lamp

OMD070045Luggage lamp (if equipped)• 5 Door

OYDDMC3076

OMD070043


7 89

Maintenance

Interior lamp bulb replacement1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interiorlamp housing notches and snapthe lens into place.

WARNING Prior to working on the InteriorLamps, ensure that the “OFF”button is depressed to avoidburning your fingers or receiv-ing an electric shock.

CAUTION - Interior lightsUse care not to dirty or damagelens, lens tab, and plastic hous-ings.


Maintenance

907

APPEARANCE CAREExterior careExterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warningand caution statements that appearon the label.

Finish maintenanceWashing

To help protect your vehicle’s finishfrom rust and deterioration, wash itthoroughly and frequently at leastonce a month with lukewarm or coldwater.

If you use your vehicle for off-roaddriving, you should wash it after eachoff-road trip. Pay special attention tothe removal of any accumulation ofsalt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-rials. Make sure the drain holes in thelower edges of the doors and rockerpanels are kept clear and clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similardeposits can damage your vehicle’sfinish if not removed immediately.Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water.Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.After washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired, drythe brakes by applying them lightlywhile maintaining a slow forwardspeed.

CAUTION - HeadlightLens

To prevent damage, do notclean headlight lens with chem-ical solvents or strong deter-gents.

CAUTION• Do not use strong soap, chem-

ical detergents or hot water,and do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight or when thebody of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing theside windows of your vehicle.Especially, with high-pressurewater. Water may leak throughthe windows and wet the inte-rior.

• To prevent damage to theplastic parts and lamps, donot clean with chemical sol-vents or strong detergents.


7 91

Maintenance

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-ers, make sure to maintain suffi-cient distance from the vehicle.Insufficient clearance or excessivepressure can lead to componentdamage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensorsor its surrounding area directly witha high pressure washer. Shockapplied from high pressure watermay cause the device to not oper-ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close toboots (rubber or plastic covers) orconnectors as they may be dam-aged if they come into contact withhigh pressure water.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehiclebefore waxing. Use a good qualityliquid or paste wax, and follow themanufacturer’s instructions. Wax allmetal trim to protect it and to main-tain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-als with a spot remover will usuallystrip the wax from the finish. Be sure tore-wax these areas even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not yet need waxing.CAUTION - Wetting engine

• Water washing in the enginecompartment including highpressure water washing maycause the failure of electricalcircuits located in the enginecompartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

OJB037800

CAUTION - Drying vehicle• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth willscratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-sive cleaners, or strong deter-gents containing highly alka-line or caustic agents onchrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This mayresult in damage to the protec-tive coating and cause discol-oration or paint deterioration.


Maintenance

927

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quicklyrust and may develop into a majorrepair expense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged andrequires any metal repair orreplacement, be sure the body shopapplies anti-corrosion materials tothe parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper orother sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply acoating of wax or chrome preser-vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal partswith a heavier coating of wax orpreservative. If necessary, coat theparts with non-corrosive petroleumjelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control maycollect on the underbody. If thesematerials are not removed, acceler-ated rusting can occur on underbodyparts such as the fuel lines, frame,floor pan and exhaust system, eventhough they have been treated withrust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with luke-warm or cold water once a month,after off-road driving and at the end ofeach winter. Pay special attention tothese areas because it is difficult tosee all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to wet down theroad grime without removing it. Thelower edges of doors, rocker panels,and frame members have drain holesthat should not be allowed to clog withdirt; trapped water in these areas cancause rusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coatedwith a clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, orwire brushes on aluminum wheels.They may scratch or damage thefinish.

• Clean the wheel when it hascooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutraldetergent, and rinse thoroughlywith water. Also, be sure to cleanthe wheels after driving on saltedroads. This helps prevent corro-sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels withhigh-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or aciddetergent. It may damage and cor-rode the aluminum wheels coatedwith a clear protective finish.


7 93

Maintenance

Corrosion protectionProtecting your vehicle from corro-sion

By using the most advanced designand construction practices to combatcorrosion, we produce vehicles ofthe highest quality. However, this isonly part of the job. To achieve thelong-term corrosion resistance yourvehicle can deliver, the owner'scooperation and assistance is alsorequired.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-sion on your vehicle are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneaththe vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protectivecoatings by stones, gravel, abra-sion or minor scrapes and dentswhich leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-cle is regularly exposed to corrosivematerials, corrosion protection isparticularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated cor-rosion are road salts, dust controlchemicals, ocean air and industrialpollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions inwhich corrosion is most likely tooccur. For example, corrosion isaccelerated by high humidity, partic-ularly when temperatures are justabove freezing. In such conditions,the corrosive material is kept in con-tact with the vehicle surfaces bymoisture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosivebecause it dries slowly and holdsmoisture in contact with the vehicle.Although the mud appears to be dry,it can still retain the moisture andpromote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler-ate corrosion of parts that are notproperly ventilated so the moisturecan be dispersed. For all these rea-sons, it is particularly important tokeep your vehicle clean and free ofmud or accumulations of other mate-rials. This applies not only to the vis-ible surfaces but particularly to theunderside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion fromgetting started by observing the fol-lowing:


Maintenance

947

Keep your vehicle cleanThe best way to prevent corrosion isto keep your vehicle clean and freeof corrosive materials. Attention tothe underside of the vehicle is partic-ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area— where road salts are used, nearthe ocean, areas with industrialpollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to preventcorrosion. In winter, hose off theunderside of your vehicle at leastonce a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath thevehicle, give particular attention tothe components under the fendersand other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; justdampening the accumulated mudrather than washing it away willaccelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularlyeffective in removing accumulatedmud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame mem-bers, be sure that drain holes arekept open so that moisture canescape and not be trapped insideto accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dryDon't park your vehicle in a damp,poorly ventilated garage. This cre-ates a favorable environment for cor-rosion. This is particularly true if youwash your vehicle in the garage ordrive it into the garage when it is stillwet or covered with snow, ice ormud. Even a heated garage can con-tribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condi-tionScratches or chips in the finishshould be covered with "touch-up"paint as soon as possible to reducethe possibility of corrosion. If baremetal is showing through, the atten-tion of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings arehighly corrosive and may damagepainted surfaces in just a few hours.Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

Don't neglect the interiorMoisture can collect under the floormats and carpeting and cause corro-sion. Check under the mats periodi-cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertil-izers, cleaning materials or chemi-cals in the car.These should be carried only inproper containers and any spills orleaks should be cleaned up, flushedwith clean water and thoroughlydried.


7 95

Maintenance

Interior careInterior general precautions Prevent chemicals such as perfume,cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-er, and air freshener from contactingthe interior parts because they maycause damage or discoloration. Ifthey do contact the interior parts,wipe them off immediately. See theinstructions for the proper way toclean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-rior trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt fromvinyl with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with avinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-ric with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-tion recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Remove fresh spots imme-diately with a fabric spot cleaner. Iffresh spots do not receive immediateattention, the fabric can be stainedand its color can be affected. Also, itsfire-resistant properties can bereduced if the material is not proper-ly maintained.Using anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

CAUTION - Electrical components

Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

CAUTION - LeatherWhen cleaning leather products(steering wheel, seats etc.), useneutral detergents or low alco-hol content solutions. If you usehigh alcohol content solutionsor acid/alkaline detergents, thecolor of the leather may fade orthe surface may get stripped off.


Maintenance

967

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet. Followthe instructions provided with thesoap. Do not bleach or re-dye thewebbing because this may weakenit.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of thevehicle become fogged (that is, cov-ered with an oily, greasy or waxyfilm), they should be cleaned withglass cleaner. Follow the directionson the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear windowsDo not scrape or scratch theinside of the rear window. Thismay result in damage to the rearwindow defroster grid.


7 97

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMThe emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warrantyinformation contained in theWarranty & Consumer Informationmanual in your vehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with anemission control system to meet allapplicable emission regulations.There are three emission controlsystems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper functionof the emission control systems, it isrecommended that you have yourvehicle inspected and maintained byan authorized Kia dealer in accor-dance with the maintenance sched-ule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-ing, turn the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system off bypressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing iscompleted, turn the ESC systemback on by pressing the ESCswitch again.

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilationsystem is employed to prevent airpollution caused by blow-by gasesbeing emitted from the crankcase.This system supplies fresh filtered airto the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through thePCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-trol (including ORVR:Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.(The ORVR system is designed toallow the vapors from the fuel tank tobe loaded into a canister while refu-eling at the gas station, preventingthe escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)


Maintenance

987

CanisterFuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed inthe canister are drawn into the surgetank through the purge control sole-noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve(PCSV)The purge control solenoid valve iscontrolled by the Engine ControlModule (ECM); when the enginecoolant temperature is low duringidling, the PCSV closes so that evap-orated fuel is not taken into theengine. After the engine warms upduring ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel tothe engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission ControlSystem is a highly effective systemwhich controls exhaust emissionswhile maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your vehicle couldaffect its performance, safety ordurability and may even violate gov-ernmental safety and emissions reg-ulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modifi-cation may not be covered underwarranty.• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle tooperate abnormally, wire damage,battery discharge and fire. For yoursafety, do not use unauthorizedelectronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes.Therefore, if you smell exhaustfumes of any kind inside your vehi-cle, have it inspected and repairedimmediately. If you ever suspectexhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with allthe windows fully open. Have yourvehicle checked and repairedimmediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases containcarbon monoxide (CO). Thoughcolorless and odorless, it isdangerous and could be lethal ifinhaled. Follow the instructionson this page to avoid CO poi-soning.


7 99

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con-fined or closed areas (such asgarages) any more than what isnecessary to move the vehicle in orout of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a shorttime with the engine running,adjust the ventilation system (asneeded) to draw outside air into thevehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stoppedvehicle for any extended time withthe engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails tostart, excessive attempts to restartthe engine may cause damage tothe emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-alytic converter emission controldevice.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL forgasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle whenthere are signs of engine malfunc-tion, such as misfire or a noticeableloss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse theengine. Examples of misuse arecoasting with the ignition off anddescending steep grades in gearwith the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at highidle speed for extended periods (5minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with anypart of the engine or emission con-trol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, dam-aging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyt-ic converter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could voidyour warranties.

WARNING - Fire• Do not park, idle or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-ble objects, such as grass,vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.A hot exhaust system canignite flammable items underyour vehicle.

• Also, do not remove the heatsink around the exhaust sys-tem, do not seal the bottom ofthe vehicle or do not coat thevehicle for corrosion control.It may present a fire risk undercertain conditions.

WARNING - Catalytic converter

Keep away from the catalyticconverter and exhaust systemwhile the vehicle is running orimmediately thereafter. Theexhaust and catalytic systemsare very hot and may burn you.


Maintenance

1007

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICEPerchlorate Material-special han-dling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California VehicleDismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials,such as air bag inflators, seatbeltpretensioners and keyless remoteentry batteries, must be disposed ofaccording to Title 22 California Codeof Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).


Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-7• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle certificationlabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Consumer assistance (U.S. only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Electrical Equipment (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Reporting Safety Defects (u.s. only) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Online factory authorized manuals (U.S. Only) . 8-16

8


Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

28

ENGINEItem 2.0 MPI 2.0 GDI 1.6 Turbo GDI

Displacement [cu.in(cc)] 121.99 (1,999) 121.99 (1,999) 97.1 (1,591)

Bore x Stroke [in(mm)] 3.19 x 3.82 (81 x 97) 3.19 x 3.82 (81 x 97) 3.03 x 3.36 (77 x 85.4)

Firing order 1 → 3 → 4 → 2 1 → 3 → 4 → 2 1 → 3 → 4 → 2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line

DIMENSIONSItem in (mm)

Overall length4 Door 179.5 (4,560)5 Door 171.3 (4,350)

Overall width 70.1 (1,780)

Overall height4 Door 56.3 (1,430)5 Door 57.1 (1,450)

Front tread

195/65 R15 (Steel) 61.5 (1,563)205/55 R16 (Steel) 61.1 (1,553)205/55 R16 (Alloy) 61.2 (1,555)

P215/45 R17 (Alloy) 61.3 (1,557)P225/40 R18 (Alloy) 60.8 (1,545)

Rear tread

195/65 R15 (Steel) 62.0 (1,576)205/55 R16 (Steel) 61.6 (1,566)205/55 R16 (Alloy) 61.7 (1,568)

P215/45 R17 (Alloy) 61.8 (1,570)P225/40 R18 (Alloy) 61.3 (1,558)

Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700)


8 3


BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

(Continued)

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Front

Headlamps(Low) 55 H7Headlamps(Low)- HID * 25 D5SHeadlamps(High) 60 9005HL+ Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8WFront position lamps * 5 W5WFront position lamps (LED type)* LED LEDFront fog lamps * 35 H8Side Repeater lamps 5 WY5WSide Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) * LED LEDDaytime running lamps * LED LED

Rear

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)Bulb type

28 P28/8WRear tail lamps (Inside) 8 P28/8WRear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)

LED typeLED LED

Rear Stop/tail lamps (Inside) LED LEDRear turn signal lamps 27 PY27WBack-up lamps 16 W16W

High mounted stop lamp *4 Door*

Bulb type 21 P21WLED type LED LED

5 Door LED type LED LEDLicense plate lamps 5 W5W



48

(Continued)

* : If equipped

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Interior

Map lamps * 8 FESTOONRoom lamps 8 FESTOONVanity mirror lamps * 5 FESTOON

Luggage lamp *4 Door 5 FESTOON5 Door 8 FESTOON


8 5


TIRES AND WHEELS

CAUTIONWhen replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.Using tires of a different size may damage the related parts or cause them to operate improperly.

*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

*2 : If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, it will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit

*3 : Only for P225/40R18 Tire Size

Item Tire size Wheel size

Inflation pressure kPa (psi)Wheel lug nut torque

kgf•m (lbf•ft, N•m)Normal load *1 Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

195/65R15 91T 6.0J X15

230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)11~13

(79~94, 107~127)

205/55R16 91H 6.5J X16

P215/45R17 87H 7.0J X17

P225/40R18 88V 7.5J X18

Compact spare tire *2T125/80D15 95M 4.0T×15

420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)T125/80D16 97M *3 4.0T×16

✽✽ NOTICE• We recommend replacing tires with the same make and model originally supplied with the vehicle; not doing so

may affect driving performance. • When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please

check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary. Additionally required tire air pressure per km abovesea level: 1.5psi/km



68

WEIGHT/VOLUME

Item2.0 MPI 2.0 GDI 1.6 Turbo GDI

4 Door 4 Door 5 Door

Gross vehicle weight

lbs. (kg)

M/T 3,836 (1,740) 3,858 (1,750) 3,990 (1,810)

A/T 3,880 (1,760) 3,902 (1,770)

DCT 4,057 (1,840)

Luggage volumecu ft (l)

14.9 (421) 14.9 (421) 23.2 (657)

Item Weight of volume Classification

Refrigerant530 ± 25g

18.70 ± 0.88 ozR-134a

Compressor lubricant110 ± 10g

3.87 ± 0.35 ozPAG (FD46XG)

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM


8 7


RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIESTo help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)Recommends MPI/GDI engine 4.23 US qt. (4.0 l) API Service SM,

ILSAC GF-4 or above*3

Turbo GDI engine 4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) ACEA A5 or above

Manual transaxle fluid

MPI engine1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt.

(1.7 ~ 1.8 l) API GL-4, SAE 75W/85 or SAE 70W fill for-life orother brands meeting the GL-4 specification

approved by Kia Motors Corp.Turbo GDI engine1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt.

(1.7 ~ 1.8 l)

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.5 US qt. (7.1 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IVNOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other

brands meeting the above specification approved byKia Motors Corp.

Dual clutch transmission fluid2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.

(1.9 ~ 2.0 l)

SAE 70W, API GL-4(Recommended SK HK DCTF 70W,

SHELL SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF,GS CALTEX GS DCTF HD 70W)



88

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measurein everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Coolant

MPI/GDIengine

M/T 6.34 US qt. (6.0 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene-glycol with phosphatebased coolant for cooling device)

A/T 6.23 US qt. (5.9 l)

Turbo GDIengine

M/T 6.45 US qt. (6.1 l)

DCT 7.1 US qt (6.7 l)

Brake/clutch fluid0.7~0.8 US qt.

(0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 13.2 US gal. (50 l) Unleaded gasoline


8 9


Recommended SAE viscositynumber Always be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug, ordipstick before checking or drainingany lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engine andother mechanisms that could bedamaged. Engine oil viscosity (thick-ness) has an effect on fuel economyand cold weather operation (enginestart and engine oil flowability).Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-vide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however,higher viscosity engine oils arerequired for satisfactory lubrication inhot weather. Using oils of any viscos-ity other than those recommendedcould result in engine damage. Whenchoosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will beoperated in before the next oilchange. Proceed to select the rec-ommended oil viscosity from thechart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil(MPI/GDI) *1

Engine Oil (Turbo GDI) *2

*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engineoil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4).However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, selectthe proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

*2. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engineoil of a viscosity grade 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEAA5 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in yourcountry, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil vis-cosity chart.

10W-305W-20*1, 5W-30

20W-50

10W-3015W-40

5W-30, 5W-40



108

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the number used in register-ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

VIN labelThe VIN is also on a plate attachedto the top of the dashboard. Thenumber on the plate can easily beseen through the windshield fromoutside.

The vehicle certification labelattatched on the driver’s side centerpillar gives the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN).

OBH088005N

VIN Label

OFS080001

OFS080002

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION-LABELFrame Number


8 11


The tires supplied on your new vehi-cle are chosen to provide the bestperformance for normal driving.The tire label located on the driver'sside center pillar gives the tire pres-sures recommended for your vehicle.

The engine number is stamped onthe engine block as shown in thedrawing.

The refrigerant label is located onthe underside of the hood.The label contains the following infor-mation :• Type of refrigerant• Amount of refrigerant

REFRIGERANT LABELTIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL

OYDEMC2057

OMD0620012N

ENGINE NUMBER

OJF085004

■ Gasoline 2.0 Engine

■ Gasoline 1.6 T-GDI Engine

OQLE085010



128

Roadside Assistance is provided on all new currentmodel year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject tothe terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the KiaWarranty and Consumer Information Manual applicableto your model year vehicle.KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or otherbenefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-quency or type of occurrence.

Toll free consumer assistanceKia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffedfrom 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Fridayand is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).For more information regarding assistance available,please refer to your Kia Warranty & ConsumerInformation Manual.

Emergency roadside assistanceKia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing1-800-333-4Kia (4542).Please note that you must provide your VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the timeof your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of yourvehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-ance card.

CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)


8 13


Kia utilizes a network of over 30,000 roadside assistanceproviders. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, requirea battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a KiaRoadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some-one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tirewith your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump toallow you to proceed to your destination. We have accessto a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you shouldyou become locked out of your Kia.In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’sRoadside Assistance Representative will arrange totransport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to analternative service location.Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transportvehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service.

✽✽ NOTICERoadside Assistance benefits are not available for anyKia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’slaw or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent bya financial institution or insurance company.

Trip interruptionTrip interruption expense benefits are provided in theevent that a warranty-related disablement occurs morethan 150 miles from your home, and the repairs requiremore than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental car expens-es. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per daysubject to a three day maximum limit per incident. Youmust contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center toobtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the KiaRoadside Assistance Center gives authorization for tripinterruption benefits, they will assist you in making thenecessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company orother providers are not eligible for reimbursement.Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement underKia’s Trip Interruption Policy.



148

Registering your vehicle in a foreign countryIf you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations inthat country. Even if you successfully register the vehiclein a foreign country, you may experience the followingproblems and should therefore consider the possibility ofhaving to deal with them:

1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.If other than the specified fuel is used, it could causedamage to the engine, the fuel injection system, andother fuel-related parts which may not be coveredunder your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.

2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leavethe country in which you purchased your Kia new andregister it in another country, problems arising from theuse of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subjectto manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles likeyours may not be marketed in the new country of reg-istration, parts, servicing techniques and tools neces-sary to maintain and repair your vehicle may beunavailable.Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanicalspecifications required by the government may varyenough from the country of purchase to cause addi-tional problems.

3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the areain which you plan to register your vehicle. You mayadditionally experience difficulty in obtaining servicesin a foreign country for any number of reasons.

Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack ofservice outside of the United States.


8 15


ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.However,before any additional electrical equipment isinstalled in your vehicle, consult an Authorized KiaDealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-ranty.Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it isinstalled, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-cle, includingsuch systems as the engine control system,the audio system and the electrical charging system andthus potentially void all or part of your warranty.We assume no responsibility for any expense you mayincur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of itscomponents or systems that may result from the installa-tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,or recommended for installation by, Kia.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio systemIf a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, otherelectronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoiddamage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealerconcerning the proper equipment and installation.Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured tomeet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to readand follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-larly the information under the headings "NOTICE","CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questionsregarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues anddefects please contact your Kia's toll-free ConsumerAssistance hot line as below:

National Consumer Affairs ManagerKia Motors America, Inc.P.O. Box 52410Irvine, CA 92619-24101-800-333-4Kia (4542)


If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying KiaMotors America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia MotorsAmerica, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., WestBuilding, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

The following publications are available onwww.KiaTechinfo.com

Service manual:This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. Itis written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-stand.

Electrical troubleshooting manual:This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electricalcircuit in your vehicle.

Owner's manual:This manual describes the overall features and operatingprocedures for the vehicle.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)

ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS(U.S. ONLY)

8 16



Index

I

YDM USA Index.qxp 5/1/2016 1:29 PM Page 1

Index

2I

Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Occupant Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Non-inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

SRS Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Air conditioning system lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Armed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Audio (With Touch Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206

Feature of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207

Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218

SiriusXM Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221

Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223

Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239

Voice Recognition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246

Setup Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-254

Audio (Without Touch Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

Feature of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

SiriusXM Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176

Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182

Voice Recognition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187

Setup Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Glass antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Steering wheel audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Aux, USB and iPod®* port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

Auto light position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-116

Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Automatic transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Autonomous emergency braking (AEB). . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

A


I 3

Index

System setting and activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 5-47

Brake operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in

front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Limitation of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

For best battery service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Recharging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Blind Spot Detection System(BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Bonnet see the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Brakes/Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Checking the Brake/Clutchfluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

California Perchlorate notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100

Camera (Rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Capacities (Lubricants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Care

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

SRS Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Chains - Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

"Placing a passenger seat beltinto the auto

lock mode" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

"Securing a child restraint seatwith tether anchorage

system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

C

B


Index

4I

"Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower

anchor system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Climate control seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . 4-54

Consumer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

To increase cruise control set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise

control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

To resume cruising speed at more than

approximately 20 mph(30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Curtain air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Dashboard, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Day/night rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262

FCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262

Defogging (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Defroster (Rear window). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Defrosting (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Display illumination, see instrument panel

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Displays, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

from outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

from inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Central door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Drive mode (Drive mode integrated control system) . . . 5-61

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Drive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

ECO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

SPORT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

D


I 5

Index

"Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency

locking retractor". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Dual clutch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

ECO mode (Drive mode integrated control system) . . 5-61

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Electrochromic mirror (ECM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97

Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system. . . . . 7-97

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine start/stop button illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . . . . 7-97

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . 7-26

Engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Drive belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Fuel filter (for gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

E


Index

6I

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Air cleaner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Manual transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Valve clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Brake/Clutchhoses and lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Parking Brake/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Brake/Clutchdiscs, pads, calipers and rotors . . . . . . 7-28

Exhaust pipe and muffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Suspension mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Drive shafts and boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

Exterior overview (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview (Rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Tire Mobility Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Removing and storing the spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Flex steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Fluid

Brake/Clutchfluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Folding the outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80

Front lights replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77

Front seat adjustment (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Front seat adjustment (power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front side marker/Front turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66F


I 7

Index

.

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Headlight (bulb type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78

Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Headrest (rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

High - beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

How to use this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

.

Ignition switch illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Inside lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84

Inside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

LCD window Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Climate control seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

LCD monitor (clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

G

H

I


Index

8I

Covering shelf (5 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Interior lamp AUTO turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Interior lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Key operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Illuminated ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Keys

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Label

Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

LKAS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

LKAS malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

LKAS function change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

LCD windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Over view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Trip information (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77

Front lights replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77

Headlight (bulb type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78

Front side marker/Front turn signal light . . . . . . . . . 7-79

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80

Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . . 7-81

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-81

Outside lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

K

J

L


I 9

Index

Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp replacement . . 7-83

Inside lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84

Stop/tail light (LED type) replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Interior lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Parking light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Turn signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-95

Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items. . . . . . 7-26

Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Normal Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions . . . . . 7-24

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Owner maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Manual mode - Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Manual mode - Dual clutch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Map lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Electrochromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Folding the outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

M


Index

10I

Occupant Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Oil (Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Online factory authorized manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Outside lamp replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . . . . 7-81

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Parking light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-81

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Remote control (outside rear view mirror) . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

"Remote keyless entry systemoperations" . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Resetting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Rocking the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Rotation (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Normal Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions . . . . . 7-24

Seat belt restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Seat belt warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

O

P

R

S


I 11

Index

"Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency

locking retractor" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Seat warmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Seatback pocket (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front seat adjustment (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Front seat adjustment (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Seatback pocket (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Headrest (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

"Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower

anchor system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

"Securing a child restraint seatwith tether

anchorage system". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Shift-lock override - Automatic transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Shift-lock override - Dual clutch transmission . . . . . . . 5-30

Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Smart trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Spare tire

Removing and storing the spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Special driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Sport mode (Drive mode integrated control system) . . 5-62

SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Starting the engine - With a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Starting the engine - With an ignition key . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Flex steer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp replacement. . . . . 7-83

Stop/tail light (LED type) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86


Index

12I

Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Sunvisor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Emergency tailgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Theft-alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Tire pressure monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Tires and wheels

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire terminology and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

T


I 13

Index

Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Transaxle - Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Transaxle - Dual clutch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Trip information (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Opening trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Closing trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Emergency trunk safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Warning and Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Wheel alignment and tire balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Auto defogging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Wipers and washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 door) . . . 4-98

U

W

V


Date post:	22-Jan-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

KIA Forte 2017 Owners manual - DigitalOcean

Documents